1. home and garden
2. home improvement and repair
3. plumbing

VOLUME 2 OF 2
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
SWCSD1 K-4
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
Rock Springs, Wyoming
May 19, 2014
Construction Documents
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15000
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A.
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
The mechanical requirements are supplemental to the General Requirements of these
Specifications. The Mechanical Sections shall apply to all phases of the work specified, shown
on the Drawings, or required to provide for the complete installation of Mechanical Systems for
this project.
The work shall include all items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned,
or scheduled in these specifications and the accompanying drawings. All material, equipment,
and labor shall be furnished together with all incidental items required by good practice to
provide the complete systems described.
Examine and refer to all Architectural, Civil, Structural, Electrical, and Mechanical drawings and
specifications for construction conditions which may affect the mechanical work. Inspect the
building site and existing facilities for verification of present conditions. Make proper provisions
for these conditions in performance of the work and cost thereof.
See general requirements for listed Alternate Bids. Note alternates listed and include any
changes in work and price required to meet the requirements of the respective alternate.
CODES AND STANDARDS
Work shall meet the requirements of the plans and specifications and shall not be less than the
minimum requirements of applicable sections of the latest Codes and Standards of the following
Organizations:
1.
American Gas Association (AGA)
2.
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
3.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
4.
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
5.
National Electrical Code (NEC)
6.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
7.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
8.
International Plumbing Code (IPC)
9.
Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA)
10. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI)
11. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
12. International Mechanical Code (IMC)
13. International Building Code (IBC)
14. International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC)
15. Requirements of the Serving Utility Company
16. Local and State Codes and Ordinances
17. SMACNA Seismic Manual
FEES AND PERMITS
The Mechanical Contractor shall pay all fees and arrange for all permits required for work done
under his contract and under his supervision by subcontract.
All usage contracts between the Owner and the serving utilities company, such as membership
and usage charges or fees, etc., for the purpose of obtaining the services for the utility company
shall be applied for and paid for by the Owner.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Manufacturers trade names and catalog numbers listed in each specification section and on the
drawing schedules are intended to indicate the quality of equipment or materials desired.
Manufacturers not listed must receive prior approval prior to bidding. Written prior approval must
be obtained from the Architect/Engineer. Prior Approval Requests shall be submitted no later
ACE, Inc.
MR
15000 - 1/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15000
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
than fourteen (14) days to allow time for examination. The items approved will be listed in an
addendum and only this list of equipment will be accepted in lieu of specified products.
1.
All Prior Approval Requests shall indicate the specific item or items to be furnished in lieu
of those specified, together with complete technical and comparative data on specified
items and proposed items. Each specification section lists the project’s pre-approved
manufacturers.
Mechanical equipment may be installed with manufacturer’s standard finish and color except
where specific color, finish or choice is indicated. If the manufacturer has no standard finish,
equipment shall have a prime coat and two finish coats of gray enamel.
This Contractor shall be responsible for materials and equipment installed under this contract.
Contractor shall also be responsible for the protection of materials and equipment of others from
damage as a result of his work.
Manufactured material and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used,
cleaned and conditioned as directed by manufacturer unless herein specified to the contrary.
This Contractor shall make the required arrangement with General Contractor for the
introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings.
Store materials and equipment indoors at the job site or, if this is not possible, store on raised
platforms and protect from the weather by means of waterproof covers. Coverings shall permit
circulation of air around the materials to prevent condensation of moisture. Screen or cap
openings in equipment to prevent the entry of vermin.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
INTENT OF DRAWINGS
The drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not necessarily show exact location of piping and
ductwork unless specifically dimensioned. Riser and other diagrams are schematic and do not
necessarily show the physical arrangement of the equipment. They shall not be used for
obtaining lineal runs of piping or ductwork, nor shall they be used for shop drawings for piping
and ductwork fabrication or ordering.
The drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate the general location and arrangements
of piping and ducting systems. Install piping and ducting in the general areas shown on the
plans. If significant routing deviations are necessary to improve the system routings or avoid
unforeseen conditions contact the Engineer for review.
Discrepancies shown on different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer for resolution.
RESPONSIBILITY
The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of a satisfactory and
complete system in accordance with the intent of the drawing and specifications. Provide, at no
extra cost, all incidental items required for completion of the work even though they are not
specifically mentioned or indicated on the drawings or in the specifications.
The drawings do not attempt to show complete details of the building construction which affect
the mechanical installation; and reference is therefore required to the Architectural, Civil,
Structural, Landscape and Electrical drawings and specifications and to shop drawings of all
trades for additional details which affect the installation of the work covered under this Division
of the Contract.
Location of mechanical system components shall be checked for conflicts with openings,
structural members and components of other systems having fixed locations. In the event of any
conflicts, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted and his decision shall govern. Necessary
changes shall be made at the Contractor’s expense.
Determine, and be responsible for, the proper location and character of inserts for hangers,
chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for the work, and obtain this
information well in advance of the construction progress so work will not be delayed.
Final location of inserts, hangers, etc., required for each installation, must be coordinated with
facilities required for other installations to prevent interference.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15000 - 2/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15000
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
F.
Take extreme caution not to install work that connects to equipment until such time as complete
Shop Drawings of such equipment have been approved by the Architect/Engineer. Any work
installed by the Contractor, prior to approval of Shop Drawings, will be at the Contractor's risk.
At all times during the performance of this Contract, properly protect work from damage and
protect the Owner's property from injury of loss. Make good any damage, injury or loss, except
such as may be directly due to errors in the Bidding Documents or caused by Agents or
Employees of the Owner. Adequately protect adjacent property as provided by law and the
Bidding Documents. Provide and maintain passageways, guard fences, lights and other
facilities for protection required by Public Authority or Local conditions.
The Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to the work of their Contractors, to the
building or its contents, people, etc.
G.
H.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
B.
1.9
A.
1.10
A.
B.
REVIEW
All work and material is subject to review at any time by the Architect/Engineer or his
representative. If the Architect/Engineer or his representative finds material that does not
conform with these specifications or that is not properly installed or finished, correct the
deficiencies in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer at the Contractor’s expense.
WORKMANSHIP
GENERAL
1.
Work under this contract shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular trade,
including work necessary to properly complete the installation in a workmanlike manner
to present a neat and finished appearance.
CUTTING, PATCHING, AND FRAMING
1.
Obtain Architect's/Engineer's approval before performing any cutting on structural
members or patching of building surfaces. Any damage to the building or equipment by
this Contractor shall be the responsibility of this Contractor and shall be repaired by
skilled craftsmen of the trades involved at the Contractor’s expense.
2.
Chases, openings, sleeves, hangers, anchors, recesses, equipment pads, framing for
equipment, provided by others only if so noted on the drawings. Otherwise, they will be
provided by this Contractor for his work. Whether chases, etc., are provided by this
Contractor or others, this Contractor is responsible for correct size and locations.
COORDINATION
This Contractor shall plan his work to proceed with a minimum interference with the Owner and
other trades. Dimensions of equipment installed and/or provided by others shall be checked in
order that correct clearances and connections may be made.
CLEAN UP
Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by his work or
employees.
Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps and debris relative to his work and leave
the premises, including tunnels, crawl spaces, and pipe chases in clean and orderly condition.
Remove all dirt and debris from the interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. After
construction is completed, wash all mechanical equipment.
1.11
A.
DUST PROTECTION
Contractor will provide suitable dust protection for all existing areas prior to beginning of cutting
or demolition. Contractor will obtain approval of partition from Owner before proceeding with
work involved in these rooms.
1.12
A.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
OFFICES
ACE, Inc.
MR
15000 - 3/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15000
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.
Contractor shall provide a temporary office for himself and for the periodic use by the
Architect\Engineer including:
a.
Lights, heat, and telephone.
REMOVAL
1.
Contractor shall completely remove his temporary installations when no longer needed
and the premises shall be completely clean, disinfected, patched, and refinished to match
adjacent areas.
LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDS
1.
The Contractor shall provide their own ladders, scaffolds, etc. of substantial construction
for access to their work in various portions of the building as may be required. When no
longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor.
PROTECTION DEVICES
1.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain his own necessary barricades, fences, signal
lights, etc., required by all governing authorities or shown on the drawings. When no
longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall assume all
responsibility for which the Owner may be held responsible because of lack of above
items.
TEMPORARY WATER
1.
The Contractor shall provide all water required by his trade for construction. Temporary
drinking water shall be provided by Contractor from a proven safe source dispensed by
single service containers, until such time as the construction water outlet has been
installed, disinfected, and approved for drinking purposes.
TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
1.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary first-aid hand fire extinguishers for Class A, B,
C and special hazards as may exist in his own work area only in accordance with good
and safe practice and as required by jurisdictional safety authority. The Contractor shall
provide general area fire extinguishers only.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.13
A.
B.
SHOP DRAWINGS (Product Submittals)
At a minimum, provide manufacturer's literature and/or certified prints as soon as possible but
within thirty (30) days after awarding of Contract, for items of materials, equipment, or systems
where called for in specifications. Shop drawings and literature complete showing item used,
size, dimensions, capacity, rough-in, etc., as required for complete check and installation.
Manufacture’s literature showing more than one item shall be clearly marked as to which item is
being furnished or it will be rejected and returned without review.
Shop Drawing (Submittals) Format:
1.
The entire Division 15 shall be submitted in pdf format in one (1) entire package, except
as noted below, but separated by each specific specification section. Each respective
submittal division clearly tagged as such. Submittal Binder Cover shall include the
following:
SUBMITTAL BINDER COVER
Date:
Name of Project:
Name of Contracting Company:
Name of Contracting Company Project Contact Person:
Contracting Company Phone Number:
Branch of Work:
2.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Each Copy of each item submitted must be clearly marked as follows for purposes of
identification and record. Submittals not marked as described below will be rejected and
returned without review.
15000 - 4/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15000
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SUBMITTAL BINDER DIVISION SECTIONS (as listed below in the Schedule of Shop Drawings)
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Specification Number and Title
Product Data Specification Number and Title (and Plan Code reference number where
applicable)
3.
At the contractor’s option, the following specification sections can be submitted as
individual submittal packages to allow independent and expedited reviews:
a.
15820
Modular Indoor Central-Station Air Handling Units
b.
15980
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for Plumbing and HVAC
c.
15990
Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
d.
15995
Temperature Control and Sequence of Operation
Prior to Formal Submittal Binder Submission:
1.
Transmit to the engineer a Submittal Binder Table of Contents for engineer review prior
to formal submittal binder submission. The Table of Contents may be sent via facsimile
or email methods. Once the Submittal Binder Table of Contents is approved by the
engineer then the contractor shall submit the complete Submittal Binder.
2.
Each submittal shall be thoroughly checked by the Contractor for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements, accuracy of dimensions, relationship to the work of
other trades, and conformance with sound, safe practices as to erection and installation.
Each submittal shall then bear a stamp evidencing such checking and shall show
corrections made, if any. Submittals requiring extensive corrections shall be revised
before submission. Each submittal not stamped and signed by the Contractor evidencing
such checking will be rejected and returned without review.
All submittals will be examined when submitted in proper form for compliance. Such review shall
not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors, for deviation from the contract Documents,
nor for violation of sound safety practices.
The Contractor shall keep in the field office one (1) pdf and one (1) print of each submittal which
has been reviewed and stamped by the Architect or Engineer.
Submittals will be required for each product item as identified and listed in the Submittal
paragraph for each respective specification section listed in the Schedule of Shop Drawings
listed below in paragraph I.
Submittals which are incomplete relative to quality requirements, capacity, engineering data,
dimensional data or detailed list of specialty or control equipment will be rejected. Lists shall
include descriptive coding as specified or shown on drawings.
THE ENGINEER WILL PERFORM SHOP DRAWING REVIEW OF EACH ITEM; HOWEVER,
SUBSEQUENT REVIEW OF ITEMS PREVIOUSLY REJECTED WILL BE BILLED TO THE
CONTRACTOR AT A RATE OF $95 PER HOUR.
H.
ACE, Inc.
MR
SCHEDULE OF SHOP DRAWINGS.
1.
15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2.
15070 METERS AND GAGES FOR PIPING
3.
15080 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
4.
15082 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
5.
15090 IDENTIFICATION FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
6.
15120 VIBRATION CONTROL AND EXPANSION FITTINGS
7.
15130 PIPING INSULATION
8.
15132 DUCT INSULATION
9.
15412 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
10. 15422 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
11. 15430 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
12. 15432 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
13. 15440 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
14. 15442 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
15000 - 5/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15000
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
I.
15450
15460
15470
15504
15610
15660
15665
15670
15680
15690
15780
15785
15810
15820
15830
15835
15850
15870
15890
15980
15990
15995
DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
PLUMBING FIXTURES
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
CONDENSING BOILERS
HYDRONIC PIPING
HYDRONIC PUMPS
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONERS
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
METAL DUCTS
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, GRILLES, AND LOUVERS
COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Should the contractor be required to re-submit, then the entire submittal section shall be resubmitted.
1.14
A.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
At the time orders are placed for any item of equipment requiring service or operating
maintenance, the Contractor shall request the manufacturer furnish three (3) copies of
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS for each piece of equipment. These shall
be included in the brochure of equipment.
1.15
A.
BROCHURE OF EQUIPMENT
Upon completion of work, prepare three copies of "Brochure of Equipment" containing data
pertinent to equipment and systems on job. Binders containing materials shall be one or more
three ring binders of sufficient number to hold all literature. Contained in binders shall be:
Installation, maintenance, and operating instructions for each piece of equipment; parts lists;
wiring diagrams; one copy of each shop drawing and literature submittal; record drawings, etc.
All literature shall be clean, unused and filed under divider headings corresponding to the
specifications.
These brochures shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and approved by him before
authorization of final payment.
B.
C.
1.16
A.
B.
1.17
A.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer a marked print showing the location of all
mechanical equipment, plumbing fixtures, piping, ductwork, diffusers, grilles, etc. The location
of any item which deviates from the bid documents shall be accurately drawn and dimensioned.
The location of all maintenance related items such as duct access doors, fire dampers, isolation
valves, filters, etc., shall be highlighted on as built drawing.
PLACING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION
At the completion of the work and at such time as the Owner shall direct, prior to final
acceptance, the Contractor performing this work shall put into satisfactory operation the various
systems installed under the specifications. At no additional cost to the Owner, furnish the
ACE, Inc.
MR
15000 - 6/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15000
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
services of a person completely familiar with the installations performed under this specification,
to instruct the Owner’s operating personnel in the proper operation and servicing of the
equipment and systems. These services shall be available for a period of no less than one (1)
day and shall be scheduled no less than one (1) week prior to conducting.
1.18
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
WARRANTY
The Contractor shall guarantee that all materials and labor installed are new and of first quality
and that any material or labor found defective shall be replaced without cost to the Owner within
one (1) year after substantial completion of the Contract or one (1) full season of heating and
cooling operation, whichever is the greater. The guarantee shall list the date of the beginning of
the one (1) year period, which shall be the date that the Substantial Completion Certificate is
issued.
Any damage to the building, caused by defective work or material of the Contractor within the
above-mentioned period, shall be satisfactorily repaired without cost to the Owner.
The guarantee does not include maintenance of equipment. The Owner shall accept full
responsibility for proper operation and maintenance of equipment immediately upon substantial
completion and occupancy of the building.
Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are mounted in
Equipment Rooms and Operating Personnel thoroughly indoctrinated in the operation of all
mechanical equipment by the Contractor.
Any equipment, including boilers, pumps, air handlers, motors, etc., used for temporary heat,
shall be brought up to a new condition before final acceptance by the Owner and shall be
guaranteed by the Contractor as new equipment. Permission for temporary use prior to
substantial completion shall be received from the architect and engineer.
END OF SECTION 15 00 00
ACE, Inc.
MR
15000 - 7/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15020
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8. Concrete bases.
9. Supports and anchorages.
1.2
A.
DEFINITIONS
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved
and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics
may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting
electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum
energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
JOINING MATERIALS
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15020 - 1/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15020
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum
thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint,
plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at
180 deg F.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
SLEEVES
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
ESCUTCHEONS
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit
around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15020 - 2/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15020
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
2.7
A.
GROUT
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,
and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping
systems.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as generally shown on
the drawings. Significant deviations to layouts shall be reviewed and approved with the Engineer.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required
for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stop materials.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15020 - 3/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15020
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
3.3
A.
PIPING CONNECTIONS
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials
of dissimilar metals.
3.4
A.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not
indicated.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
A.
CONCRETE BASES
Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15020 - 4/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15020
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.6
A.
B.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
3.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement.
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC
materials and equipment.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
GROUTING
Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
Place grout around anchors.
Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 15020
ACE, Inc.
MR
15020 - 5/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15030
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1.
Motor controllers.
2.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.4
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
POLYPHASE MOTORS
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
Service Factor: 1.15.
Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1.
For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2.
For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
Insulation: Class F.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2.
Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame
sizes smaller than 324T.
POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
15030 - 1/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15030
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT
B.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.
Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
2.
Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3.
Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4.
Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements
of specific motor application:
1.
Permanent-split capacitor.
2.
Split phase.
3.
Capacitor start, inductor run.
4.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when
winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.
Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal
range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 15030
ACE, Inc.
MR
15030 - 2/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
3.
Metal framing systems.
4.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5.
Fastener systems.
6.
Equipment supports.
DEFINITIONS
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems, system contents, and test water.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
3.
Thermal hanger shield inserts.
4.
Pipe Shields
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
Manufacturers:
1.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3.
Grinnell Corp.
4.
National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
5.
PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
6.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
15060 - 1/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
C.
D.
E.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
7.
Tolco Inc.
8.
Other manufactures meeting the specification requirements.
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels
and other components.
Manufacturers:
1.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3.
Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
4.
Tolco Inc.
5.
Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
6.
Other manufactures meeting the specification requirements.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal
shield.
Manufacturers:
1.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
2.
Pipe Shields, Inc.
3.
Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
4.
Value Engineered Products, Inc.
5.
Other manufactures meeting the specification requirements.
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate.
1.
Insert thickness shall match insulation thickness.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate.
1.
Insert thickness shall match insulation thickness.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
FASTENER SYSTEMS
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b.
Empire Industries, Inc.
c.
Hilti, Inc.
d.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
15060 - 2/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
f.
g.
2.7
A.
2.8
A.
B.
Powers Fasteners.
Other manufacture meeting the specification requirements.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel
shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
ACE, Inc.
MR
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes,
NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated and
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 1 1/2.
5.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
6.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
7.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4
to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
15060 - 3/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
8.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
9.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
3.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 11/4 inches.
2.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
3.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete
construction.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
15060 - 4/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and
larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1.
Clamped piping:
a.
Piping 1-1/2” and smaller: use protection shields. Shields shall span an arc of 180
degrees.
b.
Piping 2” and larger: use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match
OD of insert.
c.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2.
Hanger Supported piping:
a.
Piping 1-1/2” and smaller: use protection shields. Shields shall span an arc of 180
degrees.
b.
Piping 2” and larger: use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match
OD of insert.
c.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping
3.
Protection Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
4.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Insulation shall be continuous through
the clamped and hanger supported piping.
5.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp or Hanger may project through
the insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
15060 - 5/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
B.
C.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
PAINTING
Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 15060
15060 - 6/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15070
METERS AND GAGES FOR PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Liquid-in-glass thermometers.
2.
Thermowells.
3.
Dial-type pressure gages.
4.
Gage attachments.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Miljoco Corporation.
b.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
c.
Winters Instruments - U.S.
2.
Standard: ASME B40.200.
3.
Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue organic liquid.
6.
Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings
graduated in deg F.
7.
Window: Glass.
8.
Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.
a.
Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
9.
Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of
1.5 percent of scale range.
THERMOWELLS
Thermowells:
1.
Standard: ASME B40.200.
2.
Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
3.
Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.
4.
Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA.
5.
Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
6.
External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
7.
Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
8.
Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
9.
Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.
11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of
thermometer connection.
Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
15070 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15070
METERS AND GAGES FOR PIPING
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
PRESSURE GAGES
Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
b.
Ashcroft Inc.
c.
Ernst Flow Industries.
d.
Miljoco Corporation.
e.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
f.
Winters Instruments - U.S.
2.
Standard: ASME B40.100.
3.
Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-inch minimum nominal
diameter.
4.
Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and
bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
6.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
7.
Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.
8.
Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
9.
Window: Glass.
10. Ring: Stainless steel.
11. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.
GAGE ATTACHMENTS
Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and
piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 pipe threads.
Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION
Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in
piping tees.
Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if
required to match sizes.
Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.
Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the
most readable position.
Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.
Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements
and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.
Install thermometers in the following locations:
1.
Where shown on the Drawings.
Install pressure gages in the following locations:
1.
Where shown on the Drawings.
15070 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15070
METERS AND GAGES FOR PIPING
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
B.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
3.7
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
CONNECTIONS
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
ADJUSTING
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
Thermometers shall be the following:
1.
Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.
Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.
THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 20 to 240 deg F.
Scale Range for Chilled Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.
Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping:
1.
Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.
2.
Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.
PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE
Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:
1.
Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.
Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each boiler heating hot-water connection shall be the
following:
1.
Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.
Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be the following:
1.
Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.
PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
Scale Range for Piping: 0 to 100 psi.
END OF SECTION 15070
15070 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15080
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Bronze ball valves.
2.
Iron gate valves.
3.
Bronze swing check valves.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 15 Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
2.
Division 15 Section "Identification for Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
schedules.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design
criteria.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
All piping, valves, and equipment for domestic water service shall comply with the Reduction of
Lead in Drinking Water Act of 2011 which will be enforced January 4, 2014.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
Valve Actuator Types:
1.
Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
2.
Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:
1.
Gate Valves: With non-rising stem.
2.
Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
Valve-End Connections:
1.
Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
2.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
BRONZE BALL VALVES
Two-Piece, Standard-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
NIBCO INC.
b.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2.
Description:
a.
Model Series 6000
b.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
15080 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15080
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
SWP Rating: 150 psig.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
Body Design: Two piece.
Body Material: Bronze.
Ends: Threaded.
Seats: PTFE or TFE.
Stem: Bronze.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Port: Standard.
IRON GATE VALVES
Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Nibco Inc.
b.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies Company.
2.
Description:
a.
Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.
b.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
c.
Body Material: Gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d.
Ends: Flanged.
e.
Trim: Bronze.
f.
Disc: Solid wedge.
g.
Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free
BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
NIBCO INC.
b.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2.
Description:
a.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.
b.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
c.
Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d.
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
e.
Ends: Threaded.
f.
Disc: Bronze.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
MR
VALVE INSTALLATION
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
Valve Handle:
1.
Contractor shall not be permitted to modify the valve handle configuration from the
manufacturer’s configuration.
2.
Contractor shall position valves to permit full use and access to the valve handles.
15080 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15080
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
ADJUSTING
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
Select valves with the following end connections:
1.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valveend option is indicated in valve schedules below.
DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Smaller:
1.
Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2.
Ball Valves: Two piece, regular port, bronze with bronze trim.
3.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
Pipe NPS 3 and Larger:
1.
Two piece, regular port, bronze with bronze trim.
2.
Iron gate valves, Class 125, NRS with flanged ends.
END OF SECTION 15080
15080 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15082
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Bronze ball valves.
2.
Iron gate valves.
3.
Bronze swing check valves.
4.
Iron swing check valves.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 15 Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
2.
Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
schedules.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design
criteria.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
Valve Actuator Types:
1.
Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:
1.
Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
Valve-End Connections:
1.
Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.
2.
Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
3.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
BRONZE BALL VALVES
Two-Piece, Standard-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
NIBCO INC.
b.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2.
Description:
a.
Model Series 6000
b.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
c.
SWP Rating: 150 psig.
d.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
e.
Body Design: Two piece.
f.
Body Material: Bronze.
g.
Ends: Threaded.
15082 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15082
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Seats: PTFE or TFE.
Stem: Bronze.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Port: Standard.
BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
NIBCO INC
b.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2.
Description:
a.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.
b.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
c.
Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d.
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
e.
Ends: Threaded.
f.
Disc: Bronze.
IRON GATE VALVES
Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
NIBCO INC
b.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc
2.
Description:
a.
Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.
b.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.
c.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d.
Ends: Flanged.
e.
Trim: Bronze.
f.
Disc: Solid wedge.
g.
Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free
IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Crane
b.
Milwaukee Valve Company
c.
NIBCO INC
d.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2.
Description:
a.
Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.
b.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.
c.
Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
d.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
e.
Ends: Flanged.
f.
Trim: Bronze.
g.
Gasket: Asbestos free.
15082 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15082
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
3.5
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
EXAMINATION
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
VALVE INSTALLATION
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
Valve Handle:
1.
Contractor shall not be permitted to modify the valve handle configuration from the
manufacturer’s configuration.
2.
Contractor shall position valves to permit full use and access to the valve handles.
Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with hinge pin
level.
ADJUSTING
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1.
Shutoff Service: Ball or Gate valves.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends.
3.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
4.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Flanged ends.
HEATING HOT-WATER AND CHILLED WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1.
Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2.
Ball Valves
3.
Bronze Swing Check Valves
Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
1.
Iron, Gate Valves
2.
Iron Swing Check Valves
END OF SECTION 15082
15082 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15090
IDENTIFICATION FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Pipe labels.
SUBMITTAL
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
2.3
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
EQUIPMENT LABELS
Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: White.
3. Background Color: Black.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 21/2 by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,
1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for
greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size
of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules).
PIPE LABELS
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
VALVE TAGS
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with ¼-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and ½-inch
numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness and having predrilled or stamped holes
for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on an 8-1/2 x 11-inch bonded paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal-operating position (open, close, or modulating), and variations for identification.
Mark valves for emergency shut-off and similar special uses.
15090 - 1/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15090
IDENTIFICATION FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PREPARATION
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Domestic Water Piping:
a.
Background Color: Green.
b.
Letter Color: White.
2. Storm Drainage Piping:
a.
Background Color: Blue.
b.
Letter Color: White
3. Heating Hot Water, Chilled Water, and Natural Gas Piping:
a.
Background Color: Yellow.
b.
Letter Color: Black.
c.
Flow Directional Arrows: Show flow direction.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units. List tagged valves is a valve schedule.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a.
1-1/2 inch round.
2. Valve-Tag Color:
a.
Natural
3. Letter Color: stamped only allowed.
END OF SECTION 15090
15090 - 2/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION 15120
VIBRATION CONTROL AND EXPANSION FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Housed-spring isolators.
2.
Elastomeric hangers.
3.
Spring hangers.
4.
Thermal Expansion Loops
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing: .
1.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5.
Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an
elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.
a.
Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad
attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
b.
Top housing with threaded mounting holes and internal leveling device.
RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:
1.
Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight
being removed.
a.
Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to
the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
b.
Top plate with threaded mounting holes.
c.
Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2.
Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
4.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
5.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
6.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part
Telescoping Housing:
1.
Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an
elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with
adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.
15120 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15120
VIBRATION CONTROL AND EXPANSION FITTINGS
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad
attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
b.
Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level
equipment.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
ELASTOMERIC HANGERS
Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an
opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hangerrod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2.
Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel
contact.
SPRING HANGERS
Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression:
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
8.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
EXPANSION LOOPS (THERMAL EXPANSION)
Flexible Expansion Loop consisting of two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90 deg
elbows, and a 180 deg return.
1.
Materials of construction and end fitting type shall be consistent with the pipe materials.
a.
Hydronic Systems:
1)
End Fitting, 90 deg Elbow, and 180 deg Return: Schedule 40 Carbon Steel
2)
Hose and Braid: Stainless Steel.
b.
Domestic Water Systems
1)
Domestic Water certified and No Lead required.
a)
End Fitting, 90 deg Elbow, and 180 deg Return: Copper
b)
Hose and Braid: Bronze
2.
Unit shall be factory assembled that the piping does not change direction, but maintains
its course along a single axis.
3.
Unit shall have a factory supplied, center support nut located at the bottom of the 180 deg
return, and a drain/air release plug.
15120 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15120
VIBRATION CONTROL AND EXPANSION FITTINGS
4.
Units shall be constructed to permit piping movement of 4-inches in compression or
tension.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or
ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.
EXPANSION LOOP INSTALLATION
Follow manufacture’s installation guidelines.
Use domestic water certified and no lead thermal expansion loops for the domestic water
system.
END OF SECTION 15120
15120 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15130
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:
1.
Domestic-water piping.
2.
Heating hot-water piping
3.
Chilled water piping.
4.
Chilled water pumps.
5.
Air Separators
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive,
mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
2.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSULATION MATERIALS
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1.
Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
2.
Knauf Insulation.
3.
Manson Insulation Inc.
4.
Owens Corning.
Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply
with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 1290 Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket.
Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA, or Type IB. Provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ.
Mineral-Fiber, Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Simirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA
15130 - 1/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15130
PIPING INSULATION
Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu.ft.
or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq.ft. x deg F or less.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.4
A.
B.
2.5
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSULATING CEMENTS
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
ADHESIVES
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
ASJ Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap
seams and joints.
1.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
MASTICS
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
2.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
3.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
4.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
Joint Sealants:
1.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2.
Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
4.
Color: White or gray.
5.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
6.
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
15130 - 2/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15130
PIPING INSULATION
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: Aluminum.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
6.
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
4.
Color: White.
5.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
6.
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
2.
Color: White.
3.
Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a.
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap
and supply covers for lavatories.
Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.
1.
Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
2.
Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
3.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and
kraft paper.
4.
Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
a.
Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
b.
Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.
c.
Tee covers.
d.
Flange and union covers.
e.
End caps.
f.
Beveled collars.
g.
Valve covers.
h.
Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not
available.
15130 - 3/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15130
PIPING INSULATION
2.8
A.
B.
2.9
A.
B.
TAPES
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Width: 3 inches.
2.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
3.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4.
Elongation: 2 percent.
5.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1.
Width: 2 inches.
2.
Thickness: 3.7 mils.
3.
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
4.
Elongation: 5 percent.
5.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PREPARATION
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements
for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
15130 - 4/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15130
PIPING INSULATION
3.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
3.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps
with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a.
For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and
at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
Vibration-control devices.
2.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
3.
Nameplates and data plates.
4.
Manholes.
5.
Handholes.
6.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
3.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with
sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
15130 - 5/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15130
PIPING INSULATION
D.
E.
F.
3.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
3.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least
2 inches.
4.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve
stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
15130 - 6/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15130
PIPING INSULATION
9.
C.
D.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape
insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except
divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in
two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at
least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
15130 - 7/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15130
PIPING INSULATION
2.
3.
4.
3.6
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION
Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation
with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 50 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2.
Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including
contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end
joints.
3.
Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4.
Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on
sides of tanks and vessels as follows:
a.
Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
b.
Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service
temperature and with substrate.
c.
On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation
end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.
d.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e.
Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks
and vessels.
f.
Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5.
Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band
material compatible with insulation materials.
6.
Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and
where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing
insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut
with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around
equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two
circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around
outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from
the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles
along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this
network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7.
Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.
8.
Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,
handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.
9.
Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,
joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
Insulation Installation on Pumps:
1.
Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box
joints with splits in pump casings. Secure the box sections together using a latching
mechanism.
2.
Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.40 inch thick.
15130 - 8/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15130
PIPING INSULATION
3.
3.7
A.
B.
3.8
A.
3.9
A.
B.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations.
Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1.
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12
inches o.c. and at end joints.
FINISHES
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2.
Underground piping.
3.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: Insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick for piping 1-1/2” and smaller and 2”
thick for piping 2” and larger.
Chilled Water Supply and Return, above 40 Deg F: Insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.
Domestic Cold, Hot, and Recirculated Hot Water Piping 2” and less: Insulation shall be the
following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
Domestic Cold, Hot, and Recirculated Hot Water Piping 2 1/2” and greater: Insulation shall be
the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 ½” inch thick.
Stormwater and Overflow: Insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick
3.11
A.
OUTDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
Chilled Water Supply and Return, above 40 Deg F: Insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 3 inches thick.
3.12
A.
OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the fieldapplied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
Piping, Exposed:
1.
Aluminum, stucco embossed: 0.024 thick.
B.
3.13
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
Chilled-water pump insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu.ft. nominal density.
Chilled-water air-separator insulation shall be the following:
15130 - 9/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15130
PIPING INSULATION
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
1.
Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inch thick.
Heating-hot-water air-separator insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank 2 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 15130
15130 - 10/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15132
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1.
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2.
Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
3.
Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
4.
Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
2.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSULATION MATERIALS
Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum
Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule"
articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket.
Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
ADHESIVES
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation
jacket lap seams and joints.
15132 - 1/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15132
DUCT INSULATION
1.
2.
2.3
A.
B.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
B.
2.7
A.
2.8
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
MASTICS
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
2.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
3.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
4.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
FSK Flashing Sealants:
1.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
4.
Color: Aluminum.
5.
For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
6.
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
TAPES
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Width: 3 inches.
2.
Thickness: 6.5 mils.
3.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4.
Elongation: 2 percent.
5.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
SECUREMENTS
Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
15132 - 2/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15132
DUCT INSULATION
B.
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
b.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
c.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
2.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
3.
Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PREPARATION
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
15132 - 3/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15132
DUCT INSULATION
2.
L.
M.
N.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
3.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and
at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
PENETRATIONS
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves
to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1.
Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping
and fire-resistive joint sealers.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper
sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct
insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of
vertical ducts as follows:
a.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c.
each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to
hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e.
Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
15132 - 4/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15132
DUCT INSULATION
f.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
B.
3.7
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch
o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal.
b.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the
insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At
end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1.
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4.
Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end
joints.
5.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-barrier mastic.
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1.
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2.
Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
3.
Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
4.
Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
Items Not Insulated:
1.
Fibrous-glass ducts.
2.
Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
3.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4.
Flexible connectors.
5.
Vibration-control devices.
6.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and
0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
15132 - 5/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15132
DUCT INSULATION
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick
and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Concealed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanke], 1-1/2 inches thick
and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and
0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Exposed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and
0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Exposed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and
0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
END OF SECTION 15132
15132 - 6/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15410
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the
building:
1.
Pipe, tube, and fittings, and special pipe fittings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
Return Air Plenum:
1.
A return air plenum is being utilized above the ceilingss. No plastic piping is permitted in
the return air plenum areas.
SUBMITTALS
Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
and "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PIPING MATERIALS
Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
1.
Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and
deaerator drainage fittings.
2.
Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosionresistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
a.
Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel
corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564,
rubber sleeve.
b.
Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield,
stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
1.
Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought-copper,
solder-joint fittings.
Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste, and vent.
1.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,
and vent patterns.
2.
Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:
a.
Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b.
Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
15410 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15410
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PIPING APPLICATIONS
Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 6 and smaller Insert pipe size range shall be
any of the following:
1.
Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
2.
Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
3.
Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1.
Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
2.
Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
PIPING INSTALLATION
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight.
Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be
used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with
common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades
and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint
as completed.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2.
Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3.
Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if
slab is without membrane waterproofing.
Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
15410 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15410
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.5
A.
B.
3.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1.
Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2.
Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2.
NPS 3 and NPS 4: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3.
Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to
60 inches.
Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2.
NPS 3 and NPS 4: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
CONNECTIONS
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1.
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
2.
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
4.
Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2
and larger.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
15410 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15410
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
2.
B.
C.
D.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
3.8
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
2.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
CLEANING
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
PROTECTION
Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of waterbased latex paint.
END OF SECTION 15410
15410 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15412
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1.
Cleanouts.
2.
Floor drains and sinks.
3.
Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
4.
Flashing materials.
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
1.3
Include rated capacities, operating
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
CLEANOUTS
Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
3.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping
4.
Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected
piping.
5.
Closure: Countersunk, cast-iron or plastic plug.
6.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.
3.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
4.
Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
5.
Closure: Countersunk, brass or cast-iron plug.
6.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
15412 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15412
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
7.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.
FLOOR DRAINS AND SINKS
Cast-Iron Floor Drains:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
g.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Refer to the Plumbing Fixture Schedule for product basis.
MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:
1.
Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
2.
Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.
Trap Seals:
1.
Pro-Set Trap Guard
2.
All floor drains and floor sinks shall be fitted with a ProSeal Trap Guard (refer to
specification section 15432 – Domestic Water Piping Specialties).
Air-Gap Fittings:
1.
Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between
installed inlet and outlet piping.
2.
Body: Bronze or cast iron.
3.
Inlet: Opening in top of body.
4.
Outlet: Larger than inlet.
5.
Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated
indirect waste piping.
Air Admittance Valve:
1.
Studor Maxi-Vent
a.
Assembly to consist of Maxi-Vent, Styrofoam cap, and Aluminum Cover.
b.
Temperature Range: -40 deg F to 150 deg F (ASSE).
Sleeve Flashing Device:
1.
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for
pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top
of fitting that will extend 2 inches above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension
in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.
2.
Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
FLASHING MATERIALS
Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.
2.
Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.
3.
Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
15412 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15412
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set
with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a.
Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4inch total depression.
b.
Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c.
Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1inch total depression.
3.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.
Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
1.
Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.
2.
Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
Install ProSeal Trap Guard on all floor drains and floor sinks.
Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping
discharge into sanitary drainage system.
Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
FLASHING INSTALLATION
Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings.
Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
15412 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15412
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
3.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PROTECTION
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15412
15412 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15420
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building.
1.
Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2.
Special pipe fittings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.
A return air plenum is being utilized above the ceilings. No plastic piping is permitted in the
return air plenum.
SUBMITTALS
Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
PIPING MATERIALS
Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
1.
Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosionresistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
a.
Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel
corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564,
rubber sleeve.
b.
Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield,
stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste, and vent.
1.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns.
2.
Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:
a.
Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b.
Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PIPING APPLICATIONS
Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following:
15420 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15420
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
1.
C.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
coupled joints.
2.
Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1.
Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
coupled joints.
2.
Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
PIPING INSTALLATION
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm
sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight.
Install wall-penetration-fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep
bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard
increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage
piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades
and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint
as completed.
Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2.
Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if
slab is without membrane waterproofing.
Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.
Install underground PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
3.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Piping and
Equipment."
15420 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15420
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.5
A.
B.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2.
NPS 3 and NPS 4, and NPS 60: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3.
NPS 6: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
4.
Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to
60 inches.
Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2.
NPS 3 and NPS 4: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3.
NPS 6: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
CONNECTIONS
Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.
Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in.
2.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.
CLEANING
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15420
15420 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15422
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following storm drainage piping specialties:
1.
Cleanouts.
2.
Roof drains.
3.
Downspout Nozzle
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
CLEANOUTS
Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
3.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping
4.
Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected
piping.
5.
Closure: Countersunk, cast-iron or plastic plug.
6.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.
3.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
4.
Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
5.
Closure: Countersunk, brass or cast-iron plug.
6.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
7.
Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.
15422 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15422
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
B.
ROOF DRAINS
Cast-Iron Roof Drains:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
g.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Refer to the Plumbing Fixture Schedule for product basis.
Downspout Nozzles
Brass Outlet Nozzles:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
g.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Refer to the Plumbing Fixture Schedule for product basis
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
1.
Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain
and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2.
Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
15422 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15422
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
CONNECTIONS
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
PROTECTION
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 15422
15422 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15430
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and
specialties inside the building.
2.
Specialty valves.
3.
Flexible connectors.
4.
Escutcheons.
5.
Sleeves and sleeve seals.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include
marking "NSF-pw" on piping.
Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
All piping, valves, and equipment for domestic water service shall comply with the Reduction of
Lead in Drinking Water Act of 2011 which will be enforced January 4, 2014.
A return air plenum is being utilized above the ceilings. No non-metallic piping is permitted in
the return air plenum.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PIPING MATERIALS
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.
1.
Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
2.
Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
3.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
4.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
a.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each
end.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.
1.
Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1.
Standard-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron.
a.
Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
2.
Compact-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron.
a.
Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber
15430 - 1/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15430
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2.4
A.
B.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS
PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing.
Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1807, metal-insert type with copper or stainless-steel crimp
rings and matching PEX tube dimensions.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21,
nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless
otherwise indicated.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
TRANSITION FITTINGS
Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system
fitting.
Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:
1.
Description:
PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent
dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-socket or
threaded end.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:
1.
Description: PVC four-part union. Include brass or stainless-steel threaded end, solventcement-joint plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material
body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and
temperature.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
Description:
a.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F.
b.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric Flanges:
1.
Description:
a.
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
b.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
c.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solderjoint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric-Flange Kits:
1.
Description:
a.
Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
b.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
c.
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e.
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
Dielectric Couplings:
1.
Description:
a.
Galvanized-steel coupling.
b.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
c.
End Connections: Female threaded.
d.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic.
15430 - 2/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15430
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
F.
2.8
A.
2.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Dielectric Nipples:
1.
Description:
a.
Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.
b.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
c.
End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
d.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering
and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1.
Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.
2.
End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube.
3.
End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
ESCUTCHEONS
General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.
One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.
One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with setscrew or spring clips.
Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.
Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with exposed-rivet hinge, setscrew or spring
clips.
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
SLEEVES
Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinccoated, with plain ends.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
2.11
A.
SLEEVE SEALS
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
1.
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel Stainless steel.
3.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.12
A.
GROUT
Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydrauliccement grout.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15430 - 3/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15430
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PIPING INSTALLATION
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600
and AWWA M41.
Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22
Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves.
Install domestic water piping level and plumb.
Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees.
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump.
Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping.
Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and
fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
15430 - 4/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15430
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
F.
G.
H.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
B.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
3.6
A.
B.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
Joints for PEX Piping: Join according to ASTM F 1807.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
VALVE INSTALLATION
Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use gate
valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping.
1.
Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2.
Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.
Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each
pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow.
TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.
2.
NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water
pump.
Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2.
NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
4.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
5.
NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches.
Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
15430 - 5/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15430
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
3.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.9
A.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.11
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to
the following:
1.
Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2.
Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code.
3.
Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
polished chrome plated finish in all finished spaces.
Escutcheons shall have
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in
floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation
using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
sleeve seals specified in this Section.
Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve
and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
1.
Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment
Areas or Other Wet Areas: Steel pipe.
a.
Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level.
b.
For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve
fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.
2.
Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:
a.
Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION
Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into
building.
15430 - 6/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15430
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
B.
Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in
center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe
and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.
3.12
A.
B.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify system components.
Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.13
A.
B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections.
Piping Inspections:
1.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b.
Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Piping Tests:
1.
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3.
Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
5.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6.
Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
C.
D.
E.
3.14
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
CLEANING
Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
15430 - 7/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15430
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
1)
B.
C.
3.15
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.16
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2)
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
PIPING SCHEDULE
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 6, shall be the
following:
1.
Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- or compact- pattern push-on-joint fittings; and
gasketed joints.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; and
soldered joints.
2.
PEX tube, NPS 1 and smaller for branch run-outs to fixture; fittings for PEX tube; and
crimped joints. Reminder: return air plenum typically used above the lower and upper
level ceilings.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:
1.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; and
soldered joints.
VALVE SCHEDULE
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1.
Shutoff Duty: Use ball for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use gate valves with flanged ends
for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2.
Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves.
3.
Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
END OF SECTION 15430
15430 - 8/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15432
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1.
Vacuum breakers.
2.
Backflow preventers.
3.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
4.
Balancing valves.
5.
Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
6.
Strainers.
7.
Hose bibbs.
8.
Wall hydrants.
9.
Ice Maker Service Box
10. Drain valves.
11. Water hammer arresters.
12. Trap-seal primer valves.
13. Trap-Seal Trap Guards
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise
indicated.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
NSF Compliance:
1.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
domestic water piping components.
2.
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9."
3.
All piping, valves, and equipment for domestic water service shall comply with the
Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act of 2011 which will be enforced January 4, 2014.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
VACUUM BREAKERS
Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
c.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1001.
3.
Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.
4.
Body: Bronze.
5.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
6.
Finish: Rough bronze.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:
15432 - 1/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15432
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
Prier Products, Inc.
d.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e.
Woodford Manufacturing Company.
f.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
Standard: ASSE 1001.
Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.
Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Finish: Rough bronze.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2.
Model:
a.
2” and less: Series 009QTS
b.
2-1/2” and larger: Series 957NRS
3.
Standard: ASSE 1013.
4.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
5.
Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
6.
Size: As listed on the drawings.
7.
Design Flow Rate: As listed on the drawings.
8.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; 304 (Schedule 40) stainless steel housing and
sleeve for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
9.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
10. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
11. Accessories:
a.
Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller;
non-rising stem, gate valve with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
b.
Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2.
Model:
a.
2” and less: 007S
b.
2-1/2” and greater: 757QT
3.
Standard: ASSE 1015.
4.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
6.
Size: As listed on the drawings
7.
Design Flow Rate: As listed on the drawings.
8.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; 304 (Schedule 40) Stainless steel housing and
sleeve for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
9.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
10. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
11. Accessories:
15432 - 2/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15432
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
a.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 3 and smaller;
outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 4
and larger.
WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
Water Regulators:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
c.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1003.
3.
Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.
4.
Size: As listed on the drawings.
5.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
6.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
BALANCING VALVES
Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
ITT Industries: Bell & Gossett Div.
b.
NIBCO INC.
c.
Taco, Inc.
d.
Watts Industries, Inc. Water Products Div.
2.
Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory setting indicator.
3.
Body: Brass or bronze.
4.
Size: Same as connected piping, but not later than NPS 2.
5.
Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES
Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Powers; a Watts Industries Co.
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
4.
Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Perforation Size:
a.
Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch.
b.
Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch.
6.
Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.
HOSE BIBBS
Hose Bibbs:
1.
Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.
2.
Body Material: Bronze.
15432 - 3/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15432
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
2.8
A.
2.9
A.
Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.
Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker
complying with ASSE 1011.
Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.
Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle or operating key.
Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
WALL HYDRANTS
Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Woodford Manufacturing Company.
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
WATER SERVICE WALL BOX
Ice Maker Wall Box:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Guy Gray.
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
2.10
A.
DRAIN VALVES
Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1.
Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.
2.
Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.
3.
Size: NPS 3/4.
4.
Body: Copper alloy.
5.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
6.
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7.
Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
8.
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9.
Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7
and cap with brass chain.
2.11
A.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
Water Hammer Arresters:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Josam Company.
b.
MIFAB, Inc.
c.
PPP Inc.
d.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
e.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
f.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
3.
Type: Metal bellows.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15432 - 4/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15432
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
4.
Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
2.12
A.
TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES
Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
MIFAB, Inc.
b.
PPP Inc.
c.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1018.
3.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
4.
Body: Bronze.
5.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
6.
Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
7.
Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
2.13
A.
TRAP-SEAL TRAP GUARDS
Passive, Trap-Seal Trap Guard
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
ProSet Systems, Inc.
2.
Standard: ASME A112.6.3, NSF/ANSI 14.
3.
Material: Smooth, soft, flexible, elastomeric PVC material molded into shape of duck’s
bill, open on top with curl closure at bottom.
4.
Allows wastewater to open and adequately discharge floor drain through its interior.
5.
Closes and returns to original molded shape after wastewater discharge is complete.
6.
Throat: match drain outlet pipe size.
7.
Match drain style installed
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2.
Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1.
Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.
2.
Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressurereducing valve, solenoid valve, and pump.
Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
15432 - 5/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15432
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for
proper flow.
Install Trap Guards in all floor sinks and floor drains.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or
sign on or near each of the following:
1.
Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
2.
Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
3.
Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies.
4.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
5.
Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
6.
Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1.
Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflowprevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's
reference standard.
Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified
above.
ADJUSTING
Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves.
Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 15432
15432 - 6/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15440
FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Commercial, power burner, gas-fired, storage, domestic-water heaters.
2.
Domestic-water heater accessories.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to comply
with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
ASME Compliance:
1.
Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domesticwater heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, Division 1.
2.
Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned-tube,
domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IV.
NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable
water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.
a.
Commercial, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1)
Storage Tank: Five years.
2)
Controls and Other Components: One year(s).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
COMMERCIAL, GAS-FIRED, STORAGE, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
Commercial, Power Burner, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
American Water Heaters.
b.
Bradford White Corporation.
c.
Lochinvar, LLC.
d.
Rheem Manufacturing Company.
e.
Smith, A. O. Corporation. (Note: Cyclone model heater is not permited).
15440 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15440
FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
2.
3.
4.
2.2
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.
Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig working-pressure rating.
a.
Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to
tank before testing.
1)
NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2)
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel
and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and
copper-alloy flanges.
b.
Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings,
including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
c.
Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.
Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a.
Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
b.
Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.
c.
Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.
d.
Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except
connections and controls.
e.
Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f.
Electronic Ignition System.
g.
Automatic Blower Motor.
h.
Independent Vent System.
i.
Temperature Control: Electronic with Adjustable electronic thermostat.
j.
Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or
systems.
k.
Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.
Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as
heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater workingpressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into
storage tank.
DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
Domestic-Water Expansion Tanks:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
AMTROL, Inc.
b.
Flexcon Industries.
c.
Smith, A. O. Corporation.
d.
Taco, Inc.
2.
Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factoryinstalled butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air pre-charge to minimum system-operating
pressure at tank.
3.
Construction:
a.
Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
b.
Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings,
including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
c.
Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
4.
Capacity and Characteristics:
a.
Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
b.
Capacity Acceptable: Refer to Plumbing Schedule.
c.
Air Pre-charge Pressure: Refer to Plumbing Schedule.
Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1-M, manually operated. Furnish for installation in
piping.
15440 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15440
FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
C.
Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as
great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater workingpressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
1.
Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design,
and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
1.
Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on
domestic-hot-water outlet piping.
Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 54.
1.
Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters
without shutoff valves.
2.
Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters
without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas
pressure at burner.
Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater
relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for domestic-water
heaters that do not have tank drains.
Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters.
Fill domestic-water heaters with water.
Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service
and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper operation.
3.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 15440
15440 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15442
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
In-line, sealless centrifugal pumps.
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and maintenance data.
1.3
1.4
A.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
2.
Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.
3.
Grundfos Pumps Corp.
4.
TACO Incorporated.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless,
overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.
Pump Construction:
1.
Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor
and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft
horizontal.
2.
Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections.
3.
Impeller: Plastic.
4.
Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.
Capacities and Characteristics:
1.
Refer to Plumbing Schedule on drawings for performance and characteristics.
2.
Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.
3.
Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 220 deg F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
PUMP INSTALLATION
Comply with HI 1.4.
Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.
Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.
A.
CONNECTIONS
Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.
3.2
ACE, Inc.
MR
15442 - 1/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15442
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
B.
3.3
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or
greater than size of pump nozzles.
1.
Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and
throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected
piping.
2.
Install pressure gage at suction of each pump and pressure gage at discharge of each
pump. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage
connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps.
ADJUSTING
Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by
manufacturer.
Adjust initial temperature set points.
END OF SECTION 15442
15442 - 2/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION 15450
DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Commercial water softeners.
2.
Chemicals.
3.
Water-testing sets.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for water softeners.
2.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
3.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
A.
B.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Field quality-control reports.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and maintenance data.
1.4
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
1.7
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Salt for Brine Tanks: Furnish in same form as and at least four times original load, but not
less than 200 lb.
2.
Store salt on raised platform where directed by Owner. Do not store in contact with
concrete floor.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended application.
ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and label mineral tanks to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, where indicated.
UL Compliance: Fabricate and label water softeners to comply with UL 979, "Water Treatment
Appliances."
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of water softeners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Commercial Water Softeners, Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion.
a.
Mineral Tanks: Five years.
b.
Brine Tanks: 10 years.
c.
Control Valve: One year.
15450 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15450
DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
COMMERCIAL WATER SOFTENERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Culligan International Company.
Description: Factory-assembled, pressure-type water softener.
1.
Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."
2.
Configuration: Single unit with one mineral tank and one brine tank.
3.
Mounting: On skids.
4.
Wetted Components: Suitable for water temperatures from 40 to at least 100 deg F.
5.
Mineral Tanks: Steel, electric welded; pressure-vessel quality.
a.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
b.
Freeboard: 50 percent minimum for backwash expansion above normal resin bed
level.
c.
Support Legs or Skirt: Constructed of structural steel, welded to tank.
d.
Finish: Hot-dip galvanized on exterior and interior of tank after fabrication unless
tank is stainless steel.
e.
Finish: Exterior of tank spray-painted with rust-resistant prime coat, 2- to 3-mil dry
film thickness. Interior sandblasted and lined with epoxy-polyamide coating, 8- to
10-mil dry film thickness.
f.
Upper Distribution System: Single, point type, fabricated from galvanized-steel
pipe and fittings.
g.
Lower Distribution System: Hub and radial-arm or header-lateral type; fabricated
from PVC pipe and fittings with individual, fine-slotted, nonclogging PE strainers,
and arranged for even flow distribution through resin bed.
h.
Liner: PE, ABS, or other material suitable for potable water.
6.
Controls: Fully automatic; factory wired and factory mounted on unit.
a.
Adjustable duration of various regeneration steps.
b.
Push-button start and complete manual operation.
c.
Electric time clock and switch for fully automatic operation, adjustable to initiate
regeneration at any hour of day and any day of week or at fixed intervals.
d.
Sequence of Operation: Multiport pilot-control valve automatically pressureactuates main operating valve through steps of regeneration and return to service.
e.
Pointer on pilot-control valve shall indicate cycle of operation.
f.
Includes means of manual operation of pilot-control valve if power fails.
7.
Main Operating Valves: Industrial, automatic, multiport, diaphragm type with the following
features:
a.
Slow opening and closing, nonslam operation.
b.
Diaphragm guiding on full perimeter from fully open to fully closed.
c.
Isolated, dissimilar metals within valve.
d.
Self-adjusting, internal, automatic brine injector that draws brine and rinses at
constant rate independent of pressure.
e.
Valve for single mineral-tank unit with internal automatic bypass of raw water
during regeneration.
f.
Sampling cocks for soft water.
g.
Special tools are not required for service.
8.
Flow Control: Automatic, to control backwash and flush rates over wide variations in
operating pressure; does not require field adjustments.
a.
Demand-Initiated Control: Single mineral tank is equipped with automatic-resethead water meter that electrically activates cycle controller to initiate regeneration
at preset total in gallons. Head automatically resets to preset total in gallons for
next service run.
15450 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15450
DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
b.
C.
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
Demand-Initiated Control: Each mineral tank of twin mineral-tank unit is equipped
with automatic-reset-head water meter that electrically activates cycle controllers
to initiate regeneration at preset total in gallons. Head automatically resets to
preset total in gallons for next service run. Electrical lockout prevents simultaneous
regeneration of both tanks.
9.
Brine Tank: Combination measuring and wet-salt storing system.
a.
Tank and Cover Material: Fiberglass, 3/16 inch thick; or molded PE, 3/8 inch thick.
b.
Brine Valve: Float operated and plastic fitted for automatic control of brine
withdrawal and freshwater refill.
c.
Size: Large enough for at least four regenerations at full salting.
10. Factory-Installed Accessories:
a.
Piping, valves, tubing, and drains.
b.
Sampling cocks.
c.
Main-operating-valve position indicators.
d.
Water meters.
Capacities and Characteristics:
1.
Refer to Plumbing Drawings for performance and operating characteristics.
2.
Number of Mineral Tanks: One.
CHEMICALS
Mineral: High-capacity, sulfonated-polystyrene, ion-exchange resin that is stable over entire pH
range with good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or shock.
1.
Exchange Capacity:
30,000 grains/cu. ft. of calcium carbonate of resin when
regenerated with 15 lb of salt.
Salt for Brine Tanks: High-purity sodium chloride, free of dirt and foreign material. Rock and
granulated forms are unacceptable.
1.
Form: Processed, [food-grade salt pellets] [plain salt pellets] [crystallized solar salt
collected from shallow ponds and milled into irregular particles] [plain, brine block salt].
WATER-TESTING SETS
Description: Manufacturer's standard water-hardness testing apparatus and chemicals with
testing procedure instructions. Include metal container suitable for wall mounting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
WATER SOFTENER INSTALLATION
Equipment Mounting:
1.
Install commercial water softeners on cast-in-place concrete equipment base.
Install brine lines and fittings furnished by equipment manufacturer but not specified to be
factory installed.
Prepare mineral-tank distribution system and underbed for minerals and place specified mineral
into mineral tanks.
Install water-testing sets mounted on wall, unless otherwise indicated, and near water softeners.
CONNECTIONS
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Where piping is installed adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of
equipment.
Install shutoff valves on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each mineral tank.
Install pressure gages on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each mineral tank. .
Install valved bypass in water piping around water softeners.
Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.
15450 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15450
DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation.
3.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
STARTUP AND TRAINING SERVICE
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and to train
Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water softeners.
1.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Add water to brine tanks and fill with salt.
Sample water softener effluent after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total
of four samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance
characteristics. Comply with the following:
1.
ASTM D 859, "Test Method for Silica in Water."
2.
ASTM D 1067, "Test Methods for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water."
3.
ASTM D 1068, "Test Methods for Iron in Water."
4.
ASTM D 1126, "Test Method for Hardness in Water."
5.
ASTM D 1129, "Terminology Relating to Water."
6.
ASTM D 3370, "Practices for Sampling Water from Closed Conduits."
END OF SECTION 15450
15450 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15460
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
ACE, Inc.
MR
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Faucets for lavatories and sinks.
2.
Flushometers.
3.
Toilet seats.
4.
Protective shielding guards.
5.
Fixture supports.
6.
Water closets.
7.
Urinals.
8.
Lavatories.
9.
Multi-Station Lavatories.
10. Stainless steel sinks.
11. Service sinks.
12. Electric Water Coolers.
DEFINITIONS
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with
disabilities.
FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-,
scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
from a single manufacture that meets the specified criteria for each category. Note: This does
not preclude use of components from different manufactures in an assembly, such as lavatory
and faucet.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for
fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1.
Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.
15460 - 1/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15460
PLUMBING FIXTURES
H.
I.
J.
K.
ACE, Inc.
MR
2.
Plastic Laundry Trays: ANSI Z124.6.
3.
Plastic Shower Enclosures: ANSI Z124.2.
4.
Plastic Sinks: ANSI Z124.6.
5.
Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.
6.
Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.
7.
Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1.
8.
Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3.
9.
Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
10. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
11. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1.
Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
2.
Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.
3.
Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
4.
Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
5.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
6.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7.
Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
8.
NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
9.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower
faucets:
1.
Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.
2.
Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASSE 1016.
3.
Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
4.
High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445.
5.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
6.
Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
7.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
8.
Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
9.
Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
10. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1.
Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2.
Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
3.
Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
4.
Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
5.
Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
6.
Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
7.
Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1.
Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
2.
Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
3.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
4.
Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
5.
Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
6.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
15460 - 2/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15460
PLUMBING FIXTURES
7.
8.
Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
from a single manufacture that meets the specified criteria for each category. Note: This does
not preclude use of components from different manufactures in an assembly, such as lavatory
and faucet.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
LAVATORY FAUCETS
Lavatory Faucets:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.
b.
Kohler Company
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
SINK FAUCETS
Sink Faucets,:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.
b.
Kohler Company
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
FLUSHOMETERS
Flushometers:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
TOILET SEATS
Toilet Seats:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Bemis Manufacturing Company.
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS OR SKIRT KIT
Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Engineered Brass Co.
b.
McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c.
TRUEBRO, Inc.
d.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
2.
Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and coldwater supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) requirements.
15460 - 3/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15460
PLUMBING FIXTURES
3.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.8
A.
2.9
A.
A skirt may be used only if it matches the cabinet material used in each area. Skirts shall
be provided by the casework supplier and are shown on the architectural drawings and
specifications.
FIXTURE SUPPORTS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Josam Company.
2.
MIFAB Manufacturing Inc.
3.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
4.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
5.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.
6.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Water-Closet Supports:
1.
Description: Combination carrier designed for accessible and standard mounting height
of wall-mounting, water-closet-type fixture.
Include single or double, vertical or
horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement;
faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture.
Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe
space.
Urinal Supports:
1.
Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and
fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wall-mounting, urinal-type fixture. Include
steel uprights with feet.
2.
Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
Lavatory Supports:
1.
Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall-mounting,
lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.
2.
Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
WATER CLOSETS
Water Closets:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
American Standard Companies, Inc.
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
URINALS
Urinals:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
American Standard Companies, Inc.
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
2.10
A.
LAVATORIES
Lavatories:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
American Standard Companies, Inc.
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
2.11
A.
MULTI-STATION LAVATORIES
Multi-Station Lavatories:
ACE, Inc.
MR
15460 - 4/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15460
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1.
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Acorn Company.
b.
Bradley Company.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings
2.12
A.
STAINLESS STEEL SINKS
Sinks:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Elkay Manufacturing Co.
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
3.
Accessories: neutralization trap or plaster trap where further scheduled and shown on the
plumbing drawings.
2.13
A.
SERVICE SINKS
Service Sinks:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
2.14
A.
DRINKING FOUNTAIN
Electric Water Cooler:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
Elkay Manufacturing Co.
2.
Description: As outlined on the plumbing drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
ACE, Inc.
MR
EXAMINATION
Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.
1.
Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2.
Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3.
Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building
substrate.
Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
15460 - 5/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15460
PLUMBING FIXTURES
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage
system.
Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities
to reach.
Install toilet seats on water closets.
Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets
are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
Install traps on fixture outlets.
1.
Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
2.
Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
Install escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
fittings.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.
Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
PROTECTION AND ADJUSTING
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and
stream.
Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
Adjust thermostatic mixing valve on all standard and emergency fixtures.
15460 - 6/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15460
PLUMBING FIXTURES
3.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
CLEANING
Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials. Do the following:
1.
Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall
strainers and spouts.
2.
Remove sediment and debris from drains.
END OF SECTION 15460
15460 - 7/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15470
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2.
Piping specialties.
3.
Piping and tubing joining materials.
4.
Valves.
5.
Pressure regulators.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1.
Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is
more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig
or less.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Field quality-control reports.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.
2.
Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket
welding.
3.
Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends.
4.
Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of
epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a.
Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1.
Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.
2.
Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.
3.
Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.
4.
Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.
15470 - 1/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15470
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
B.
C.
D.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
5.
Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.
6.
End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.
7.
Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
8.
Maximum Length: 72 inches
Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.
1.
Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.
2.
Nitrile seals.
3.
Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.
4.
For indoor or outdoor applications.
5.
Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2.
End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller.
3.
Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire
screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threadedend connection.
JOINING MATERIALS
Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with
AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.
MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
2.
Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3.
Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
4.
Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
5.
Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
valves 1 inch and smaller.
6.
Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently
marked on valve body.
Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c.
Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
d.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
e.
Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
2.
Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3.
Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
4.
Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5.
Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
6.
Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
15470 - 2/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15470
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
7.
D.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
8.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
9.
Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Lee Brass Company.
b.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
2.
Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3.
Plug: Bronze.
4.
Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
5.
Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
6.
Pressure Class: 125 psig.
7.
Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
8.
Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
PRESSURE REGULATORS
General Requirements:
1.
Single stage and suitable for natural gas.
2.
Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
3.
Elevation compensator.
4.
End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.
Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
American Meter Company.
b.
Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
c.
Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.
d.
Invensys.
e.
Maxitrol Company.
2.
Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
3.
Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
4.
Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
5.
Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
6.
Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
7.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
8.
Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
9.
Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not
exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
a.
A vent to the outdoors is not required for regulators equipped with and labeled for
utilization with an approved vent-limiting device installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.
Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
15470 - 3/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15470
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.7
A.
B.
2.8
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Canadian Meter Company Inc.
b.
Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.
c.
Harper Wyman Co.
d.
Maxitrol Company.
Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.
Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.
A vent to the outdoors is not required for regulators equipped with and labeled for
utilization with an approved vent-limiting device installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.
DIELECTRIC UNIONS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.
2.
Central Plastics Company.
3.
Hart Industries International, Inc.
4.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
5.
Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
6.
Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.
Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.
Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or
welded end connections that match piping system materials.
SLEEVES
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b.
Calpico Inc.
c.
Metraflex Company (The).
d.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2.
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe and sleeve.
3.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
4.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one nut and bolt for each
sealing element.
15470 - 4/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15470
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
2.9
A.
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,
continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective
jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches
deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
ACE, Inc.
MR
OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of
natural-gas piping.
Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade.
1.
If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in
containment conduit.
Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1.
Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2.
Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
3.
Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
All outdoor, exposed piping shall be primed and painted. Color to match building color.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel or cast-iron pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates
that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of
natural-gas piping.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
Locate valves for easy access.
Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
15470 - 5/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15470
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for
roughing-in requirements.
Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including
service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate is subject to freezing.
1.
Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and
same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or
cap.
Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure
protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment.
Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
Install strainer on inlet of each automatic or electrically operated valve.
Install pressure gage downstream from each line regulator.
VALVE INSTALLATION
Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel
tubing or copper connector.
Install underground valves with valve boxes.
Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space
adequate for servicing and testing.
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
Threaded Joints:
1.
Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
2.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
3.
Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.
4.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal
threading is specified.
5.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
Welded Joints:
1.
Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and
welding operators.
2.
Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
3.
Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds
and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter.
Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare
dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not
overtighten.
15470 - 6/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15470
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
3.8
A.
B.
3.9
A.
B.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2.
NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
CONNECTIONS
Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within
72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and
appliances or equipment.
Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code
and authorities having jurisdiction.
Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following:
1.
Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
protective coating for steel piping.
Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:
1.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
2.
Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
Coat pipe and fittings with
INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:
1.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:
1.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
2.
Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:
1.
Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
2.
Bronze plug valve.
Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:
1.
Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
2.
Bronze plug valve.
Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:
1.
Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
2.
Bronze plug valve.
END OF SECTION 15470
15470 - 7/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15500 FIRE-SUPPRESSION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
Furnish and install an automatic sprinkler system to protect as indicated herein and as shown
on the Drawings. Connect system to a water supply of sufficient pressure to ensure full and
sustained water discharge immediately from sprinkler heads when opened by fire at rated heat
temperatures.
Water supply shall conform to NFPA water supply requirements with
considerations given to the reliability of the public water supply, taking into account probable
minimum pressure conditions. The Contractor shall verify site water pressure before submitting
shop drawings.
B.
All portions of the systems shall be installed in accordance with the drawings, details, and
specifications and as required by jurisdictional authorities and codes. Jurisdictional authorities
and codes shall take precedence over plans, details and specifications in the event of a dispute
between the requirements of contract documents and jurisdictional authorities or codes.
C.
The position is taken that the Owner is entitled to a project which meets or exceeds the
minimum requirements of nationally recognized fire protection standards. All efforts and
installations shall be directed toward this end. All deficiencies as noted by fire rating bureaus,
insurance service offices or jurisdictional authorities shall be corrected. No extra charges will be
allowed on this account.
D.
The intent of these specifications is to describe the complete systems to be installed, including
minor details of work or materials not specifically mentioned or shown, but necessary for the
successful operation and completion of the installation.
E.
Work to be performed under this section shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.
Automatic fire sprinkler systems.
a.
Wet pipe flow switch system.
1)
Pipe and fittings, Hangers and supports.
2)
Earthquake bracing.
3)
Valves and Alarms.
4)
Flow Switches.
5)
Specialties.
F.
The following areas shall be furnished with an automatic fire protection system of type or types
as required:
1.
The entire building
2.
Combustible Canopies
1.2
RELATED WORK
A.
1.3
All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the requirements
of both the General and Special Conditions and the Mechanical Specification.
REGULATORY AGENCIES
A.
The term jurisdictional authority used in this section of the specification shall include, as
applicable, but not be limited to the following:
1.
Local Building Department and Fire Department.
2.
Wyoming State Fire Marshal.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15500 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15500
FIRE-SUPPRESSION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.
4.
B.
1.4
Insurance Services Office or Insuring Authority having jurisdiction.
Owner.
The design and installation of all systems of fire protection shall conform to all requirements of
applicable codes and publications herein defined:
1.
International Building Code
2.
International Fire Code
3.
NFPA 13
4.
NFPA 10
5.
NFPA 17
6.
NFPA 24
7.
All State and local ordinances
8.
Underwriters' Laboratories
9.
Industrial Risk Insurers/Factory Mutual
10. American Society of Testing Materials
11. American National Standards Institute
12. Occupation
SUBMITTALS
A.
The successful Contractor shall provide submittal data as required under other portions of this
specification. Submittals shall conform to the instructions set forth in the General and Special
Conditions of these specifications entitled Shop Drawings and Submittals.
B.
Submit shop drawings (floor plans - detailed working drawings), showing dimensions, ducts,
lights, or other items affecting the fire protection systems to jurisdictional agencies for review
and approval. All items identified in NFPA 13 for proper working drawings shall be complied
with. The Architect will reject all submittals not in compliance.
C.
Submit all necessary shop drawings to authorities having jurisdiction. Concurrently, six (6) sets
shall be sent to the Architect for review. After approval from jurisdictional agencies have been
returned to the Contractor, they shall be submitted to the Architect for final acceptance. These
final acceptance sets shall have all agencies’ stamps of review and acceptance. Where there is
conflict between the Contract Drawings and/or Specifications, and the recommendations of the
jurisdictional authorities, the conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Architect at least ten
(10) days prior to bidding or be resolved at no cost to the Owner.
D.
Architect's review will be for general location only. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to
check his drawings for interference and to do shop fabrication from measurements taken at the
job site.
E.
HVAC duct routing shall take precedence when preparing the shop drawings and throughout
construction.
F.
Work on the project shall not begin until plans have been reviewed by the Architect.
G.
Six (6) sets of full catalog information shall be submitted for approval for all materials provided.
H.
Adequately bind each submittal package. Unbound submittals will be returned without review.
I.
The preparation of all shop drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be accomplished by a
Registered Engineer, licensed in the State of Wyoming.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15500 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15500
FIRE-SUPPRESSION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.5
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
The Contractor shall investigate the structural, mechanical, electrical, and finished conditions
affecting the piping, and shall arrange the equipment accordingly; furnishing required fittings,
offsets and accessories. Route fire protection piping to avoid interference with ductwork and
drain piping. In the event it becomes necessary to make field changes in pipe locations due to
building construction, the Contractor shall consult with the Architect before making any
changes. Any such changes required shall be made without added cost to the Owner.
B.
The Contractor shall determine, and be responsible for, the proper locations and type of inserts
for hangers, chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for fire protection
work, and shall obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress to avoid
delay of the work.
C.
The drawings indicate approximate locations of sprinkler equipment. Contractor is responsible
for final locations and routing.
D.
All fees and permits specifically required for fire protection work, not obtained by others as
specified elsewhere shall be applied for and paid for by this Contractor.
E.
All systems of fire protection shall be installed by a licensed (for the location of installation) Fire
Protection Contractor, fully experienced in fire protection installation as specified herein.
F.
Fire Protection Contractors may be required to provide in writing, specific information as to
successfully completed projects and references to show cause as to why they should be
considered acceptable to the Architect.
1.6
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
One approved set of drawings shall be maintained on the job at all times.
B.
One reproducible set of As-Built drawings shall be provided to the Architect upon completion of
the work.
C.
One digital scanned pdf of As-Built drawings shall be provided to the Architect upon completion
of the work.
1.7
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Three (3) sets of operating and maintenance instructions shall be provided the Owner upon
completion. Manuals shall include, as a minimum, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.8
As-Built Drawings
NFPA 25
Catalog cut sheets of all materials installed
Equipment maintenance manuals
TRAINING
A.
The Fire Protection Contractor shall instruct the Owner in the operation of the systems.
Instruction shall continue until the Owner is fully satisfied that he understands the operation of
his system.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15500 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15500
FIRE-SUPPRESSION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.9
GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A.
The Fire Protection Contractor shall guarantee to the Owner in writing, all equipment and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the fire protection system has been placed in
continuous service and has been accepted by all authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
The Fire Protection Contractor shall not be held responsible for improper or negligent
maintenance by the Owner after operating and maintenance indoctrination has been given the
Owner.
END OF SECTION 15500
ACE, Inc.
MR
15500 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15502
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2.
Sleeves.
3.
Escutcheons.
4.
Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2.
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
JOINING MATERIALS
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch
maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
15502 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15502
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
2.3
A.
B.
ESCUTCHEONS
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations:
Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2.
Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
HVAC duct installation shall have routing preference throughout construction.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
15502 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15502
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
1.
D.
E.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
END OF SECTION 15502
ACE, Inc.
MR
15502 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15504
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
MR
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:
1.
Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
See Division 16 for alarm devices not specified in this Section.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are
opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose
connections are included if indicated.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig.
Fire-suppression sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
2.
Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a.
Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
b.
Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
c.
General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
d.
Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
e.
Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.
3.
Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a.
Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm/sq.ft. over 1500 sq. ft.
b.
Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm/sq.ft. over 1500 sq. ft.
4.
Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:
a.
Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft.
b.
Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.
c.
Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.
d.
Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.
e.
Other Areas:
According to NFPA 13 recommendations, unless otherwise
indicated.
5.
Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13, unless
otherwise indicated:
a.
Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm for 30 minutes.
b.
Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm for 60 to 90 minutes.
Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping shall be capable of withstanding the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each product indicated.
Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have
been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if applicable.
Field test reports and certificates.
Field quality-control test reports.
Operation and maintenance data.
15504 - 1/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15504
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1.5
A.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing
fire-suppression systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume
engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
1.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test
reports by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State of Wyoming.
NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation,
and testing shall comply with the following:
1.
NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
a.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
Threaded-End, Standard-Weight (Sch. 40) Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795, with factory- or field-formed threaded ends.
1.
Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.
2.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
3.
Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.
4.
Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106,
Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.
5.
Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.
Grooved-End, Standard-Weight (Sch.10) Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795, with field-formed roll grooved ends.
1.
Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Anvil International, Inc.
2)
Central Sprinkler Corp.
3)
Ductilic, Inc.
4)
JDH Pacific, Inc.
5)
National Fittings, Inc.
6)
Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc.
7)
Southwestern Pipe, Inc.
8)
Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
9)
Victaulic Co. of America.
10) Ward Manufacturing.
b.
Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD
matching steel-pipe OD.
c.
Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless
otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron
housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated rubber
gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS
Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum workingpressure rating, and made of materials compatible with piping.
15504 - 2/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15504
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1.
B.
C.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Mechanical-T and -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with gaskets, bolts and
nuts, and threaded, locking-lug, or grooved outlets.
Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded or locking-lug
inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
b.
Fire-End and Croker Corp.
c.
Viking Corp.
d.
Victaulic Co. of America.
Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain
outlet and sight glass.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
AGF Manufacturing Co.
b.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
c.
G/J Innovations, Inc.
d.
Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.
LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.
1.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Global Safety Products, Inc.
2)
Milwaukee Valve Company.
2.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with grooved
ends.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Central Sprinkler Corp.
2)
Global Safety Products, Inc.
3)
McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
4)
Mueller Company.
5)
NIBCO.
6)
Pratt, Henry Company.
7)
Victaulic Co. of America.
Check Valves NPS 2 and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved
ends.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
AFAC Inc.
b.
American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co.
c.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
d.
Clow Valve Co.
e.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
f.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
g.
Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
h.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
i.
Grinnell Fire Protection.
j.
Hammond Valve.
k.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
l.
McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
m.
Mueller Company.
n.
NIBCO.
o.
Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div.
p.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
q.
Star Sprinkler Inc.
15504 - 3/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15504
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
D.
E.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
2.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
r.
Stockham.
s.
United Brass Works, Inc.
t.
Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.
u.
Victaulic Co. of America.
v.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type.
1.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
2)
Hammond Valve.
3)
NIBCO.
4)
United Brass Works, Inc.
2.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Clow Valve Co.
2)
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
3)
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
4)
Hammond Valve.
5)
Milwaukee Valve Company.
6)
Mueller Company.
7)
NIBCO.
8)
Red-White Valve Corp.
9)
United Brass Works, Inc.
Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching connecting
piping.
1.
Indicator: Electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch .Visual.
2.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and threaded ends.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Milwaukee Valve Company.
2)
NIBCO.
3)
Victaulic Co. of America.
3.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with
flanged or grooved ends.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Central Sprinkler Corp.
2)
Grinnell Fire Protection.
3)
McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
4)
Milwaukee Valve Company.
5)
NIBCO.
6)
Victaulic Co. of America.
UNLISTED GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
Check Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 4, Class 125 minimum, swing type with
bronze body, nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends.
Gate Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, with bronze body,
solid wedge, and threaded ends.
Globe Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, with bronze body,
nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends.
SPECIALTY VALVES
Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductile-iron body with
flanged or grooved ends, and 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
AFAC Inc.
15504 - 4/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15504
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
B.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.8
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
b.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
c.
Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
d.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
e.
Grinnell Fire Protection.
f.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
g.
Star Sprinkler Inc.
h.
Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.
i.
Victaulic Co. of America.
j.
Viking Corp.
Automatic Drain Valves: UL 1726, NPS 3/4, ball-check device with threaded ends.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
AFAC Inc.
b.
Grinnell Fire Protection.
SPRINKLERS
Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
Manufacturers:
1.
AFAC Inc.
2.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
3.
Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
4.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
5.
Grinnell Fire Protection.
6.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
7.
Star Sprinkler Inc.
8.
Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.
9.
Victaulic Co. of America.
10. Viking Corp.
Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:
1.
UL 199, for nonresidential applications.
2.
UL 1626, for residential applications.
3.
UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.
Sprinkler Types and Categories:
Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature
classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:
1.
Pendent sprinklers.
2.
Quick-response sprinklers.
3.
Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
4.
Sidewall sprinklers.
5.
Upright sprinklers.
Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted.
Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
1.
Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 2 piece, with 1-inch vertical adjustment.
2.
Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
Manufacturers:
1.
AFAC Inc.
2.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
3.
Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
4.
Fire-End and Croker Corp.
5.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
15504 - 5/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15504
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
B.
2.9
A.
B.
C.
2.10
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
6.
GMR International Equipment Corporation.
7.
Guardian Fire Equipment Incorporated.
8.
Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.
9.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
10. United Brass Works, Inc.
Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175-psig minimum pressure rating; with
corrosion-resistant-metal body with brass inlets, brass wall escutcheon plate, brass lugged caps
with gaskets and brass chains, and brass lugged swivel connections. Include inlets with
threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, outlet
with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon
plate with marking similar to "AUTO SPKR."
1.
Type: Exposed, projecting, with two inlets and round escutcheon plate.
2.
Finish: Rough brass.
ALARM DEVICES
Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type, water-flow detector
with 250-psig pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two
single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V
ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent
false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
ADT Security Services, Inc.
b.
Grinnell Fire Protection.
c.
ITT McDonnell & Miller
d.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
e.
System Sensor.
f.
Viking Corp.
g.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
b.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
c.
System Sensor.
PRESSURE GAGES
Manufacturers:
1.
AGF Manufacturing Co.
2.
AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
3.
Brecco Corporation.
4.
Dresser Equipment Group; Instrument Div.
5.
Marsh Bellofram.
6.
WIKA Instrument Corporation.
Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter, dial pressure gage with range of 0 to
250 psig minimum.
1.
Water System Piping: Include caption "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face.
15504 - 6/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15504
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and
pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground
applications, unless otherwise indicated.
Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight
steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded or grooved
ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS
NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded-end, black standard-weight (Sch. 40) steel pipe; cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
NPS 2 and Larger: Grooved-end, black standard-weight (Sch. 10) steel pipe; grooved-end
fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1.
Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where
required by NFPA 13.
a.
Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.
2.
Unlisted General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FMG-approved
valves are not required by NFPA 13.
a.
Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.
b.
Throttling Duty: Use globe valves.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping joint
construction.
Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe
smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by
authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with
ASME B1.20.1.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
1.
Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and
rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION
Connect fire-suppression piping to building's interior water distribution piping.
Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for interior piping.
Refer to
PIPING INSTALLATION
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from
approved working plans.
Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on
flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and
larger connections.
15504 - 7/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15504
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
3.8
A.
3.9
A.
B.
Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
sized and located according to NFPA 13.
Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside building.
Install alarm devices in piping systems.
Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
1.
Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake
damage.
Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of
each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.
VALVE INSTALLATION
Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating
portion of system controlled by each valve.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water supply sources.
SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated, use the
following sprinkler types:
1.
Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
2.
Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers.
3.
Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
4.
Sprinkler Finishes:
a.
Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces
exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax
coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
b.
Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling
panels and tiles.
Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-type
sprinklers with water supply from heated space.
3.10
A.
B.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
Install wall-type, fire department connections in vertical wall.
Install ball drip valve at each check valve for fire department connection.
3.11
A.
B.
C.
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
Connect water-supply piping to fire-suppression piping. Include backflow preventer between
potable-water piping and fire-suppression piping.
Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain or
outside building.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15504 - 8/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15504
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
Ground equipment according to Division 16
Connect wiring according to Division 16.
3.12
A.
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13.
3.13
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
3.
Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System Acceptance"
Chapter.
4.
Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
5.
Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 15504
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15504 - 9/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15610
CONDENSING BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
SUMMARY
This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled, gas-fired, condensing
boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and maintenance data.
1.4
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas
and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."
DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N,
"Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers."
I=B=R Compliance: Boilers shall be tested and rated according to HI's "Rating Procedure for
Heating Boilers" and "Testing Standard for Commercial Boilers," with I=B=R emblem on a
nameplate affixed to boiler.
UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating
Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace heat exchangers damaged by thermal shock and vent dampers of boilers that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Lochinvar, LLC.
2.
Patterson-Kelley.
Description:
15610 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15610
CONDENSING BOILERS
1.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested boiler, natural gas capable of full modulation
firing down to 20% of rated input with a turndown ratio of 5:1.
2.
The boiler shall bear the ASME "H" stamp for 160 psi working pressure and shall be
National Board listed. There shall be no banding material, bolts, gaskets or "O" rings in
the header configuration. The 316L stainless steel combustion chamber shall be
designed to drain condensation to the bottom of the heat exchanger assembly. A built-in
trap shall allow condensation to drain from the heat exchanger assembly.
3.
The boiler shall be certified and listed by C.S.A. International under the latest edition of
the harmonized ANSI Z21.13 test standard for the U.S. and Canada. The boiler shall
comply with the energy efficiency requirements of the latest edition of the ASHRAE 90.1
Standard and the minimum efficiency requirements of the latest edition of the BTS2000
Standard. The boiler shall operate at a minimum of at a minimum 94% thermal efficiency
and shall operate up to 98% thermal efficiency with return water temperatures at 100°F or
below. The boiler shall be certified for indoor installation. The boiler’s Thermal Efficiency
shall be verified through third party testing by the Hydronics Institute Division of AHRI and
listed in the AHRI Certification Directory.
4.
The boiler shall be constructed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly, primed and
pre-painted on both sides. The combustion chamber shall be sealed and completely
enclosed, independent of the outer jacket assembly, so that integrity of the outer jacket
does not affect a proper seal. A burner/flame observation port shall be provided. The
burner shall be a premix design and constructed of high temperature stainless steel with
a woven metal fiber outer covering to provide modulating firing rates. The boiler shall be
supplied with a gas valve designed with negative pressure regulation and be equipped
with a variable speed blower system, to precisely control the fuel/air mixture to provide
modulating boiler firing rates for maximum efficiency. The boiler shall operate in a safe
condition at a derated output with gas supply pressures as low as 4 inches of water
column. The boiler shall be equipped with leveling legs.
5.
The boiler shall be suitable for use with propylene glycol, up to 50% concentration without
contingencies.
Electrical and Controls
1.
The boiler shall utilize a 24 VAC control circuit and components. The control system
shall have an electronic display for boiler set-up, boiler status, and boiler diagnostics. All
components shall be easily accessed and serviceable from the front and top of the jacket.
The boiler shall be equipped with; a temperature/pressure gauge, high limit temperature
control certified to UL353, ASME certified pressure relief valve, outlet water temperature
sensor, return water temperature sensor, a UL 353 certified flue temperature sensor,
outdoor air sensor, low water flow protection and built-in adjustable freeze protection.
2.
The boiler shall feature the “Smart System” control with a Multi-Colored Graphic LCD
display with Navigation Dial and Soft Keys for, password security, three loop temperature
setpoints with individual outdoor air reset curves, pump delay with adjustable freeze
protection, pump exercise, and USB PC port connection. The boiler shall have the
capability to accept a 0-10 VDC input connection for BMS control of modulation or
setpoint, enable disable of the boiler, variable system pump signal and a 0-10VDC output
of boiler modulation rate. The Boiler shall have a built-in “Cascade” with sequencing
options for “lead lag” or “efficiency optimized” modulation logic, with both capable of
rotation while maintaining modulation of up to eight boilers without utilization of an
external controller.
3.
Supply voltage shall be 120 volt / 60 hertz / single phase.
4.
The boiler shall be equipped with two terminal strips for electrical connection. A low
voltage connection board with 42 data points for safety and operating controls, i.e.,
Auxiliary Relay, Auxiliary Proving Switch, Alarm Contacts, Runtime Contacts, Manual
Reset Low Water Cutoff, Flow Switch, High and Low Gas Pressure Switches, Tank
Thermostat, Three Wall Thermostat/Zone Controls, System Supply Sensor, Outdoor
Sensor, Building Management System Signal, Modbus Control Contacts and Cascade
15610 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15610
CONDENSING BOILERS
D.
E.
2.2
A.
B.
Control Circuit. A high voltage terminal strip shall be provided for supply voltage. The
high voltage terminal strip plus integral relays are provided for independent pump control
of the System pump, and the Boiler pump.
Venting
1.
Direct Vent Roof Termination system. The flue shall be PVC or Stainless Steel sealed
vent material terminating at the sidewall with the manufacturers specified vent
termination. A separate pipe shall supply combustion air directly to the boiler from the
outside. The air inlet pipe may be PVC or Stainless Steel sealed pipe.
2.
The vent termination and air inlet separation distances for multiple boiler installations as
required by the boiler manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.
The boiler’s total combined air intake length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. The
boiler’s total combined exhaust venting length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet.
4.
Note: Foam Core pipe is not an approved material for exhaust piping
Options
1.
Firing Control System shall be M13 GE GAP (FM/IRI/CSD-1)
2.
Operating Safety Package complying with ASME CSD-1 Standard.
3.
Pressure Relief valve with 50 psig setting.
4.
Temperature Header Sensor.
5.
Condensate Neutralization Kit
6.
BMS Gateway to Bacnet
7.
Low Water Cut-off with Manual Reset
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide,
oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion
efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
ACE, Inc.
MR
BOILER INSTALLATION
Install boilers level on concrete base.
Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.
Assemble and install boiler trim.
Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.
Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.
Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas
train connection. Provide a reducer if required.
Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tapings with shutoff valve and union or
flange at each connection.
Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.
Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain.
1.
Piping shall be at least full size of connection.
2.
Install condensate drain neutralization kit on the drain line per the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Boiler Flue Venting:
1.
Follow manufacturer’s guidelines for flue venting and combustion air intake.
15610 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15610
CONDENSING BOILERS
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3.
Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust
air-fuel ratio and combustion.
4.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
a.
Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set
points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature.
b.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide one (1) additional on-site visit to inspect and adjust system to suit actual occupied
conditions.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain boilers.
END OF SECTION 15610
15610 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15660
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and
specialties for the following:
1.
Hot-water heating piping.
2.
Chilled water piping
3.
Condensate-drain piping.
4.
Air-vent piping.
5.
Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following
minimum working pressure and temperature:
1.
Hot-Water Heating and Chilled Water Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F.
2.
Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.
3.
Blowdown-Drain Piping: 200 deg F.
4.
Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.
5.
Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to
which it is attached.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of the following:
1.
Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for
calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.
2.
Air control devices.
3.
Hydronic specialties.
Field quality-control test reports.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME
label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15660 - 1/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15660
HYDRONIC PIPING
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends, welded and seamless; type, grade,
and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised
ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,
nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1.
Material Group: 1.1.
2.
End Connections: Butt welding.
3.
Facings: Raised face.
JOINING MATERIALS
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with
copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working
temperatures and pressures.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint,
plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b.
Central Plastics Company.
c.
Hart Industries International, Inc.
d.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division.
2.
Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.
Dielectric Couplings:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
ACE, Inc.
MR
15660 - 2/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15660
HYDRONIC PIPING
2.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
a.
Calpico, Inc.
b.
Lochinvar Corporation.
Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded
ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
VALVES
Gate, Globe, Check, and Ball Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15082
"General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
c.
Flow Design Inc.
d.
Griswold Controls.
e.
Nexus
f.
Taco.
g.
Tour & Anderson; available through Victaulic Company of America
2.
Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.
3.
Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
4.
Plug: Resin.
5.
Seat: PTFE.
6.
End Connections: Threaded or socket.
7.
Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
8.
Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
9.
CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
c.
Flow Design Inc.
d.
Griswold Controls.
e.
Nexus.
f.
Taco.
2.
Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or
venturi.
3.
Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
4.
Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
5.
Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
6.
Seat: PTFE.
7.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
8.
Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
9.
Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Automatic Flow-Control BalancingValves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Flow Design Inc.
b.
Griswold Controls.
c.
Nexus.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15660 - 3/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15660
HYDRONIC PIPING
2.
3.
E.
F.
2.6
A.
B.
Body: Brass or ferrous metal.
Piston and Spring Assembly:
Stainless steel, tamper proof, self-cleaning, and
removable.
4.
Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve.
5.
Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.
6.
Size: Same as pipe in which installed.
7.
Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure
fluctuations.
8.
Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig.
9.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F.
Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
c.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2.
Body: Bronze or brass.
3.
Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
4.
Seat: Brass.
5.
Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
6.
Diaphragm: EPT.
7.
Low inlet-pressure check valve.
8.
Inlet Strainer: stainless steel, removable without system shutdown.
9.
Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed,
with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
c.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2.
Body: Bronze or brass.
3.
Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
4.
Seat: Brass.
5.
Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
6.
Diaphragm: EPT.
7.
Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.
8.
Inlet Strainer: stainless steel, removable without system shutdown.
9.
Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating
pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
AIR CONTROL DEVICES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
2.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
3.
Taco.
Manual Air Vents:
1.
Body: Bronze.
2.
Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15660 - 4/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15660
HYDRONIC PIPING
C.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
2.8
A.
B.
3.
Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4.
Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5.
Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
6.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
Expansion Tanks:
1.
Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum
operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank
for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according
to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2.
Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and
stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter.
Provide tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating
temperature.
3.
Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and
240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression
tank, drain water, and close off system.
IN-LINE AIR SEPARATORS:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Spirotherm: spirovent dirt microbubble eliminator and dirt separator.
Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 150 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 270 deg F.
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2.
End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2
and larger.
3.
Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:
1.
Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective
jacket.
2.
End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.
3.
Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
4.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
5.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:
1.
Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
2.
Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange
fittings; and threaded joints.
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:
1.
Schedule 40 steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15660 - 5/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15660
HYDRONIC PIPING
2.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange
fittings; and threaded joints.
3.
Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.
Chilled-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:
1.
Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
2.
Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange
fittings; and threaded joints.
Chilled-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:
1.
Schedule 40 steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
2.
Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange
fittings; and threaded joints.
3.
Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints
Condensate-Drain Piping: Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and
soldered joints.
Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the
service in which blowdown drain is installed.
Air-Vent Piping:
1.
Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic
piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.
Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods
as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-plastic
transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written
instructions.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to
each piece of equipment.
Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves where shown on the drawings.
Install autoflow balancing valves where shown on the drawings.
Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to
the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate
friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15660 - 6/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15660
HYDRONIC PIPING
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
A.
B.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of
valves.
Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple
with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to
the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
Install valves according to Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment,
and elsewhere as indicated.
Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere
as indicated.
Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line
pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection
of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than
NPS 2.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
Swivel band or adjustable steel hangers for individual horizontal piping 1-1/2 inch or less.
2.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping 2 inch and greater in size.
3.
Spring hangers at equipment piping.
4.
Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with
copper pipe.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1.
NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.
NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6.
NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
7.
NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
8.
NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
Install hangers for drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1.
NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.
NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6.
NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
7.
NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15660 - 7/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15660
HYDRONIC PIPING
C.
D.
E.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
3.8
A.
B.
C.
3.9
A.
B.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.
Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent
upward slope toward tank.
Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger.
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment
connections.
Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet.
CHEMICAL TREATMENT
Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and
detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a
minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.
Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year
of operation. Refer to Division 15 “HVAC Water Treatement” for chemical treatment
requirements.
Fill systems indicated to have antifreeze or glycol solutions with the following concentrations:
1.
Hot-Water Heating Piping: Minimum 35 percent propylene glycol.
2.
Chilled-Water Piping: Minimum 35 percent propylene glycol.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1.
Leave joints uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2.
Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3.
Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace
strainer screens.
4.
Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in
flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5.
Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
ACE, Inc.
MR
15660 - 8/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15660
HYDRONIC PIPING
1.
C.
Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due
to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be
used.
2.
While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use
drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
3.
Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.
4.
Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any
vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum
yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services
Piping."
5.
After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6.
Prepare written report of testing.
Perform the following before operating the system:
1.
Open manual valves fully.
2.
Inspect pumps for proper rotation.
3.
Set makeup water for required system pressure.
4.
Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5.
Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6.
Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment to specified values.
7.
Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 15660
ACE, Inc.
MR
15660 - 9/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15665
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.
2.
Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of pump.
Shop Drawings: For each pump.
1.
Show pump layout and connections.
2.
Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and
other anchorages.
3.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
2.
TACO Incorporated.
3.
Bell & Gossett: Div. of ITT Industries
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, inline pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor
shafts mounted horizontally or vertically.
Pump Construction:
1.
Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and
outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion-flange connections.
2.
Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,
and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match
specified performance.
3.
Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
4.
Mechanical Seal: Mechanical Seal: Seals shall be compatible with a propylene glycol
solution. Contractor shall take a water sample of existing heating hot water fluid and
transmit to the pump manufacture for their review to apply correct mechanical seal
application. Furnish one (1) spare seal element with gaskets for replacement for
each different size of pump furnished.
5.
Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphiteimpregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and
bronze packing gland.
6.
Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.
Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing.
1.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
15665 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15665
HYDRONIC PUMPS
2.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
2.
TACO Incorporated.
3.
Bell & Gossett: Div. of ITT Industries
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled,
end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump
and motor shafts horizontal.
Pump Construction:
1.
Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage
tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged
connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and provide
attached piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting
piping or requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft.
2.
Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,
and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim
impeller to match specified performance.
3.
Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
4.
Mechanical Seal: Mechanical Seal: Seals shall be compatible with a propylene glycol
solution. Contractor shall take a water sample of existing heating hot water fluid and
transmit to the pump manufacture for their review to apply correct mechanical seal
application. Furnish one (1) spare seal element with gaskets for replacement for
each different size of pump furnished.
5.
Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphiteimpregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and
bronze packing gland.
6.
Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.
Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration.
Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump
shaft or motor.
Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel;
removable; attached to mounting frame.
Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and
motor.
Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.
1.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
2.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
Suction Diffuser:
1.
Angle pattern.
2.
175-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting.
3.
Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers.
4.
Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes.
15665 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15665
HYDRONIC PUMPS
5.
6.
Drain plug.
Factory-fabricated support.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PUMP INSTALLATION
Comply with HI 1.4.
Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and
weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s).
Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and spring
hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.
ALIGNMENT
Perform alignment service.
Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor
shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between
motor feet and base frame.
Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill
baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.
Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.
Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between
pump casing and valves.
Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or
install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.
END OF SECTION 15665
15665 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15670
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems:
1.
Chemical treatment and equipment
2.
Chemical treatment test equipment.
3.
HVAC water-treatment chemicals.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth
for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or
the environment.
Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system
equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating
personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.
Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating and chilled water, shall have the following
water qualities:
1.
pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5.
2.
"P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.
3.
Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.
4.
Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm.
5.
Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.
6.
TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm.
7.
Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
8.
Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
9.
Microbiological Limits:
a.
Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/ml.
b.
Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.
c.
Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.
d.
Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
e.
Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated below and schedule on the drawings.
Field quality-control test reports.
Other Informational Submittals:
1.
Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the
application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in the "Performance
Requirements" Article above.
2.
Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC watertreatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment
equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
15670 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15670
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
CHEMICAL TREATMENT EQUIPMENT AND GLYCOL
Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal.
capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
1.
Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent
accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.
Propylene Glycol: Industrial grade with corrosion inhibitors and environmental-stabilizer
additives for mixing with water in systems indicated to contain antifreeze or glycol solutions.
CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
Test Kit: Manufacturer-recommended equipment and chemicals in a wall-mounting cabinet for
testing pH, TDS, inhibitor, chloride, alkalinity, and hardness.
CHEMICALS
Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are
compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water
quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
WATER ANALYSIS
Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.
INSTALLATION
Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require
servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.
Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.
Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems and equipped with the following:
1.
Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
2.
Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder inlet.
3.
Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping
with dielectric fittings.
Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers
required in makeup water connections to potable-water systems.
CHEMICAL TREATMENT
Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and
detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a
minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.
Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year
of operation.
Fill systems indicated to have antifreeze or glycol solutions with the following concentrations:
1.
Heating Hot Water and Chilled Water Piping: 35 percent propylene glycol.
2.
Snow Melt Water Piping: 50 percent propylene glycol.
15670 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15670
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections.
2.
Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been
cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing
chemicals for water-treatment system.
3.
Place HVAC chemical pot feeder system into operation and calibrate controls during the
preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.
4.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test
results are achieved.
5.
Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for
each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
6.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
7.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects.
8.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
At eight-week interval following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on
hydronic systems to verify systems are maintaining water quality within performance
requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water analysis advising Owner
of changes necessary to adhere to Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards:
1.
Silica: ASTM D 859.
2.
Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.
3.
Iron: ASTM D 1068.
4.
Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment.
END OF SECTION 15670
15670 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION 15680
RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes radiant-heating piping, including pipes, fittings, and piping specialties.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
Include data for piping, fittings, manifolds, specialties, and controls; include pressure and
temperature ratings, oxygen-barrier performance, fire-performance characteristics, and
water-flow and pressure-drop characteristics.
Shop Drawings: Show piping layout and details drawn to scale, including valves, manifolds,
controls, and support assemblies, and their attachments to building structure.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
REHAU.
2.
Uponor.
3.
Vanguard Piping Systems, Inc.
4.
Viega LLC.
5.
Watts Radiant; a Watts Water Technologies company.
Pipe Material: PEX plastic according to ASTM F 876.
Oxygen Barrier: Limit oxygen diffusion through the tube to maximum 0.10 mg per cu. m/day at
104 deg F according to DIN 4726.
Fittings: ASTM F 1807, metal insert and copper crimp rings.
Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 100 psig and 180 deg F.
DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLDS
Manifold: Minimum NPS 1, brass or stainless steel.
Main Shutoff Valves:
1.
Factory installed on supply and return connections.
2.
Two-piece body.
3.
Body: Brass or bronze.
4.
Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
5.
Seals: PTFE.
6.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
Manual Air Vents:
1.
Body: Bronze.
2.
Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3.
Operator: Key furnished with valve, or screwdriver bit.
4.
Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5.
Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
6.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
238316 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15680
RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING
D.
E.
2.3
A.
B.
7.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
Balancing Valves:
1.
Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type.
2.
Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel.
3.
Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer.
4.
Seat: PTFE.
5.
Visual Flow Indicator: Flowmeter with visible indication in a clear plastic cap at top of
valve.
6.
Differential Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable meter to measure
loss across calibrated orifice.
7.
Handle Style: Lever or knob, with memory stop to retain set position if used for shutoff.
8.
CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
9.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Zone Control Valves:
1.
Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type.
2.
Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel.
3.
Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer.
4.
Seat: PTFE.
5.
Actuator: Replaceable electric motor.
6.
CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
7.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Cable Ties:
1.
Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.
2.
Minimum Width: 1/8 inch.
3.
Tensile Strength: 20 lb, minimum.
4.
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
Floor Mounting Clamps:
1.
Two bolts, steel, with corrosion-resistant coating and smooth finish without sharp edges.
2.
Minimum Thickness: 3/32 inch.
3.
Width: Minimum, wider than tubing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
APPLICATIONS
Install the following types of radiant-heating piping for the applications described:
1.
Piping in Exterior Pavement: PEX.
2.
Piping in Interior Reinforced-Concrete Floors: PEX.
INSTALLATION
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings or coordination drawings.
Install radiant-heating piping continuous from the manifold through the heated panel and back to
the manifold without piping joints in heated panels.
Connect radiant piping to manifold in a reverse-return arrangement.
Do not bend pipes in radii smaller than manufacturer's minimum bend radius dimensions.
Install manifolds in accessible locations, or install access panels to provide maintenance access
as required.
Fire- and Smoke-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at pipe penetrations.
15680 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15680
RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Piping in Exterior Pavement:
1.
Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to reinforcement using cable ties.
2.
Space cable ties a maximum of 18 inches o.c. and at center of turns or bends.
3.
Maintain 3-inch minimum cover.
4.
Install a sleeve of 3/8-inch- thick, foam-type insulation or PE pipe around tubing and
extending for a minimum of 10 inches on each side of slab joints to protect the tubing
passing through expansion or control joints. Anchor sleeve to slab form at control joints to
provide maximum clearance for saw cut.
5.
Maintain minimum 40-psig pressure in piping during concrete placement and continue for
24 hours after placement.
Piping in Interior Reinforced-Concrete Floors:
1.
Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to reinforcement using cable ties.
2.
Space cable ties a maximum of 18 inches o.c. and at center of turns or bends.
3.
Maintain 2-inch minimum cover.
4.
Install a sleeve of 3/8-inch- thick, foam-type insulation or PE pipe around tubing and
extending for a minimum of 10 inches on each side of slab joints to protect the tubing
passing through expansion or control joints. Anchor sleeve to slab form at control joints to
provide maximum clearance for saw cut.
5.
Maintain minimum 40-psig pressure in piping during concrete placement and continue for
24 hours after placement.
Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and
ensure integrity of piping and as approved by Architect.
After system balancing has been completed, mark balancing valves to permanently indicate
final position.
Perform the following adjustments before operating the system:
1.
Open valves to fully open position.
2.
Check operation of automatic valves.
3.
Set temperature controls so all zones call for full flow.
4.
Purge air from piping.
After concrete or plaster heating panel has cured as recommended by concrete or plaster
supplier, operate radiant-heating system as follows:
1.
Start system heating at a maximum of 10 deg F above the ambient radiant-panel
temperature and increase 10 deg F each following day until design temperature is
achieved.
2.
For freeze protection, operate at a minimum of 60 deg F supply-water temperature.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Prepare radiant-heating piping for testing as follows:
1.
Open all isolation valves and close bypass valves.
2.
Open and verify operation of zone control valves.
3.
Flush with clean water and clean strainers.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Subject piping to
hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure but not more
than 100 psig. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Radiant-heating piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
Protect hydronic piping system from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION 15680
15680 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15690
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and hot-water coils.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each product indicated.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
Plans, elevations, sections, and details.
2.
Location and size of each field connection.
3.
Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.
Field quality-control test reports.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems
and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.12004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
McQuay International.
2.
Sigma
Description: A factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with ARI 440.
1.
Comply with UL 2021.
Coil Section Insulation: Glass-fiber insulation; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be
aluminum-foil facing to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
1.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2.
Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F mean temperature.
3.
Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed
index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
4.
Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
5.
Airstream Surfaces:
Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected
by Architect.
1.
Vertical Unit, Exposed Front Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet
steel, removable panels with channel-formed edges secured with tamperproof cam
fasteners.
15690 - 1/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15690
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
2.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Horizontal Unit, Exposed Bottom Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet
steel, removable panels secured with tamperproof cam fasteners and safety chain.
3.
Recessing Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet.
4.
Control Access Door: Key operated.
5.
Base: Minimum 0.0528-inch- thick steel, finished to match cabinet, 6 inches high with
leveling bolts.
6.
Extended Piping Compartment: 8-inch- wide piping end pocket.
7.
False Back: Minimum 0.0428-inch- thick steel, finished to match cabinet.
Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting
value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1.
Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV.
Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water
temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain.
Fan and Motor Board: Removable.
1.
Fan:
Forward curved,double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor.
Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel
fan scrolls.
2.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. Comply
with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
3.
Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
Control devices and operational sequences are specified in Division 15 Sections
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."
Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION
Install unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
Unless otherwise indicated, install union and ball valve on supply-water connection and union
and auto-flow balancing valve on return-water connection of unit heater.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2.
Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3.
Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 15690
15690 - 2/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION 15780
SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Design, performance criteria, refrigerants, controls, and installation
requirement for packaged, air-cooled, electric-motor-driven, scroll water chillers.
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished
specialties, and accessories.
1.2
1.3
A.
B.
C.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
Startup service reports.
Warranty.
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and maintenance data.
1.4
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.6
A.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 590 certification program.
ARI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 506/110, "Water
Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."
ASHRAE Compliance: ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6
- "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Comply with NFPA 70.
WARRANTY
The equipment manufacturer’s guarantee shall be for a period of one year from date of
equipment start-up but not more than 18 months from shipment. The guarantee shall provide
for repair or replacement due to failure by material and workmanship that prove defective within
the above period, excluding refrigerant.
Special Warranty: Compressor Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PACKAGED AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the performance, general physical requirements,
and general component type and arrangement, provide products by one of the following:
1.
McQuay International.
2.
York International
B.
Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested water chiller complete with base and frame,
condenser casing, compressors, compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator,
condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, electrical power, controls, and accessories, and
mounting frame.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15780 - 1/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15780
SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
2.2
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping.
B.
Factory test and inspect evaporator according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label.
C.
For water chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 370 procedure.
2.3
CHILLER MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A.
General: Install and commission, as shown on the schedules and plans, factory assembled,
charged, and tested air cooled scroll compressor chiller(s) as specified herein. Chiller shall be
designed, selected, and constructed using a refrigerant with Flammability rating of “1”, as
defined by ANSI/ASHRAE STANDARD - 34 Number Designation and Safety Classification of
Refrigerants. Chiller shall include, but is not limited to: a complete system with a single
refrigerant circuit 35 tons (123kW) and below, and not less than two refrigerant circuits above
35 tons (123kW), scroll compressors, direct expansion type evaporator, air-cooled condenser,
refrigerant, lubrication system, interconnecting wiring, safety and operating controls including
capacity controller, control center, motor starting components, and special features as specified
herein or required for safe, automatic operation.
B.
Refer to the Air Cooled Chiller Schedule on the drawings for performance and supplemental
information.
C.
Cabinet: External structural members shall be constructed of heavy gage, galvanized steel
coated with baked on powder paint which, when subjected to ASTM B117, 1000 hour 5% salt
spray test, yields minimum ASTM 1654 rating of “6”.
D.
Service Isolation valves: Service discharge (ball type) isolation valves are added to unit per
system. This option also includes a system high-pressure relief valve in compliance with
ASHRAE15. (Factory-mounted.)
E.
Pressure Transducers and Readout Capability
1.
2.
2.4
Discharge Pressure Transducers: Permits unit to sense and display discharge pressure.
Suction Pressure Transducers: Permits unit to sense and display suction pressure.
COMPRESSORS
A.
Compressors: Shall be hermetic, scroll-type, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Compliant design for axial and radial sealing
Refrigerant flow through the compressor with 100% suction cooled motor.
Large suction side free volume and oil sump to provide liquid handling capability.
Compressor crankcase heaters to provide extra liquid migration protection.
Annular discharge check valve and reverse vent assembly to provide low-pressure drop,
silent shutdown and reverse rotation protection.
Initial Oil charge.
Oil Level sightglass.
Vibration isolator mounts for compressors.
15780 - 2/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15780
SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
9.
10.
2.5
Brazed-type connections for fully hermetic refrigerant circuits.
Compressor Motor overloads capable of monitoring compressor motor current. Provides
extra protection against compressor reverse rotation, phase-loss and phase imbalance
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
A.
2.6
Each refrigerant circuit shall include: liquid line shutoff valve with charging port, low side
pressure relief device, filter-drier, solenoid valve, sight glass with moisture indicator,
thermostatic expansion valves, and flexible, closed-cell foam insulated suction line and suction
pressure transducer.
HEAT EXCHANGERS
A.
Evaporator:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Air Cooled Condenser
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Direct expansion type with refrigerant inside high efficiency copper tubes, chilled liquid
forced over the tubes by galvanized steel baffles.
Constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with applicable sections of ASME
pressure vessel code for minimum 450 psig (3103 kPa)refrigerant side design working
pressure and150 PSIG (1034 kPa) water side design working pressure.
Shell covered with ¾” (19mm), flexible, closed cell insulation, thermal conductivity of
0.26k ([BTU/HR-Ft2-oF]/in.) maximum. Water nozzles with grooves for mechanical
couplings, and insulated by Contactor after pipe installation.
Provide vent and drain fittings, and thermostatically controlled electric resistant heaters to
protect to -20oF (29oC) ambient in off-cycle.
Coils. Condenser coils are made of a single material to avoid galvanic corrosion due to
dissimilar metals. Coils and headers are brazed as one piece. Integral sub cooling is
included. The design working pressure of the coil is 650 PSIG(45 bar).
Low Sound Fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced, direct drive, corrosion
resistant glass fiber reinforced composite blades molded into a low noise, full-airfoil cross
section, providing vertical air discharge and low sound. Each fan in its own compartment
to prevent cross flow during fan cycling. Guards of heavy gage, PVC (polyvinylchloride)
coated or galvanized steel.
Fan Motors: High efficiency, direct drive, 6 pole, 3 phase, insulation class “F”, current
protected, Totally enclosed Air-Over (TEAO), rigid mounted, with double sealed,
permanently lubricated, ball bearings.
CONTROLS
A.
General: Automatic start, stop, operating, and protection sequences across the range of
scheduled conditions and transients.
B.
Microprocessor Enclosure: Rain and dust tight NEMA 3R/12 (IP55) powder painted steel
cabinet with hinged, latched, and gasket sealed door.
C.
Microprocessor Control Center:
ACE, Inc.
MR
15780 - 3/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15780
SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
2.8
Automatic control of compressor start/stop, anti-coincidence and anti-recycle timers,
automatic pumpdown shutdown, condenser fans, evaporator pump, evaporator heater,
unit alarm contacts, and chiller operation from 0°F to 125°F (-18°C to 52°C) ambient.
Automatic reset to normal chiller operation after power failure.
Software stored in non-volatile memory, with programmed setpoints retained in lithium
battery backed real time clock (RTC) memory for minimum 5 years.
Forty character liquid crystal display, descriptions in English (or Spanish, French, Italian,
or German), numeric data in English (or Metric) units. Sealed keypad with sections for
Setpoints, Display/Print, Entry, Unit Options & clock, and On/Off Switch.
Programmable Setpoints (within Manufacturer limits): display language; chilled liquid
temperature setpoint and range, remote reset temperature range, set daily
schedule/holiday for start/stop, manual override for servicing, low and high ambient
cutouts, number of compressors, low liquid temperature cutout, low suction pressure
cutout, high discharge pressure cutout, anti-recycle timer (compressor start cycle time),
and anti-coincident timer (delay compressor starts).
Display Data: Return and leaving liquid temperatures, low leaving liquid temperature
cutout setting, low ambient temperature cutout setting, outdoor air temperature, English
or metric data, suction pressure cutout setting, each system suction pressure, discharge
pressure (optional), liquid temperature reset via a Building Automation System (by
others) via a 4-20milliamp or 0-10 VDC input with optional BAS interface, anti-recycle
timer status for each compressor, anti-coincident system start timer condition,
compressor run status, no cooling load condition, day, date and time, daily start/stop
times, holiday status, automatic or manual system lead/lag control, lead system
definition, compressor starts/operating hours (each), status of hot gas valves, evaporator
heater and fan operation, run permissive status, number of compressors running, liquid
solenoid valve status, load & unload timer status, water pump status.
System Safeties: Shall cause individual compressor systems to perform auto shut down;
manual reset required after the third trip in 90 minutes. Includes: high discharge pressure,
low suction pressure, high pressure switch, and motor protector. Compressor motor
protector shall protect against damage due to high input current or thermal overload of
windings.
Unit Safeties: Shall be automatic reset and cause compressors to shut down if low
ambient, low leaving chilled liquid temperature, under voltage, and flow switch operation.
Contractor shall provide flow switch and wiring per chiller manufacturer requirements.
Alarm Contacts: Low ambient, low leaving chilled liquid temperature, low voltage, low
battery, and (per compressor circuit): high discharge pressure, and low suction pressure.
Manufacturer shall provide any controls not listed above, necessary for automatic chiller
operation. Mechanical Contractor shall provide field control wiring necessary to interface
sensors to the chiller control system.
POWER CONNECTION AND DISTRIBUTION
A.
Power Panels:
1.
2.
ACE, Inc.
MR
NEMA 3R/12 (IP55) rain/dust tight, powder painted steel cabinets with hinged, latched,
and gasket sealed outer doors. Provide main power connection(s), control power
connections, compressor and fan motor start contactors, current overloads, and factory
wiring.
Power supply shall enter unit at a single location, be 3 phase of scheduled voltage, and
connect to individual terminal blocks per compressor. Separate disconnecting means
and/or external branch circuit protection (by Contractor) required per applicable local or
national codes.
15780 - 4/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15780
SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
B.
2.9
Compressor, control and fan motor power wiring shall be located in and enclosed panel or
routed through liquid tight conduit.
ACCESSORIES and OPTIONS
A.
Microprocessor controlled, Factory installed Across the-Line type compressor motor starters as
standard.
B.
Power Supply Connections:
1.
C.
Control Power Transformer:
1.
D.
Single point non-fused disconnect terminal Block with Circuit Breaker and lockable
external handle (in compliance with Article 44014 of N.E.C.) can be supplied to isolate
power voltage for servicing. Incoming power wiring must comply with the National Electric
Code and/or local codes.
Converts unit power voltage to 120-1-60 (500 VA capacity). Factory-mounting includes
primary and secondary wiring between the transformer and the control panel.
Protective Chiller Panels (Factory Mounted)
1.
Louvered Panels (full unit): Painted steel as per remainder of unit cabinet, to protect
condenser coils from incidental damage, visually screen internal components, and
prevent unauthorized access to internal components.
E.
Flow Switch (Field-mounted): Vapor proof SPDT, NEMA 4X switch, 150 PSIG, -20°F to 250°F.
F.
Service Isolation valves: Service suction and discharge (ball type) isolation valves are added to
unit per system. This option also includes a system high pressure relief valve in compliance with
ASHRAE15. (Factory-mounted.)
G.
Hot Gas By-Pass: Permits continuous, stable operation at capacities below the minimum step of
unloading to as low as 10% or lower capacity installed on only one refrigerant circuit.
H.
Building Automation System (BMS) Reset Interface: Chiller to accept 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10 VDC,
input to reset the leaving chilled liquid temperature.
I.
120-volt powered convenience outlet.
J.
Vibration Isolation (Field-mounted): 1. Spring Isolation with 1-inch deflection.
K.
Any other accessory listed on the drawing’s air-cooled chiller schedule.
L.
Sound Reduction (Factory-mounted):
1.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Provide the necessary options (compressor acoustic blankets, low speed condenser
fans, etc.) as required to meet scheduled sound performance data at all load points.
15780 - 5/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15780
SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION
Install water chillers on support structure indicated.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
Install water chillers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases.
2.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 15120
"Vibration Control and Expansion Fittings."
Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged and fill with oil if not factory installed.
Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.
Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, flexible connector,
thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff
valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure
gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller with a union, flange, or
mechanical coupling.
Connect each drain connection with a union and drain pipe and extend pipe, full size of
connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection if required.
STARTUP SERVICE
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical
connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and
perform the following:
1.
Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested.
2.
Verify that pumps are installed and functional.
3.
Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.
4.
Operate water chiller for run-in period.
5.
Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.
6.
Verify proper motor rotation.
7.
Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller
startup and shutdown.
8.
Verify and record performance of chilled-water flow and low-temperature interlocks.
9.
Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices.
10. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 15780
15780 - 6/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15785
SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
SUMMARY
Section includes packaged, air-cooled air-conditioning units with refrigerant compressors and
controls intended for indoor installations.
The unit shall comply with the configuration and performance conditions shown on the project
drawings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and maintenance data.
1.4
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
ARI Compliance:
1.
Applicable requirements in ARI 210/240.
2.
Applicable requirements in ARI 340/360.
3.
Applicable requirements in ARI 390.
ASHRAE Compliance:
1.
Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for
Refrigeration Systems."
2.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor
Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "Ventilation Rate
Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of self-contained air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period:
a.
For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
b.
For Parts: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
c.
For Labor: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of following:
1.
Liebert
2.
Stulz Air Technology Systems, Inc
3.
Data Aire.
BASIC SYSTEM
Factory assembled unit, direct expansion, and self-contained. Unit shall be designed for abovEdropped-ceiling installation and serviceable from the front and bottom of the system.
15785 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15785
SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONERS
2.3
A.
B.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
STANDARD FEATURES
Cabinet Construction
1.
The cabinet and chassis shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and
designed for easy installation and service access from front and bottom of unit only.
2.
Mounting brackets shall be factory attached to the cabinet.
3.
Internal cabinet insulation shall meet ASHRAE 62.1 requirements for Mold Growth,
Humidity & Erosion, tested per UL 181 and ASTM 1338 standards.
Air Distribution
1.
The air distribution system shall be constructed with a quiet, direct-drive fan assembly
equipped with double-inlet blower, self-aligning ball bearings, and lifetime lubrication. Fan
motor shall be permanent-split capacitor, high efficiency type, equipped with two speeds
for air flow modulation. Dehumidification shall utilize the lower fan speed.
2.
Unit shall be configured for ducted supply and return.
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL
The control system shall be micro-processor based. The wall-mounted control enclosure shall
include a 2-line by 16 character LCD display providing continuous display of operating status
and alarm condition. An 8-key membrane keypad for set-point/program control, unit on/off, and
fan speed shall be located below the display.
Temperature and humidity sensors shall be located in the wall box which shall be capable of
being located up to 300 ft from the evaporator unit, using field-supplied four (4) conductor wire.
Monitoring
1.
The LCD display shall provide an on/off indication, fan speed indication, operating mode
indication (cooling, heating, humidifying, dehumidifying) and current day, time,
temperature and humidity (if applicable) indication.
Control Setpoint Parameters
1.
Temp. Setpoint 65-85°F
2.
Temp. Sensitivity 1 to 5°F
3.
Humidity Setpoint 20-80% RH
4.
Humidity Sensitivity 1 to 10% RH
Unit Controls
1.
Compressor Short-Cycle Control
a.
The control system shall prevent compressor short-cycling by a 3 minute timer
from compressor stop to the next start.
2.
Common Alarm and Remote On/Off
a.
A common alarm relay shall be provided to provide a contact closure to a remote
alarm device. Two (2) terminals shall also be provided for remote on/off control.
Individual alarms shall be “enabled” or “disabled” from reporting to the common
alarm.
3.
Setback Control
a.
The control shall be programmable on a daily basis or on a 5 day/2 day program
schedule. It shall be capable of accepting 2 programs per day.
4.
Temperature Calibration
a.
The control shall include the capabilities to calibrate the temperature and humidity
sensors and adjust the sensor response delay time from 1 to 90 seconds. The
control shall be capable of displaying temperature values in °F or °C.
5.
System Auto Restart
a.
For start-up after power failure, the system shall provide automatic restart with a
programmable (up to 9.9 minutes in 6-second increments) time delay.
Programming can be performed either at the unit or from the central site
monitoring system.
Alarms
1.
Unit Alarm
a.
The control system shall monitor unit operation and activate an audible and visual
alarm in the event of the following factory preset alarm conditions:
1)
High Temperature
2)
Low Temperature
3)
High Humidity
4)
Low Humidity
5)
High Water Alarm - Lockout Unit Operation
6)
High Head Pressure
7)
Loss of Power
8)
Compressor Short Cycle
15785 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15785
SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONERS
G.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.7
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Common Alarm
1.
A programmable common alarm shall be provided to interface user selected alarms with
remote alarm device.
DIRECT EXPANSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Direct Expansion Coil
1.
It shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins. The coil shall be provided with
a condensate drain pan with an internally trapped drain line. The evaporator drain pan
shall include a factory-installed float switch to shut down the evaporator upon high water
condition.
Refrigeration System
1.
The refrigeration system shall consist of a (scroll) (rotary) compressor with vibration
isolating grommets, evaporator coil, condenser coil, externally equalized thermostatic
expansion valve, high pressure safety switch, filter drier, hot gas bypass circuit, factory R407C refrigerant charge and externally equalized expansion valve. Hot gas bypass shall
be provided to reduce compressor cycling and optimize performance under low load
conditions.
Air-Cooled Condenser Coil
1.
The air-cooled condenser section shall contain a factory mounted and piped condenser
coil constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins. No piping, brazing, dehydration or
charging shall be required. The condenser coil shall be factory-mounted within the unit
cabinet.
Air-Cooled Condenser Fan
1.
A factory-supplied condenser fan shall be field-mounted to the end of the evaporator
cabinet. The system shall be provided with a fan speed control system to permit
operation at -20°F inlet ambient air temperature and sized to provide full rated cooling
capacity at 95°F entering air from plenum space.
2.
Condenser fan electrical and refrigerant pressure connections shall be field attached to
the cooling chassis using factory-provided wiring harness and capillary tube/fitting.
Optional Equipment
Steam Generating Humidifier
1.
The environmental control system shall be equipped with a steam generating humidifier
that is controlled by the microprocessor control system. It shall be complete with
disposable canister, all supply and drain valves, steam distributor, and electronic
controls. The need to change canister shall be annunciated on the microprocessor
wallbox control panel. An LED light on the humidifier assembly shall indicate cylinder full,
over-current detection, fill system fault, and end of cylinder life conditions.
Disconnect Switch, Non-Locking
1.
The non-automatic, non-locking, molded case circuit breaker shall be factory mounted in
the high voltage section of the electrical panel. The switch shall be accessible from the
front of the unit.
High-Temperature Sensor
1.
The high-temperature sensor shall immediately shut down the system when high
temperatures are detected. The high-temperature sensor shall be mounted with the
sensing element in the return air.
Filter Clog Switch
1.
The filter clog switch senses pressure drop across the filters and shall annunciate the
wall-box display upon reaching the adjustable set-point.
Smoke Detector
1.
The smoke detector shall immediately shut down the environmental control system and
activate the alarm system when activated. The sensing element shall be located in the
return air compartment.
Accessories – Field Installed:
Filter Box and Duct Kit
1.
A return air filter box shall be provided with hinged filter access, and duct flange. Filters
shall be MERV 8 per ASHRAE 52.2-2007
Condensate Pump
1.
It shall be complete with integral float switch, discharge check valve, pump, motor
assembly and reservoir. A secondary float switch shall be provided to permit field wiring
to the unit control to shut down the evaporator upon a high water level condition.
15785 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15785
SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION OF AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
General
1.
Install air conditioning unit in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Install unit plumb and level, firmly anchored in location indicated, and maintain
manufacturer’s recommended clearances.
Electrical Wiring
1.
Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s electrical connection diagram submittal
to electrical contractor.
Piping Connections
1.
Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory
mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s piping connection diagram submittal to piping
contractor.
Supply and Drain Water Piping
Connect water supply and drains to air conditioning unit. Unit drain shall be trapped internally.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation, and inspect for refrigerant leaks.
2.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 15785
15785 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15810
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
In-Line Centrifugal Fans.
2.
Ceiling-mounted Fans
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
2.
Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.
3.
Carnes Company HVAC.
4.
Greenheck.
5.
Loren Cook Company.
Description: In-line, direct or belt-driven, as scheduled on the mechanical drawings, centrifugal
fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect
switch, drive assembly, mounting brackets, and accessories.
Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and
support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
Direct-Driven Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on
outside of fan housing.
Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure
around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of
fan housing.
1.
Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
Accessories:
1.
Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2.
Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3.
Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard
for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.
4.
Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel.
5.
As further listed on the Mechanical Drawing Schedules.
15810 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15810
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
A.
B.
2.4
A.
B.
CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS
These units are factory assembled with one or more centrifugal wheels up to 12 inches (300
mm) wide, directly connected to motor, enclosed in housing, with inlet grille and integral
backdraft damper; AMCA rated.
Housing: Steel, Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1.
ACME.
2.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
3.
JencoFan.
4.
Loren Cook Company.
5.
PennBarry.
Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan
wheel shall be removable for service.
Grille: Aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan
housing.
Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for
motor plug-in.
Accessories:
1.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50
percent.
2.
Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
3.
Manufacturer's standard wall cap, and transition fittings.
4.
Backdraft damper.
5.
As further listed on the Mechanical Drawing Schedules.
MOTORS
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15030 "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment."
1.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will
not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing
Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION
Install power ventilators level and plumb.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers having a
static deflection of 1 inch.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section
"Air Duct Accessories."
Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
15810 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15810
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
3.2
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3.
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5.
Adjust belt tension.
6.
Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
7.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
8.
Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to
indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
9.
Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15810
15810 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15820
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
1.4
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Indoor variable-air-volume, air-handling units.
Description:
1.
Air handling performance, setup, and configuration are listed on the mechanical
drawings. Attention shall be made to the configuration of each air handling drawing as
shown on the drawings. Contractor is required to field measure all spaces and openings
to ensure unit fit into the space prior to procuring the respective air handling unit.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation including comprehensive engineering analysis by
a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
REFERENCE
AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters.
ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
ARI 430 - Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
ARI 435 - Application of Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
ASTMB117 – Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray Apparatus
NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
UL 723 – Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
UL 1995 – Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment
UL 94 – Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances
IBC 2012 – International Building Code
NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
NFPA 5000 – Building Construction and Safety Code
ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Code
ARI Standard 1060 – Rating Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation
Equipment
GSA 2003 Facilities Standard - 5.9 HVAC Systems and Components
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings:
1.
Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction
details, field connection details.
2.
Electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and
control wiring; clearly indicating factory installed and field installed wiring and
accessories, and locations.
3.
Product data on the variable speed drives.
4.
Fan construction and accessories.
5.
Certified computer generated fan curves for each air handling unit shall be submitted with
specific design operating point noted.
6.
Dampers, including housing linkages, and operators.
15820 - 1/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15820
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
7.
B.
C.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
Certified coil-performance ratings and a computer generated psychometric chart shall be
submitted for each cooling coil with design points and final operating point clearly noted
with proper consideration for altitude, air density, and glycol correction.
8.
Data of filter media, MERV Rating, filter performance, filter assembly, filter frames, and
filter gauge.
9.
Certified sound data for discharge, radiated and return positions shall be submitted by
octave band for each unit.
10. Calculations for required base rail heights to satisfy condensate trapping requirements of
cooling coil shall be included.
Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.
Omission of any of the above information will cause submittal package to be immediately
returned without review.
QUALIFICATIONS
Manufacturers specializing in manufacturing Air Handling Units specified in this section must
prove minimum five years documented experience and issue a complete catalog on total
product.
QUALITY ASSURANCE & CERTIFICATION
Air handling units shall be cETLus safety listed that conforms to UL Standard 1995 and
CAN/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 236. Units shall be accepted for use in New York City by the
Department of Building, MEA 342-99-E.
Air handling unit water heating & cooling coils shall be certified in accordance with the forced
circulation air cooling and air heating coils certification program, which is based on ARI
Standard 410.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of airhandling units and components.
ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to
ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems
and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.12004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
Comply with NFPA 70.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site or off-site as deemed necessary for safe
storage.
Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed
shipping skids. Inspect for damage.
Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to
avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
Units shall be shipped demounted as necessary to fit into the facility or through the openings
provided where shown on the project drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
MANUFACTURERS
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Johnson Controls
2.
McQuay
15820 - 2/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15820
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on drawings.
Performance: Conform to ARI 430. See schedules on prints.
UNIT CONSTRUCTION
Fabricate unit with 16 gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners. All
panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type
gasket. Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed.
1.
Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke
double wall assembly, injected with foam insulation for an R-value of not less than R-13.
The outer panel shall be constructed of G60 painted galvanized minimum 20-gauge steel.
The inner liner shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel. Panel deflection shall not
exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 6 inches of negative
static pressure or 5 inches of positive static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at
the midpoint of the panel height. The casing leakage rate shall not exceed .5 cfm per
square foot of cabinet area at 6 inches of negative static pressure or 5 inches of positive
static pressure. Module to module assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping,
full perimeter, insulated, internal splice joint sealed with bulb type gasketing on both
mating modules to minimize on-site labor and meet indoor air quality standards.
2.
At each fan section, and the other sections shown on the drawings, a sound baffle shall
be secured to the inner liner and constructed of G90 galvanized perforated steel filled
with 3 lb. per cu ft. density, neoprene coated, glass fiber insulation.
3.
A .125” thick aluminium treadplate shall be secured to the floor panel.
4.
Entire unit shall have a full perimeter base rail for structural rigidity and condensate
trapping. The air handling unit manufacture shall calculate the minimum base rail height
based on the unit’s internal pressure gradient. Should the unit base rail not be factory
supplied at this height, the contractor is required to supply a concrete housekeeping pad
to make up the difference.
Double Wall Access Doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch
long stainless steel piano-type hinges, latch and full size (4.5” minimum) handle assembly
(provide inspection window for fan sections). Door construction shall be the material and
construction type as the cabinets exterior and interior casing.
1.
Inspection view port windows shall be provided at each fan section. Windows shall be
constructed of double-pane tempered glass.
2.
Refer to the drawings for door swing orientation. Unless noted otherwise on the
drawings, the access door shall swing outward for unit sections under negative pressure
(inward for unit sections under positive pressure). Doors limited from swinging inward
(such as side access filter sections) on positive pressure sections, shall have a
secondary latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access.
Construct drain pans from 304 stainless steel with cross break and double sloping pitch to drain
connection. Provide drain pans under cooling coil section. Drain connection centerline shall be
above the base rail to aid in proper condensate trapping. Drain connections that protrude from
the base rail are not acceptable. A minimum 2” thickness of insulation shall be provided under
drain pan.
All openings for duct connections shall be factory cut and fabricated, have factory installed
gaskets at connection ends, and configured for field duct connections. Manufacture shall
coordinate the opening sizes with the project drawings and the contractor.
SUPPLY / RETURN FANS
Provide belt-drive and direct-drive supply and return fans as scheduled on the drawings. Fan
assemblies including fan, motor and sheaves shall be dynamically balanced by the
manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Manufacturer must ensure
maximum fan RPM is below the first critical speed.
Fan configurations and arrangements shall match as shown on the drawings.
15820 - 3/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15820
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
C.
D.
2.5
A.
B.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or roller bearings with extended copper
lubrication lines to access side of unit. Grease fittings shall be attached to the fan base
assembly near access door.
Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Factory mount motor on slide base
that can be slid out the side of unit if removal is required. Provide access to motor, drive, and
bearings through hinged access door. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on. 2"
deflection spring vibration type isolators inside cabinetry.
BEARINGS AND DRIVES
Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards, L-50 life at
200,000 hours – all fans, heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball
bearings.
Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and protectively
coated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.
ELECTRICAL
The air handler(s) shall be ETL and ETL-Canada listed by Intertek Testing Services, Inc. Units
shall conform to bi-national standard ANSI/UL Standard 1995/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 236.
Unit shall be factory manufactured and configured so only three (3) electrical connections are
required: one (1) for the supply fans, one (1) for the return fans, and a 120-volt circuit for the
lights.
Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,
and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
Provide a marine light in each access door accessible section and factory wire for a single onoff pilot switch mounted on the outside of the cabinet.
Fan motor rpm shall be as scheduled on the drawings and shall be open drip-proof (ODP).
Motors shall be premium efficiency. Electrical characteristics shall be as shown in schedule.
Air Handling Manufacturer shall be responsible for furnishing and installing each air handling
unit’s variable speed drive. Temperature Control Contractor shall interface the respective
variable speed drives and motor starters with the building management system. Variable
Speed Drive shall comply with the following:
1.
Performance Capabilities
a.
The Invertor voltage/frequency ratio shall be selectable for reduced torque loads.
b.
The Invertor acceleration/deceleration time shall be adjustable from 1 to 120
seconds.
c.
The Invertor frequency setting signal choices shall include 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 420 mA.
d.
The Invertor shall have a minimum the following protective features with an alarm
display indication:
e.
Overcurrent Shut-Off
f.
Regenerative Overvoltage
g.
Electronic Thermal Protector
h.
Heatsink Overheat
i.
Instantaneous Power Failure
j.
Ground Fault
2.
The following operator controls shall be provided as a minimum:
a.
Hand/Off/Auto Switch
b.
Local/Remote Switch
c.
Frequency Setting Speed Pot
d.
Frequency Indication Meter Calibrated in % Speed
e.
Amp Meter
f.
Elapsed Time Meter
g.
Power On Light
h.
VFD Enable Light
15820 - 4/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15820
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
3.
4.
5.
2.7
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
i.
VFD Fault Light
Additional Options
a.
Input Disconnect: The Invertor shall be supplied with a door interlocked input
disconnect motor circuit protector. The MCP shall allow trip adjustment sufficient
to start the motor across the line in the bypass mode and normally be set at a
minimum setting for maximum protection in the VFD mode.
b.
ByPass Option: The Invertor shall be supplied with a manual bypass contractor
arrangement for transfer to the utility line to operate at constant speed. This option
shall be prewired in the same enclosure, including contactors, motor overload
VFD/Bypass selector switch and Bypass ON light.
c.
Auto Restart: The Invertor shall initiate an automatic time delayed restart after
recovering from undervoltage or loss of power. The Invertor shall not automatically
restart after overcurrent, overvoltage, overtemperature, or any other damaging
conditions but shall require a manual restart.
d.
Frequency Jump: The drive shall be supplied with the capability of being field
retrofitted with a frequency jump control to avoid operating at a point of resonance
with the natural frequency of the machine.
e.
Radio Interference Filter: The drive shall be supplied with the capability of being
field retrofitted with a radio interference filter to reduce radio interference noise.
f.
Input Line Reactor: Variable Speed Drives shall be furnished with an input line
reactor packaged with the drive. The line reactor shall be 3% impedance reactor
manufactured to meet MIL-I-45208 and VDE-0550 standards and shall be UL
recognized and CSA certified. Drives using DC bus filters in lieu of line reactors
are not acceptable
Manufacture Qualifications
a.
The drive manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in producing
Adjustable Frequency Motor Drives of the horsepower and voltage range required.
b.
The drive supplier shall have a local authorized service center with spare parts
stock. The Service Center shall be able to demonstrate capability of assuring
quality service and repair with quick turn around based on local parts stock and
technical expertise.
c.
The Supplier of the VFD equipment shall be an authorized local dealer or
representative of the manufacturer located within 250 miles of the job.
Installation
a.
Field start-up service shall be provided by an authorized factory service
representative. The supplier shall provide warranty and authorized factory service
including field start-up and training. A written certificate of the same shall be
provided at start-up. Start-up by sales representative is not acceptable.
COOLING AND HEATING COIL SECTIONS
Provide access to coils from connection side of unit for service and cleaning. Enclose coil
headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided with coil connections
that extend a minimum of 5” beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Drain and vent
connections shall be provided exterior to unit casing. Coil connections must be factory sealed
with grommets on interior and exterior and gasket sleeve between outer wall and liner where
each pipe extends through the unit casing to minimize air leakage and condensation inside
panel assembly. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of unit without the
need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit.
1.
Identify fin, tube & casing material type and thickness.
2.
Show coil weights (shipping & operating).
3.
State air and fluid flow amounts with its associated pressure drops.
4.
Indicate entering & leaving air and water temperatures.
Water Coils:
15820 - 5/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15820
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.10
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Certification - Acceptable water coils are to be certified in accordance with ARI Standard
410 and bear the ARI label. Coils exceeding the scope of the manufacturer’s certification
and/or the range of ARI’s standard rating conditions will be considered provided the
manufacturer is a current member of the ARI Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils
certification programs and that the coils have been rated in accordance with ARI
Standard 410. Manufacturer must be ISO 9002 certified.
Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary
surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for
tube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with
fluid flow requirements.
Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075” of aluminum plate construction. Fins
shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for
maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a
continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for
maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins.
Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch (16mm) OD seamless copper, 0.020" nominal tube wall
thickness, expanded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to
minimize the effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum tube wall
thickness of .025”.
Coil connections shall be N.P.T. threaded carbon steel or O.D. sweat copper as selected
by the contractor with connection size to be determined by manufacturer based upon the
most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain fittings shall be furnished on the connections,
exterior to the air handler. Vent connections provided at the highest point to assure
proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at the lowest point to insure
complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.
Coil casings shall be a formed channel frame of galvanized steel. Water heating coils, 1
& 2 row only shall be furnished as uncased to allow for thermal movement and slide into
a pitched track for fluid drainage.
PARTICULATE FILTERS
Filter section with filter racks and guides with hinged and latching access doors on coil
connection, for side loading and removal of filters.
Filter media shall be UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II.
Filter arrangement and minimum filtration rating shall be as shown on the drawings. Filter shall
be deep pleated panel filters.
Manufacturer shall supply magnehelic gauge to read pressure drop across the filter bank for
scheduling filter replacement. Design shall be recessed into the cabinet to minimize chances for
damage during shipment and installation.
ADDITIONAL SECTIONS
Economizer section shall be provided with factory mounted low leak hollow core airfoil blade
outside air and return air dampers, and exhaust damper.
Air blender station shall be provided mounted between the economizer and the filter racks.
Manufacturer shall refer to the mechanical drawings for special configuration arrangements.
If shown on the drawings, plenum sections shall be provided.
DAMPERS
Damper Leakage: Leakage rate shall be less than two tenths of one percent leakage at 2 inches
static pressure differential. Leakage rate tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.
Dampers shall be factory installed and constructed of galvanized steel in a galvanized frame.
Outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers shall be fully gasketed. Continuous vinyl seals
between damper blades. Stainless steel end seals along end of dampers. Linkage and ABS
plastic end caps provided when return and outside air dampers are the same size. Return and
15820 - 6/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15820
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
C.
outside air dampers of different sizes or very large dampers and exhaust dampers must be
driven separately.
Damper blades shall be parallel acting unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation & Maintenance instructions.
Use all factory provided lifting lugs to rig the units or modules. Ensure that spreader bars are
used to prevent damaging the cabinets.
Lift modules in an upright position.
Ensure mounting bases are level and in accordance with approved dimensions. Air handling
units or modules shall be level, shim if necessary.
Mechanical contractor shall provide and install adequately sized P-traps for all condensate pipe
connections. Disposal of condensate shall be in accordance with local codes.
Remove gussets, hold-down bolts and shipping fasteners.
Remove fans' shipping restraints and level spring isolators. Adjust thrust restraints.
Assemble modules together according to the installation manual.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 for "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables.”
Ground equipment according to Division 16 for "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”
Check fan motors for rotation and amp draw for each phase. Record information on the start-up
data sheets.
Execute start-up, complete report and send to the air handling unit manufacturer for verification
and as acknowledgment of warranty commencement.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters
(temporary or permanent) are in place, bearings lubricated, fans have been test run under
observation, and owner and engineer have authorized operation.
FACTORY STARTUP – VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
Field start-up service shall be provided for the air handling unit(s) variable frequency drive by an
authorized factory service representative. The supplier shall provide warranty and authorized
factory service including field start-up and training. A written certificate of the same shall be
provided at start-up. Start-up by sales representative is not acceptable.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide one extra set of filters for each unit.
Provide one extra set of belts for each belt-driven unit.
END OF SECTION 15820
15820 - 7/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15830
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2.
Round ducts and fittings.
3.
Sheet metal materials.
4.
Duct liner.
5.
Sealants and gaskets.
6.
Hangers and supports.
Related Sections:
1.
"Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing
requirements for metal ducts.
2.
"Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors
and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design
criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems
and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section
6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for staticpressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and
other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular
Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-
15830- 1/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15830
METAL DUCTS
D.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types
and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable
sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
ROUND AND OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on
indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Lindab Inc.
b.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
c.
SEMCO Incorporated.
d.
Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
e.
Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
f.
Other qualified fabricator subject to compliance with requirements.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
1.
Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings,"
for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
1.
Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal
seams.
Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction
methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2.
Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed
ducts.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black
and galvanized.
1.
Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum
ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
15830 - 2/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15830
METAL DUCTS
E.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
DUCT LINER
Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with
NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.
b.
Johns Manville.
c.
Knauf Insulation.
d.
Owens Corning.
2.
Maximum Thermal Conductivity:
a.
Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.
b.
Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.
3.
Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form
the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant
coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered
by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.
4.
Water-Based Liner Adhesive:
Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with
ASTM C 916.
a.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Insulation Pins and Washers:
1.
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully
annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit
depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.
2.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick
galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers
of duct liner is prohibited.
2.
Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal
nosing.
3.
Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
4.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure buttededge overlapping.
5.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.
6.
Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.
7.
Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
8.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that
have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
a.
Fan discharges.
b.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
c.
Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than
2500 fpm or where indicated.
15830 - 3/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15830
METAL DUCTS
9.
10.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as
specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform
distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.
a.
Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open
area of 23 percent.
Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning
vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other
buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts,
screws, rivets, or welds.
SEALANT AND GASKETS
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1.
Application Method: Brush on.
2.
Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4.
Water resistant.
5.
Mold and mildew resistant.
6.
VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7.
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
8.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
9.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1.
General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
2.
Type: S.
3.
Grade: NS.
4.
Class: 25.
5.
Use: O.
6.
For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1.
Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be
rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.
2.
EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
3.
Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings
and fitting spigots.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods
with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and
bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
15830 - 4/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15830
METAL DUCTS
H.
Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2.
Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
3.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
DUCT INSTALLATION
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts
and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings
and Coordination Drawings.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
unless otherwise indicated.
Install round and oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.
1.
Install spiral round duct upstream of all VAV boxes or terminal units.
2.
Install longitudinal seam round duct or spiral round duct downstream of all VAV boxes or
terminal units.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed
to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated and smoke-rated interior partitions and exterior walls,
install fire and/or fire-smoke dampers.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two-part tape sealing system.
Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
All exposed round duct in finished spaces shall be spiral seamed. Duct finish for exposed duct
in finished spaces (i.e. Multi-Purpose Room) shall be “paint-lok”.
DUCT SEALING
Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct
Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
15830 - 5/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15830
METAL DUCTS
B.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.5
A.
B.
3.6
Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.
Outdoor-Air, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.
3.
Outdoor-Air, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
4.
Outdoor-Air, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
5.
Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class B.
6.
Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg:
Seal Class A.
7.
Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
8.
Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
9.
Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class B.
10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal
Class A.
11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.
12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4,
"Hangers and Supports."
Building Attachments:
Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
4.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.
5.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports
within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
Hanger Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Use steel cable support.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16
feet.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,
tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
CONNECTIONS
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with "Air Duct Accessories."
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch,
outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
A.
START UP
Air Balance: Comply with requirements in "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
A.
DUCT SCHEDULE
Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:
3.7
ACE, Inc.
MR
15830 - 6/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15830
METAL DUCTS
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Supply Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:
a.
Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.
2.
Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Unit and VAV Terminal Units
(upstream connection):
a.
Pressure Class: Positive 4-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
3.
Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a.
Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
Return Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:
a.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.
2.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
3.
Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
Exhaust Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a.
Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.
2.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.
3.
Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.
Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:
a.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
2.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
3.
Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
Intermediate Reinforcement:
1.
Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
Liner: (where noted on the mechanical Drawings)
1.
Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.
2.
Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.
3.
Transfer Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1)
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
2)
Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
b.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:
15830 - 7/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15830
METAL DUCTS
1)
2)
3)
2.
3.
I.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
c.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1)
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
2)
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
3)
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
b.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
c.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments:
Comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1,
"Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have
proportionately fewer segments.
1)
Retain first three subparagraphs below, or delete and retain fourth
subparagraph.
2)
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three
segments for 90-degree elbow.
3)
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments
for 90-degree elbow.
4)
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments
for 90-degree elbow.
5)
Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b.
Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
c.
Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam or Welded.
Branch Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."
a.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
b.
Rectangular Main to Round Branch: 45-degree entry.
2.
Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees."
Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a.
Velocity 1500 fpm or lower: Conical tap.
b.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 15830
ACE, Inc.
MR
15830 - 8/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15835
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Backdraft dampers.
2.
Manual volume dampers.
3.
Fire Dampers
4.
Smoke Dampers
5.
Flange connectors.
6.
Turning vanes.
7.
Duct-mounted access doors.
8.
Flexible connectors.
9.
Flexible ducts.
10. Duct accessory hardware.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
attachments to other work.
1.
Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.
Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field
assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a.
Special fittings.
b.
Manual volume damper installations.
c.
Control damper installations.
d.
Fire-damper and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted
access doors.
e.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
MR
MATERIALS
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2.
Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish
for concealed ducts and No. 4 finish for exposed ducts.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for
concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
15835 - 1/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15835
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
F.
G.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
2.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates:
Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
5.
Nailor Industries Inc.
6.
Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
7.
Ruskin Company.
Description: Gravity balanced.
Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.
Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg.
Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch- thick,
roll-formed aluminum noncombustible, tear-resistant, neoprene-coated fiberglass with sealed
edges.
Blade Action: Parallel.
Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.
Blade Axles:
1.
Material: Galvanized steel.
2.
Diameter: 0.20 inch.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.
Accessories:
1.
Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.
Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3.
Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.
a.
Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage minimum.
b.
Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.
4.
Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.
5.
Screen Material: Galvanized steel.
6.
Screen Type: Bird.
7.
90-degree stops.
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
b.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
c.
Cesco Products; a divison of Mestek, Inc.
d.
Greenheck Fan Corporation
e.
Nailor Industries Inc.
f.
Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
g.
Ruskin Company.
2.
Frame: 20-gauge galvanized steel.
3.
Blades: 20-gauge galvanized steel.
15835 - 2/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15835
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Control Shaft / Hand Quadrant: 3/8” square axle shaft extending beyond frame through
factory mounted, locking hand quadrant.
Bearing: Molded synthetic.
Finish: Mill galvanized.
Insulation Bracket: 2” hand quadrant stand-off bracket.
FIRE DAMPERS
Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1.
Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit
application.
2.
Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must
comply with sleeve requirements.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
SMOKE DAMPERS
General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL.
Smoke Detector: by Electrical.
Frame: Fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and
interlocking corners.
Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place
of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
Leakage: Class II.
Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall
or floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking.
Damper Motors: Two-position action.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2.
Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
3.
Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating
of 150 in. x lbf.
4.
Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
5.
Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
Configuration: refer to mechanical plans for any special configuration requirements.
Accessories:
1.
Auxiliary switches for signaling.
15835 - 3/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15835
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
2.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.8
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
FLANGE CONNECTORS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2.
Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
3.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,
gaskets, and components.
Material: Galvanized steel.
Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
TURNING VANES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2.
Duro Dyne Inc.
3.
METALAIRE, Inc.
4.
SEMCO Incorporated.
5.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated
faces and fibrous-glass fill.
General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 36 Insert dimension wide and double wall for
larger dimensions.
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
4.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
5.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
7.
Nailor Industries Inc.
8.
Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
9.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
1.
Door:
a.
Double wall, rectangular.
b.
Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.
c.
Vision panel.
d.
Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
e.
Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3.
Number of Hinges and Locks:
a.
Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
b.
Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
15835 - 4/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15835
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
c.
d.
2.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.11
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.
Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2.
Flame Gard, Inc.
3.
3M.
Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.
Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum
2000 deg F.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2.
Duro Dyne Inc.
3.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to 2
strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick
aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
2.
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in
compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan
discharge and duct.
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of
30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2.
Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7.
Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at
start and stop.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
3.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
4.
JP Lamborn.
15835 - 5/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15835
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
B.
C.
2.12
A.
B.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, springsteel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film.
1.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
2.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3.
Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.
4.
Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.
Flexible Duct Connectors:
1.
Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct-insulation thickness.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to
exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where shown on the
drawings. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat
channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1.
Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL Listing.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1.
On both sides of duct coils.
2.
Upstreamand downstream from duct filters.
3.
At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
4.
At drain pans and seals.
5.
Downstream from control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment.
6.
Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure
relief access doors; and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream
from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from
dampers.
7.
Control devices requiring inspection.
8.
Elsewhere as indicated.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
Access Door Sizes:
1.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2.
Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3.
Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
15835 - 6/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15835
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
3.2
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
4.
Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5.
Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6.
Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with
loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly. Do not use flexible ducts.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of
flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust
limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and
stop of fans.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2.
Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3.
Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper
heat-response device is installed.
4.
Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
END OF SECTION 15835
15835 - 7/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15850
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, GRILLES, AND LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Diffusers, registers, and grilles.
2.
Exterior Wall Louvers
Related Sections:
1.
"Air Duct Accessories" for fire dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to
diffusers, registers, and grilles.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
Grilles, Registers and Diffusers
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Carnes.
b.
Krueger.
c.
Nailor
d.
Price Industries
2.
Material: As scheduled.
3.
Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect, or as scheduled.
4.
Mounting: Duct connection.
5.
Dampers: Where scheduled.
6.
Material: Steel or Aluminum. (as scheduled)
WALL LOUVERS
Louvers
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Carnes.
b.
Krueger.
c.
Nailor
d.
Price Industries
2.
Material: As scheduled.
3.
Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect, or as scheduled.
4.
Frame: Coordinate with Architect before procuring, or as scheduled.
5.
Mounting: Duct connection.
6.
Dampers: Where scheduled.
7.
Material: Steel or Aluminum. (as scheduled)
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
15850 - 1/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15850
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, GRILLES, AND LOUVERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume,
noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated,
as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of
panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a
determination of final location.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire or smoke dampers.
Suspend ceiling diffusers from straight-line (opposite corners) to limit weight on VAV in ceiling.
Paint interior of ductwork serving all GRD’s black where galvanized ductwork is visible.
ADJUSTING
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 15850
15850 - 2/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION 15870
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
SUMMARY
This Section includes Type II commercial kitchen hoods.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Filters/baffles.
2.
Lighting fixtures.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Show plan view, elevation view, sections, roughing-in dimensions, service requirements,
duct connection sizes, and attachments to other work.
2.
Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to confirm minimum code-required
overhang.
3.
Indicate performance, exhaust and makeup air airflow, and pressure loss at actual
Project-site elevation.
4.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
5.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D 1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel," for hangers and supports; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code,"
for joint and seam welding.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
HOOD MATERIALS
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
1.
Minimum Thickness: 0.050 inch.
2.
Finish: Comply with SSINA's "Finishes for Stainless Steel" for recommendations for
applying and designating finishes.
a.
Finish shall be free from tool and die marks and stretch lines and shall have
uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches.
Grain shall run with long dimension of each piece.
3.
Concealed Stainless-Steel Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 2B finish (bright, coldrolled, unpolished finish).
4.
Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 4 finish (directional satin).
5.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Zinc-Coated Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated according to ASTM A 123/A 123M
requirements.
Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Elastomeric sealant shall be NSF
certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed, shall
comply with requirements in 21 CFR, Section 17 7. 2600, for use in areas that come in contact
with food.
1.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
15870 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15870
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
D.
E.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.3
2.
Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter larger than joint width.
Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening compound for
permanent adhesion to metal in minimum 1/8-inch thickness that does not chip, flake, or blister.
Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or PVC
that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods and
cleaning compounds, and that passes testing according to UL 710.
GENERAL HOOD FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that
minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make ductile
welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.
1.
Welded Butt Joints: Full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints flat,
continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams,
filling in with solder, or spot welding.
2.
Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining
surfaces.
3.
Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld
smooth and flush.
4.
Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to prevent
corrosion.
For metal butt joints, comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation Systems & Food Service
Equipment Guidelines."
Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks
mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and finishing.
Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections.
In food zones, as defined in NSF, fabricate surfaces free from exposed fasteners.
Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel lock
washers and stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts.
Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges sized to accommodate service and
utility lines and mechanical connections.
Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines, operating
components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets, unless
otherwise indicated.
Fabricate equipment edges and backsplashes according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation
Systems & Food Service Equipment Guidelines."
Fabricate enclosure panels to ceiling and wall as follows:
1.
Fabricate panels on all exposed side(s) with same material as hood, and extend from
ceiling to top of hood canopy and from canopy to wall.
2.
Wall Offset Spacer: Minimum of 3 inches.
TYPE II EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Captive-Aire Systems.
2.
Gaylord Industries, Inc.
3.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
4.
Halton Company.
Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."
Fabricate hoods to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards: Metal and
Flexible."
Hood Configuration: Exhaust only.
Hood Type: Heat and vapor removal.
Hood Style: Wall-mounted canopy.
15870 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15870
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
G.
H.
I.
Condensate Hood Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel baffles to drain into a hood drain trough,
and stainless-steel drain piping.
Lighting Fixtures: as scheduled on the drawings.
1.
Lighting Fixtures: as scheduled on the drawings.
Capacities and Characteristics:
1.
Refer to Mechanical Drawings for scheduled performance and additional accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.2
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION
Complete field assembly of hoods where required.
1.
Make closed butt and contact joints that do not require filler.
2.
Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent
finish. Comply with welding requirements in Part 2 "General Hood Fabrication
Requirements" Article.
Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining, cleaning, and
servicing hoods, filters/baffles, grease extractor, and fire-suppression systems according to
manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Make cutouts in hoods where required to run service lines and to make final connections, and
seal openings according to UL 1978.
Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-steel
fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
Install hoods to operate free from vibration.
Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with stainlesssteel fasteners at 48 inches o.c. maximum.
Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing,
unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.
Install lamps, with maximum recommended wattage, in equipment with integral lighting.
Weld exhaust-duct connections with continuous liquidtight joint.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is
defective, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with
excessive noise or vibration.
2.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.
Perform hood performance tests required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 15870
15870 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15890
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems
and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
Carnes.
3.
METALAIRE, Inc.
4.
Nailor Industries Inc.
5.
Titus.
6.
Trane.
7.
ETI.
Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a
protective metal shroud.
Casing: 0.034-inch, steel single wall.
1.
Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 3/4-inch-thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner
complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested
according to ASTM E 84.
2.
Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.
3.
Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.
4.
Access:
a.
Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or
maintenance; with airtight gasket.
b.
Removable panel for upstream access to the reheat coil.
5.
Airstream Surfaces:
Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
Air Flow Sensor: Multi-point averaging sensor supplied with balancing tees.
Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.
1.
Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg
inlet static pressure.
2.
Damper Position: Normally open.
Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch, and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water
temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain valve.
15890 - 1/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15890
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
G.
H.
2.2
A.
Direct Digital Controls: Furnished and field mounted by the Temperature Control Contractor.
Accessories:
1.
Bottom access door.
2.
Control enclosure for field mounted controls.
3.
Hanger brackets.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.
1.
Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum
factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
INSTALLATION
Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and
maintenance.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4,
"Hangers and Supports."
Building Attachments:
Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
2.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and
for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
3.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and
for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
4.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,
tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
CONNECTIONS
Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance.
IDENTIFICATION
Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum
factory-set airflows.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Tests and Inspections:
1.
After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
2.
Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
3.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 15890
15890 - 2/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15980
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4
A.
B.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Balancing Air Systems:
a.
Constant-volume air systems.
b.
Variable-air-volume systems.
2.
Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a.
Constant-flow hydronic systems.
b.
Variable-flow hydronic systems.
SCOPE
Equipment and systems to be tested and balanced includes:
1.
All new Equipment and Systems listed on the mechanical drawings.
2.
Domestic Hot Water Re-Circulating System as shown on the plumbing drawings.
DEFINITIONS
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
SUBMITTALS
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 100 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit
TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
Certified TAB reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by NEBB.
1.
TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by NEBB.
2.
TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by NEBB as a
TAB technician.
Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2.
Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by the Engineer.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,
Section 5, "Instrumentation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
EXAMINATION
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
15980 - 1/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15980
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
TAB contractor shall conduct a site inspection with the mechanical contractor at least fourteen
(14) days prior to beginning the testing and balancing effort to review project conditions and
readiness. TAB contractor shall develop and submit a list of installation deficiencies that would
preclude the TAB contractor from executing the TAB of systems and equipment. This list shall
be submitted to the mechanical engineer and the mechanical contractor for review. The
mechanical contractor shall address and correct these deficiencies
Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1.
Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all
or part of a system.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Record
default set points if different from indicated values.
PREPARATION
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures, draft test reports
reflecting design conditions of equipment, terminal units, and terminal outlets and inlets, and
submit to the mechanical engineer.
Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1.
Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
2.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
Prior to conducting any testing and balancing work, setup a meeting with the mechanical
contractor and mechanical engineer to review testing and balancing procedures, and work
schedule.
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
Review temperature control systems with the Temperature Control Contractor to determine if
system is complete and calibrations completed.
TAB Contractor shall coordinate balancing of the system with the Temperature Controls
Contractor prior to start of Testing and Balancing to coordinate use of Temperature Control
System and Technicians.
All balancing shall be performed, coordinated, and scheduled with the Temperature Controls
Contractor.
15980 - 2/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15980
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems" and in this Section.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1.
After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
2.
Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation."
Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet
volumes with required fan volumes.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaustair dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
Check for airflow blockages.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."
Develop the air handling unit “Outdoor Air Approximation Schedule” (OAAS) as further
described in Division 15 Section “Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls”.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1.
Measure total airflow.
a.
Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the
total airflow.
2.
Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
3.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4.
Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus
actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments
to accommodate actual conditions.
15980 - 3/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15980
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC
5.
B.
C.
3.7
A.
3.8
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Obtain approval from the Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Sections for air-handling units
for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit
performance.
6.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fanmotor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling,
full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum
required brake horsepower.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, sub-main ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers.
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a
position that simulates full-cooling load.
2.
Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure
for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge system losses. Record this value and communicate to the
temperature control’s contractor to establish the system’s operating pressure set-point for
the temperature control system.
3.
Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
4.
Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make
this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
5.
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the
same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a.
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6.
Re-measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
a.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described
for constant-volume air systems.
7.
Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
8.
Record final fan-performance data.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to
end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate.
Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1.
Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2.
Check liquid level in expansion tank.
3.
Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
15980 - 4/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15980
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.
Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement
pumps:
1.
Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow
and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
a.
If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, contact Engineer.
2.
Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve
until indicated water flow is achieved.
a.
Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in
overload conditions.
3.
Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4.
Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as
designed.
Record manufacturer’s valve nameplate (or tagged) data.
Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
1.
Record settings and mark balancing devices.
Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1.
System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop
relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
3.10
A.
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic
systems
3.11
A.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1.
Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2.
Motor horsepower rating.
3.
Motor rpm.
4.
Efficiency rating.
5.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15980 - 5/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15980
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC
Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number,
and nameplate data.
3.12
A.
PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS
Balance water flow through each evaporator to within specified tolerances of indicated flow with
all pumps operating. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design
conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.
Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments
furnished by chiller manufacturer.
Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.
Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.
Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.
Verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data including number of fans
and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
3.13
A.
B.
C.
PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
Verify proper rotation of fans.
Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
Record compressor data.
3.14
A.
PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS
Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water
flow.
3.15
A.
PROCEDURES FOR AIR HANDLING UNIT COILS
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1.
Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
2.
Water flow rate.
3.
Water pressure drop.
4.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6.
Airflow.
7.
Air pressure drop.
8.
Coils fitted with autoflow valves record the following:
a.
The valve manufacture’s tagged and labeled data.
b.
The pressure drop across the valve.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3.
Airflow.
4.
Air pressure drop.
5.
Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
B.
3.16
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
PROCEDURES FOR VAV REHEAT AND TERMINAL COILS
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1.
Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
2.
Water flow rate.
3.
Water pressure drop.
15980 - 6/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15980
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC
4.
5.
6.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air as displayed on the Building
Management System. If terminal unit is not interfaced with the Building Management
System then take physical readings at the unit.
Airflow rate as displayed on the Building Management System. If the terminal unit is not
interfaced with the Building Management System then take physical readings at the unit.
Coils fitted with autoflow valves record the following:
a.
The valve manufacture’s tagged and labeled data.
b.
The pressure drop across the valve.
3.17
A.
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.
Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
4.
Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.18
A.
REPORTING
Status Reports: Report a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and
balanced to the Engineer on a daily basis.
3.19
A.
FINAL REPORT
General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1.
Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1.
Pump curves.
2.
Fan curves.
3.
Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1.
Title page.
2.
Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3.
Project name.
4.
Project location.
5.
Architect's name and address.
6.
Engineer's name and address.
7.
Contractor's name and address.
8.
Report date.
9.
Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a.
Indicated versus final performance.
b.
Notable characteristics of systems.
c.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b.
Conditions of filters.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15980 - 7/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15980
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.20
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
The TAB Contractor shall include, after completing and submitting the final report, three (3)
days of follow-up testing within the project’s warranty period to make any Owner or Engineer
directed balance changes or modifications.
END OF SECTION 15980
15980 - 8/8
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
C.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
MR
SUMMARY
The BMS contractor shall refer to all plans and specifications for further instructions, details, and
requirements not listed in this specification.
This Section includes control equipment for the new HVAC systems and components, including
control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired
controls or existing.
See the following Specification Sections that relate to this Section:
1.
Section 15610 “Condensing Boilers”
2.
Section 15780 “Scroll Water Chillers”
3.
Section 15785 “Self-Contained Air-Conditioners”
4.
Section 15820 “Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units”
5.
Section 15870 “Commercial Kitchen Hoods”
6.
Section 15890 “Air Terminal Units”
7.
Section 15951 “Building Automation System Commissioning”
8.
Section 15980 “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for Plumbing and HVAC”
9.
Section 15995 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that relate
to this Section.
10. Division 15 - “Commissioning of HVAC Systems”
11. Division 16 - Electrical
DEFINITIONS
Standard
1.
ASHRAE: American Society Heating, Refrigeration, AirConditioning Engineers
2.
AHU: Air Handling Unit
3.
BACnet: Building Automation Controls Network
4.
BMS: Building Management System
5.
DDC: Direct Digital Control
6.
EIA: Electronic Industries Alliance
7.
GUI: Graphical User Interface
8.
HVAC: Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
9.
IEEE: Institute Electrical Electronic Engineers
10. MER: Mechanical Equipment Room
11. PID: Proportional, Integral, Derivative
12. VAV: Variable Air Volume Box
Communications and protocols
1.
ARP: Address Resolution Protocol
2.
CORBA: Common Object Request Broker Architecture
3.
CSMA/CD: Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect
4.
DDE: Dynamic Data Exchange
5.
HTTP: Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
6.
IIOP: Internet Inter-ORB Protocol
7.
LAN: Local Area Network
8.
MS/TP: Master Slave Token Passing
9.
ODBC: Open DataBase Connectivity
10. ORB: Object Request Broker
11. SQL: Structured Query Language
12. UDP: User Datagram Protocol
13. XML: eXtensible Markup Language
Controllers
1.
AAC: Advanced Application Controller
15990 - 1/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
2.
3.
4.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
ACE, Inc.
MR
UEC: Unitary Equipment Controller
UNC: Universal Network Controller
VAVDDC: Variable Air Volume Direct Digital Controller
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Ethernet (IEEE 802.3), peer-to-peer CSMA/CD
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating
temperature control system, utilizing a high speed peer to peer network of interoperable Direct
Digital Controls (DDC), Graphical User Interface (GUI) with color graphic displays available on
at least 64 client computers, and electronic interfaces and actuation devices, as shown on the
drawings and as described herein.
The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be either a 10 or 100 Mpbs Ethernet network supporting
BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for maximum flexibility for integration of building
data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Universal Network
Controllers (UNCs), user workstations and a local host computer system.
The Enterprise Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) LAN shall utilize Carrier Sense Multiple/Access/Collision
Detect (CSMA/CD), Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
operating at 10 or 100 Mbps.
The system will consist of an architecture that utilizes a MS/TP selectable 9.6-76.8 K9600 Baud
protocol, as the common communication protocol between all controllers and integral ANSI /
ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001, BACnet functionality to assure interoperability between all
system components. The AAC shall be capable of communicating as a MS/TP device or as a
BACnet IP device communicating at 10/100 Mbps on a TCP/IP trunk. The AAC shall have a
MS/TP bus that is capable of supporting up to 127 UEC's or VAVDDC's without the addition of
repeaters. The ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001, BACnet protocol are required to assure
that the project is fully supported by the leading HVAC open protocol to reduce future building
maintenance, upgrade, and expansion costs.
The software tools required to network manage the ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001,
BACnet protocol must be provided with the system. Drawings are diagrammatic only.
Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that are required to meet
the functional intent, shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. Minimum BACnet
compliance is Level 3; with the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical
connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet/Ethernet IP or MS/TP.
Complete temperature control system to be DDC with electronic sensors and electronic/electric
actuation of valves and dampers and electronic actuation of terminal equipment valves and
actuators as specified herein.
1.
The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using Java enabled
browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs.
2.
An Open DataBase Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant
server database is required for all system database parameter storage.
a.
This data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access.
b.
Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be
acceptable.
c.
A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times
and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the
customer’s internal Intranet network.
d.
Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable.
All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by factory
certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular employment of the ABS Control
Contractors. The BMS Control Contractors shall have a minimum of 5 years of installation
experience with the manufacturer and shall provide documentation in the bid and submittal
package verifying longevity of the installing company's relationship with the manufacturer when
requested. Supervision, hardware and software engineering, calibration and checkout of the
system shall be by the employees of the BMS Control Contractors and shall not be
subcontracted. The control contractor shall have an in place support facility within 250
15990 - 2/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
H.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
B.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.7
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
miles of the site with factory certified technicians and engineers, spare parts inventory
and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment for the installed system, and the control
contractor shall have 24 hours/day, 7 days/week emergency service available.
UPS (uninterruptible power supply) shall be installed at each control panel. Size for 25% spare
capacity with sufficient capacity to allow emergency power for a minimum of 15-minutes.
INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
(Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings).
Hydronic Piping:
1.
Control Valves.
2.
Flow Switches.
3.
Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets.
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION (Unless otherwise
noted on the Drawings).
Self-Contained Air-Conditioners A/C and Humidity Controller
Scroll Water Chiller Flow Switch
PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF
THIS SECTION (Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings).
Chiller Plant Equipment
Boiler Plant
Heating Hot Water Pumps
VAV Terminal Units
Exhaust Fans
Self-Contained A/C Units
Cabinet Unit Heaters
Fire Alarm System.
1.
Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors.
Other Mechanical Equipment listed on the Mechanical Drawings.
SUBMITTALS.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1.
Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, and method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1.
Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturerinstalled and field-installed wiring.
3.
Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
4.
Written description of sequence of operation.
5.
DDC System hardware: Wiring diagrams, schematic floor plans, and schematic control
diagrams.
6.
Control System Software: Schematic diagrams, written descriptions, and points list.
7.
Schedule of valves including close-off and flow characteristics.
8.
Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk data
conductors.
9.
Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.
10. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point
addresses, and operator notations.
15990 - 3/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
11.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams,
modems, and interconnections.
PIC/BIBB statement clarifying which BACnet objects and services are supported by each
controller.
ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001, BACnet PIC/BIBB Statement: Proof of Compliance
Level 3 or higher is required to protect building owner by reducing future maintenance and
expansion costs.
Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1.
Engineering, Installation, Operation and Maintenance manuals.
2.
Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data
files.
3.
Device address list.
4.
Printout of software application and graphic screens.
5.
Licenses, guarantee, and warranty documents for all equipment and systems.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control
units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and
operating sequences.
RECORD DOCUMENTATION:
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1.
Three (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the
Owner's Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and
Maintenance Manual shall be furnished on Compact Disc media, and include the
following for the BMS provided:
a.
Table of contents.
b.
As-built system record drawings. Computer Aided Drawings (CAD) record
drawings shall represent the as-built condition of the system and incorporate all
information supplied with the approved submittal.
c.
Manufacturers product data sheets or catalog pages for all products including
software.
d.
System Operator’s manuals.
e.
Archive copy of all site-specific databases and sequences.
f.
BMS network diagrams.
g.
Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades.
2.
The Operation and Maintenance Manual CD shall be self-contained, and include all
necessary software required to access the product data sheets. A logically organized
table of contents shall provide dynamic links to view and print all product data sheets.
Viewer software shall provide the ability to display, zoom, and search all documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
Bids by wholesalers, distributors, mechanical contractors, ABCS, ACS, and non-franchised
contractors shall not be acceptable.
The system manufacturer shall, as a minimum, manufacture and supply the Variable Air Volume
Direct Digital Controller, Network Controller, Unitary Equipment Controller, Advanced
Application Controller, Graphical User Interface, damper actuators, and valve actuator
assemblies.
All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by factory
certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular employment of the temperature
control system manufacturer's local field office.
The Building Management System contractor shall have a full service facility within 250 miles of
the project that is staffed with engineers trained in Integrating Interoperable Systems and
15990 - 4/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
E.
F.
G.
technicians fully capable of providing routine emergency maintenance service on all system
components.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."
Comply with National Electric Code, UL-916 Energy Management Systems, ULC, FCC Part 15,
subpart J, Class B Computing Devices.
1.10
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.
Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to
be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to unit manufacturer.
1.11
A.
COORDINATION.
Coordinate location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room
details before installation.
Coordinate equipment from other divisions including "Intrusion Detection," "Lighting Controls,”
"Motor Control Centers," "Panelboards," and "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility with
equipment that interfaces with those systems.
Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator workstation.
Coordinate with the Owner's IT department on locations for UNC's, Ethernet communication
cabling and TCP/IP addresses.
Coordinate and provide the project’s mechanical engineer remote web based access for system
performance monitoring purposes. Coordinate access security level with the Owner.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.12
A.
B.
1.13
A.
WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE.
All components, system software, and parts furnished and installed by the BMS contractor shall
be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for 1 year of substantial
completion. Labor to repair, reprogram, or replace these components shall be furnished by the
BMS contractor at no charge during normal working hours during the warranty period. Materials
furnished but not installed by the BMS contractor shall be covered to the extent of the product
only. Installation labor shall be the responsibility of the trade contractor performing the
installation. All corrective software modifications made during warranty periods shall be updated
on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks. The
Contractor shall respond to the owner's request for warranty service within 24 standard working
hours.
Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 150 miles of the Project site such that
replacement of key parts and labor support, including programming.
OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL.
The owner shall sign a copy of the manufacturer’s standard software and firmware licensing
agreement as a condition of this contract. Such license shall grant use of all programs and
application software to owner as defined by the manufacturer’s license agreement, but shall
protect manufacturer’s rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained within such software. All
project developed software and documentation shall become the property of the owner. These
include, but are not limited to project graphic images, record drawings, project database, project
specific application programming code, and all other associated documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified:
15990 - 5/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
1.
2.
3.
2.2
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Electric Components
a.
Schneider Electric
Electronic Components
a.
Schneider Electric
Direct Digital Control Systems and Approved Installing Contractors:
a.
Schneider Electric installed by Long Technologies.
DDC EQUIPMENT
GUI Server Application Software: Include the following:
1.
Input/output capability from web browser operator station for monitoring and controlling
all of the points listed in the input/output point list. The operator shall be able to monitor
and access all points by means of clear concise English names without having to
understand or reference hardware point locations or controller programs.
2.
Operating System: The GUI shall run on Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0, Service
Pack 4, Windows 2000, or later.
3.
The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a
tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the
hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall
employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a
minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These
shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a
context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the
selected object identification.
4.
Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical
features and functions:
a.
Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of
generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats
shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the GUI
shall support the use of scanned pictures.
b.
Primary project graphic screen shall display the facility’s floor plan showing the
respective space temperatures and set-point temperatures, and general area
locations of mechanical plants and equipment, and terminal units. BMS contractor
shall obtain the floor plan in an AutoCAD dwg of dxf file format from the engineer.
c.
Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time
values, animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document
links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic
screens.
d.
Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for
assignment to one a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.
e.
Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set
points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner.
1)
Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring
any keyboard entry from the operator.
2)
Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any
keyboard entry from the operator.
5.
Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected
object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text
shall be required.
6.
Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by right-clicking the
selected object and using a graphical slider to adjust the value. No entry of text shall be
required.
7.
System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the
following tasks, with proper password access:
a.
Create, delete or modify control strategies.
15990 - 6/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Add/delete objects to the system.
Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters.
Enable or disable control strategies.
Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer.
Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state.
Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of
values automatically.
8.
On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in
operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications
and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information
shall be available through the use of hypertext. All system documentation and help files
shall be in HTML format.
9.
Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and
password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable
for each operator. The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and
security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict
the operators’ access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen
editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no
keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator
password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.
10. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all
workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and
controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.
11. Alarm Console
a.
The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This
window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to
view details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm
Console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator.
b.
When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will
supercede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being
minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new
alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm notification windows or banners that
can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not be acceptable.
Web Browser Clients
1.
The system shall be capable of supporting 64 clients using a standard Web browser such
as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software
(to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client machine, are only
acceptable if 64 licensed copies of the client machine software are provided, installed,
and tested.
2.
The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration
that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine
requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web
browser to function with the FMCS, shall only be acceptable if 64 workstations or
workstation hardware upgrades are provided.
3.
The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics,
schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is
provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that
require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be
permitted.
4.
The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:
a.
User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user
attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java
authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be
implemented.
15990 - 7/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
b.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the
Web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall
be supported by the Web browser interface.
c.
HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a
Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a
specific look or format.
d.
Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Building Control Units (BC),
without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that
require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.
e.
Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without
requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page.
f.
User’s shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the
access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:
1)
Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set
points in a graphical manner.
a)
Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without
requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
b)
Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring
any keyboard entry from the operator.
2)
Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking
the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up
menu. No entry of text shall be required.
3)
View logs and charts
4)
View and acknowledge alarms
g.
The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the
log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to
just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages
in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.
h.
Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other
locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource
Locator (URL) for the desired link.
UPS (uninterruptible power supply) shall be installed at each control panel. Size for 25% spare
capacity with sufficient capacity to allow emergency power for a minimum of 15-minutes
Control Units General:
1.
Provide an adequate number of control units to achieve monitoring and control of all data
points specified and necessary to satisfy the sequence of operation for all mechanical
systems shown on the plans. Provide a minimum of one separate controller for each AHU
or other HVAC system. Multiple DDC controllers may control one system provided that
all points associated with individual control loops are assigned to the same DDC
controller. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature
are exempt from this requirement. Each of the following panel types shall meet the
following requirements.
2.
Controllers shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
a.
Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted
within waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40°F to 140°F
and 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
b.
Controllers used in conditioned ambient space shall be mounted in dustproof
enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 32°F to 122°F and 5 to 95% RH,
non-condensing.
3.
Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All
wiring connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a
termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
4.
Memory: The Control Units shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the
event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.
15990 - 8/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
5.
E.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Diagnostics: The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor
and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a
predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification.
6.
Immunity to power and noise: Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of
nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal
voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from
keyed radios up to 5 W at 3 ft.
7.
Automatic staggered restart of field equipment after restoration of power and short cycle
protection.
Universal Network Controllers (UNC)
1.
The Universal Network Controllers (UNC) shall provide the interface between the LAN or
WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over
the control devices connected to the UNC. It shall be capable of executing application
control programs to provide:
a.
Calendar functions
b.
Scheduling
c.
Trending
d.
Alarm monitoring and routing
e.
Time synchronization by means of an Atomic Clock Internet site including
automatic synchronization
2.
The Universal Network Controller Type 1 must provide the following hardware features as
a minimum:
a.
One Ethernet Port – 10/100 Mbps
b.
Two RS-232 ports
c.
Two RS-RS485 ports electrically isolated
d.
One LonWorks Interface Port – 78KB FTT-10A with Weidmuller connector
e.
Power supply 24 VAC or 24 VDC
f.
Battery Backup
g.
Real-time clock
h.
Processor @ 200 MHz or greater
i.
Java Virtual Machine
j.
40 Mb flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory
is not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte
storage capacity)
k.
128 Mb Ram or greater
3.
The UNC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL.
A database resident on the UNC shall be an ODBC compliant database or must provide
an ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it.
4.
The UNC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall
support a minimum of 64 simultaneous users.
5.
Event Alarm Notification and actions
a.
The UNC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and
analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific
controllers.
b.
The UNC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location
whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up telephone connection,
or wide-area network.
c.
Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement
requirements including but limited to:
1)
To alarm
2)
Return to normal
3)
To fault
d.
Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of
routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.
15990 - 9/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
e.
f.
6.
7.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for
equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count
values with appropriate password control.
g.
Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and
annunciated.
h.
Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the
user:
1)
Screen message text
2)
Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the
ability to route and email alarms based on:
a)
Day of week
b)
Time of day
c)
Recipient
3)
Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message
4)
Graphic with flashing alarm object(s)
5)
Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer
i.
The following shall be recorded by the UNC for each alarm (at a minimum):
1)
Time and date
2)
Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.)
3)
Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.)
4)
Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.
5)
Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.
j.
Alarm actions may be initiated by user-defined programmable objects created for
that purpose.
k.
Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific
types or classes of alarms defined by the user.
l.
A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the UNC and/or a server (if configured in
the system) and shall be available for review by the user.
m.
Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined
parameters.
n.
A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be
provided and available for review by the user.
o.
An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided
and available for review by the user.
Data Collection and Storage
a.
The UNC shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and
store this data for future use.
b.
The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the UNC that
shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties:
1)
Designating the log as interval or deviation.
2)
For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week
and the sample collection interval.
3)
For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a
variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of
the object.
4)
For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for
the log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover
the data on a first-in, first-out basis.
5)
Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based
event or by a user-defined event or action.
All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the UNC and the data shall be
accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web Browser.
15990 - 10/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
8.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using
standard SQL statements.
9.
All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats:
a.
HTML
b.
XML
c.
Plain Text
d.
Comma or tab separated values
10. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall
provide as an alternative Microsoft SQL Serverâ, Oracle 8i or Expressâ, Hyperion
Solutions™ SQL Server.
11. The UNC shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally (to itself), or remotely
to a server or other UNC on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following
archiving properties, at a minimum:
a.
Archive on time of day
b.
Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size)
c.
Archive when log has reached it’s user-defined capacity of data stores
d.
Provide ability to clear logs once archived
12. AUDIT LOG
a.
Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the UNC.
Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log
based on time or when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide
the ability to archive the log locally (to the UNC), to another UNC on the network,
or to a server. For each log entry, provide the following data:
1)
Time and date
2)
User ID
3)
Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands,
etc.
13. DATABASE BACKUP AND STORAGE
a.
The UNC shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The
database shall be backed up based on a user-defined time interval.
b.
Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be
stored in the UNC. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on
the user-defined database save interval.
c.
The UNC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user
viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as
XML format is supported.
Advanced Application Controller (AAC):
1.
Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, RAM/EEPROM
memory for custom control applications. AAC’s shall be provided for large AHU's, Boiler
Plant, Chiller Plant and other applications.
2.
Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and at least 50
expressions for customized HVAC control including mathematical equations, Boolean
logic, PID control loops with anti-windup, sequencers, timers, interlocks, thermostats,
enthalpy calculation, counters, interlocks, ramps, drivers, schedules, calendars, OSS,
compare, limit, curve fit, and alarms.
3.
The Advanced Application Controller shall have the following point count as a minimum.
a.
4 Digital Inputs.
1)
10 pulses per second.
b.
12 Universal Inputs
1)
0-20mA
2)
0-5 VDC
3)
Balco Sensors
4)
Platinum Sensor
5)
10K thermistor
15990 - 11/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
c.
G.
ACE, Inc.
MR
8 Universal Outputs
1)
0-20 mA
2)
12 VDC relay driver
3)
Individually short circuit protected
4)
LED indication
d.
8 Digital Outputs
1)
Triacs
2)
LED indication
4.
The controller shall come with an on board regulated 20 VDC power supply rated at 100
mA.
5.
Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:
a.
Peer to peer primary network level communications supporting BACnet objects
and services according to PIC and BIBBs statement.
b.
Automatic communications loss detection to maintain normal control functionality
regardless of available networks communications.
c.
Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/outputs.
d.
Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
e.
Local energy management control strategies
f.
Incorporate internal customizable safeties and limits to prevent third party BACnet
tools from providing improper and unrealistic inputs to AAC's.
6.
Local operator interface port provides for download from and connection to portable
workstation.
7.
Communication:
a.
The Advanced Application Controller shall communicate via the Primary Controller
Network between BMS Controllers and other BACnet devices.
b.
Communication shall be peer-peer.
c.
AAC’s shall communicate with and other BACnet devices at a baud rate selectable
between 9.6 and 76.8 Kbaud using MS/TP communications protocol.
d.
AAC shall communicate with the UNC using:
1)
RS-485 trunk with a baud rate selectable between 9.6 and 76.8 Kbaud using
MSTP communications protocol.
2)
A Ethernet trunk 10/100 Mb using BACnet IP.
Unitary Equipment Controller Units:
1.
Single board construction comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile,
RAM/EEPROM memory for custom control and unitary applications. UECs shall be
provided for Unit Ventilators, Fan Coils, Heat Pumps, Rooftop Units, and other
applications as shown on the drawings. To assure complete interoperability, all UEC's
firmware shall support all BACnet objects and services as called out in the PIC and
BIBBs statement
2.
The Unitary Equipment Controller shall have the following point count as a minimum.
a.
6 Universal Inputs
1)
0-20mA
2)
0-5 VDC
3)
Balco Sensors
4)
Platinum Sensor
5)
10K thermistor
b.
4 Anaglog Outputs
1)
0-20 mA
2)
0-5/10 VDC
3)
Individually short circuit protected
c.
8 Digital Outputs
1)
Triacs
2)
LED indication
15990 - 12/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
3.
H.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and download from
the operator station.
4.
Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:
a.
Peer to peer primary network level communications with automatic
communications loss detection to maintain normal control functionality regardless
of available network communications.
b.
Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
c.
Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d.
Appropriate BACnet Objects for specific unitary applications.
5.
Local operator interface port located on UEC and UEC sensor provides for download
from or upload to portable workstation. All bus devices shall be accessible from either
port.
6.
Communication: UEC’s shall communicate with the UNC and ACC at a baud rate
selectable of 9.6-76.8 Kbaud utilizing MS/TP.
7.
UEC units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and at least 50
expressions for customized HVAC control including mathematical equations, Boolean
logic, PID control loops with anti-windup, sequencers, timers, interlocks, thermostats,
counters, interlocks, compare, limit, and alarms.
8.
All UEC Controller setpoints shall be digital display setpoints with dual setpoint limits
(integral hard limits which the user cannot exceed above and below and independent soft
limits which are hidden from the user). All digital setpoints shall be network retentive after
power outages and after replacement of sensor.
UEC Room Sensor
1.
The UEC Sensor shall provide room temperature value to the UEC.
2.
Each UEC will support a minimum of two room sensors.
3.
The UEC Sensor shall connect directly to the ASC and shall not utilize any of the I/O
points of the controller.
4.
The UEC Sensor shall provide a two-wire connection to the controller that is polarity and
wire type insensitive.
5.
The UEC Sensor shall provide a communications jack for connection to the MS/TP
communication trunk to which the UEC controller is connected.
6.
The UEC Sensor, the connected controller, and all other devices on the MS/TP bus shall
be accessible by the Portable Engineering Station.
7.
The UEC Sensor shall be provided in a modular configuration that allows for the rough in
of all wiring without the presence of the electronics or esthetic covering.
8.
The UEC Sensor shall allow for the customization of the color on the esthetic covering as
a standard offering.
9.
The UEC Sensor shall be supplied in the following manner:
a.
LCD display for showing (typically) the current temperature.
b.
Tenant override to allow timed override of unoccupied to occupied mode of
operation.
c.
LED indication of override state
d.
Up/Down keys to allow adjustment of the current setpoint
e.
User interface with the UEC Sensor shall be provided as a configurable function,
and shall offer password protection for access to network variable editing.
f.
ASHRAE 95 compliance (LCD display and sub-base functionality)
g.
The room sensor shall provide access to additional diagnostic data from a sensoruser keypad request. This Diagnostic mode is displayed on the LCD screens and
includes separate displays for the controllers:
1)
Subnet and Node Address
2)
Errors
3)
Alarms
4)
Temperature Offset
15990 - 13/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
I.
J.
ACE, Inc.
MR
VAV Controller Functionality (VAVDDC).
1.
Controls shall be microprocessor based Pressure Independent Variable Air Volume
Digital Controllers, as shown in the drawings. The VAVDDC shall be a single integrated
package consisting of a microprocessor, power supply, damper actuator, differential
pressure transducer, field terminations, and application software. All input/output signals
shall be directly hardwired to the VAVDDC controller. The internal actuator shall employ
a manual override that allows for powered or non-powered adjustment of the damper
position. In all cases, the controller shall automatically resume proper operation following
the return of power to, or control by the ASC. Programming, configuring and/or
troubleshooting of input/output signals shall be easily executed through the ASC sensor
or GP tool connected at the wall sensor location.
2.
Shall provide BACnet object and service support to provide BAS integration and optimum
use of network bandwidth,
3.
The VAVDDC control algorithms shall be designed to limit the frequency of damper
repositioning, to assure a minimum 10-year life from all components. The VAVDDC shall
provide internal differential pressure transducer for pressure independent applications
with an accuracy of ± 5 %. Flow through transducers requiring filter maintenance are not
acceptable. The VAVDDC shall provide zone control accuracy equal to or better than +/1 degree F. Systems providing control accuracies greater than +/- 1 degree F are not
acceptable. With the submittal package, contractor shall provide performance data that
verifies control accuracy of the VAVDDC.
4.
All input/output signals shall be directly hardwired to the VAVDDC. A minimum of three
input points of the VAVDDC shall employ a universal configuration that allows for
flexibility in application ranging from dry contact, resistive, to voltage/current sourced
inputs. If three universal points are not available, a minimum of three input points (each)
of the dry contact, resistive and analog voltage/current types must be Triac and universal
analog form. All digital outputs shall be Triac type. Devices utilizing non-relay outputs
shall provide an interface relay for all points. All analog outputs shall be programmable
for their start points and span to accommodate the control devices. Configuration of all
I/O points shall be accomplished without physical hardware jumpers, switches or settings.
Troubleshooting of input/output signals shall be easily executed with the Graphical
Programming tool or a volt-ohm meter (VOM). All I/O points shall be utilized by the local
ASC or shall be available as I/O points for other controllers throughout the network.
5.
The BMS contractor shall field install the VAVDDC to the VAV box.
6.
The VAV terminal manufacturer shall provide a multi-point, averaging, differential
pressure sensor mounted on the inlet to each VAV box. The BMS contractor shall provide
all reheat control valves to the mechanical contractor for mounting and piping. The
FMCS contractor shall provide and install the VAV box discharge air temperature sensor
and all wiring between the discharge air temperature sensor and the VAVDDC controller,
the valve and VAVDDC controller and between the room sensor and the VAVDDC
controller.
VAV Box Room Sensor
1.
The VAV Box Room Sensor shall provide room temperature value to the controller.
2.
The VAV Box Room Sensor shall connect directly to the controller Box and shall not
utilize any of the I/O points of the controller.
3.
The VAV Box Room Sensor shall provide a two-wire connection to the controller that is
polarity and wire type insensitive.
4.
The VAV Box Room Sensor shall provide a communications jack for connection to the
native BACnet RS-485 communication trunk to which the ASC controller is connected.
5.
The VAV Box Room Sensor, the connected controller, and all other devices on the LON
bus shall be accessible by the Portable Engineering Station.
6.
The VAV Box Room Sensor shall be provided in a modular configuration that allows for
the rough in of all wiring without the presence of the electronics or esthetic covering.
15990 - 14/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
7.
K.
L.
M.
ACE, Inc.
MR
The VAV Box Room Sensor shall allow for the customization of the color on the esthetic
covering as a standard offering.
8.
The VAV Box Room Sensor shall be supplied in the following manner:
a.
LCD display for showing the current temperature.
b.
Tenant override to allow timed override of unoccupied to occupied mode of
operation.
c.
LED indication of override state
d.
Up/Down keys to allow adjustment of the current setpoint
e.
User interface with the VAV Box Sensor shall be provided as a configurable
function, and shall offer password protection for access to network variable editing.
f.
ASHRAE 95 compliance (LCD display and sub-base functionality)
g.
The VAV Box Room Sensor shall provide access to additional diagnostic data from
a sensor-user keypad request. This Diagnostic mode is displayed on the LCD
screens and includes separate displays for the controllers:
1)
Subnet and Node Address
2)
Errors
3)
Alarms
4)
Temperature Offset
h.
Room sensor accessories include the following:
1)
Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls.
2)
Sensor Guards: Where noted or shown on the drawings.
3)
Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.
VAVDDC –Air Balancing.
1.
Through a BACnet Portable Engineering Station or the Configuration Commissioning
Diagnostic Tool furnished by the BMS contractor, the VAVDDC shall support a fully
prompted Air Balance sequence. The BPES or CCDT shall, when connected through the
wall sensor on the Ethernet network or through a WiFi connection access the VAVDDC
unit. The air balance sequence shall step the balancing contractor through the checkout
and calibration of the VAVDDC. Upon completion of the balancing sequence, the flow
values presented by the VAVDDC shall match those observed by the balancing
contractor's measurement equipment. Additionally, upon completion of the air balance,
the balance settings shall be archived for future in the VAVDDC. The CCDT shall be
able to access these balance settings at any time and generate a report. The balance
settings can be uploaded by either the BPES or CCDT for use if the VAVDDC requires
replacement.
Systems not able to provide a formatted air balance Graphical
Programming Tool shall provide an individual full time during the Air-balancing process to
assure full balance compliance.
LANs:
1.
Capacity for a minimum of 64 client workstations connected to multi-user, multitasking
environment with concurrent capability to access DDC network or control units.
2.
Enterprise Network LAN
a.
Media: Ethernet (IEEE 802.3), peer-to-peer CSMA/CD, operating at 10 or 100
Mbps, cable 10 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5
3.
Primary Controller Network LAN
4.
Remote Connection
a.
Static IP address provided by Owner’s Representative for system viewing on the
LAN.
b.
Available based on Owner’s Security Settings and Network Administration
requirements for VPN, etc. for outside access to network.
Software:
1.
Controller and System HVAC Applications
a.
Update to latest version of software at Project completion. Include and implement
the following capabilities from the control units if documented by the specified
sequence of operations:
15990 - 15/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
2.3
A.
B.
2.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Load Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time
scheduling,
start/stop
time
optimization,
occupied/unoccupied
setback/setup, DDC with PID, and trend logging.
HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset and system
volume totaling, outdoor air damper control based on mixed air temperature
calculation, and enthalpy/economizer switchover.
Chiller Control Programs: Chilled water plant optimization with chilled-water
reset, chiller and pump equipment selection and sequencing.
Boiler Control Programs: Building loop heating hot water optimization with
hot water supply reset, pump equipment selection and sequencing.
Programming Application Features: Include trend point, alarm reporting,
alarm lockout, weekly scheduling, staggered start, sequencing, anti-short
cycling and calculated point.
CONTROL PANELS
Local Control Panels: Unitized NEMA 1 cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor
mounting, located adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying
for all panels.
1.
Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch thick, furniture-quality steel, or extruded-aluminum alloy,
totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard
shop-painted finish.
2.
Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices pre-wired with color-coded
stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for
field connections shall be UL Listed for 600 volt service, individually identified per
control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations
for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.
3.
Door-Mounted Equipment: Flush-mount (on hinged door) manual switches, including
damper-positioning switches, changeover switches, thermometers, and gages.
4.
Provide ON/OFF power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to
each local panel.
Local control panels installed in the boiler room shall be installed in a NEMA 3R cabinet.
SENSORS
Electronic Temperature Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct
mounting as required.
1.
Resistance Temperature Detectors: Platinum, thermistor, or Balco
a.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point; thermistors shall have a
maximum 5 year drift of no more than .225°F maximum error of no more than
.36°F
b.
Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable
c.
Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 6 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 4 sq. ft.
d.
Averaging Elements in Ducts: 60 inches, long, flexible for use where prone to
temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 4 sq. ft.; 264 inches long,
flexible for use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger
than 16 sq. ft; length as required.
e.
Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 21/2 inches.
f.
Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and
temperature compensated.
1.
Accuracy: +/- 1 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.
2.
Output: 4 to 20 mA, 0-5 vDC, 0-10 vDC.
15990 - 16/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
3.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Building Static-Pressure Range: -.1 to .1, -0.25 to 0.25, -.5 to .5, -1.0 to 1.0 IN WC.,
jumper selectable.
4.
Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 1, 0 to 2.5, 0 to 5, 0 to 10 IN WC., jumper adjustable
Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system;
proportional output 4 to 20 mA.
Equipment operation sensors as follows:
1.
Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5 IN WC
2.
Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch piped across supply and return
piping with adjustable pressure-differential range of 5 to 60 psig.
3.
Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers,
adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.
Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indication: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to
10-V dc, feedback signal.
Water-Flow Switches: Pressure-flow switches of bellows actuated mercury or snap-acting type,
with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment, with stainless steel or bronze paddle.
For chilled water applications, provide vapor proof type.
Carbon-Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-state infrared sensors,
suitable over a temperature range of 23°F to 130°F, calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with
continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20 mA output, and wall mounted.
Snow Melt Temperature / Precipitation Sensor, or equivalent equal:
1.
Tekmar Snow / Ice Sensor 094 (with 210 feet cable) with 091 Snow / Ice Sensor Socket.
a.
Material: Brass, expoxy
b.
Cable Material: 18 AWG, 5 conductor stranded wire with polyethylene jacket.
c.
Operating Range: -30 to 170 deg F
d.
Sensor: NTC thermistor, 10 kohms @ 77 deg F
e.
Socket:
1)
Material: Brass
2)
Cap and Mounting plate Material: Polyethylene
2.
Follow manufacturer’s guidelines for installing and wiring.
THERMOSTATS
Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with two-, three-, or fourposition, push-button or lever-operated fan switch.
1.
Label switches "FAN ON-OFF," "FAN HIGH-LOW-OFF," "FAN HIGH-MED-LOW-OFF."
Provide unit for mounting on two-gang switch box.
Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type,
with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater.
Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated,
enclosed, snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, integral manual
on-off-auto selector switch.
1.
Equip thermostats, which control electric heating loads directly, with off position on dial
wired to break ungrounded conductors.
2.
Dead Band: Maximum 2°F.
Room Thermostat Cover Construction:
1.
Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed or exposed
2.
Set-Point Indication: Concealed or exposed
3.
Thermometer: Optional
4.
Color: Neutral
5.
Orientation: Vertical or horizontal
Room thermostat accessories include the following:
1.
Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.
2.
Thermostat Guards: Where shown on the drawings.
3.
Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.
4.
Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch diameter, adjustment knob.
15990 - 17/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
F.
G.
2.6
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Electric Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or
automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is
equal to or below set point.
1.
Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet
2.
Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.
Electric High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or
automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is
equal to or above set point.
1.
Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet.
2.
Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.
ACTUATORS
Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating
action or two-position action under all environmental conditions (temperature, low power voltage
fluctuations, tight seal damper design, maximum air and water flow forces).
1.
Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed
and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in
housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary
switches, or feedback potentiometer.
2.
Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2”: Size for running torque of
150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
3.
Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2”: Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
4.
Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of
150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
5.
Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
Electronic Damper and Valve Actuators: Direct-coupled type non hydraulic designed for
minimum 100,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque. The actuator shall have rating of not less
than twice the thrust needed for actual operation of the damper or valve
1.
Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
2.
Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
3.
Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual
gear release on non-spring-return actuators.
4.
Actuators shall have the ability to be tandem mounted.
5.
All spring-return actuators shall have a manual override. Complete manual override shall
take no more than 10 turns.
6.
Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24V ac or dc, Maximum 10VA.
7.
Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 15 VA at 24V ac.
8.
Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback
signal.
9.
Temperature Rating: -22°F to 140ºF.
10. Run Time: 200 seconds open, 40 seconds closed.
11. All actuators shall have a 5 year warranty
12. Valves:
a.
Size for torque required for valve close-off at maximum pump differential pressure
(regardless of water loop system pressures).
b.
Valve and Actuators shall come from the factory fully assembled.
c.
Spring Return Manual Override shall come with a 10 Degree Valve Preload to
assure tight close off.
d.
Proportional Signal Type:
1)
All air handling coils.
e.
Floating Signal Type:
1)
All VAV reheat coils.
15990 - 18/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
f.
13.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.8
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Two-Position Type:
1)
All fan coils and unit heaters.
Dampers:
a.
Size for running torque calculated as follows:
1)
Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
2)
Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
3)
Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-pounds/sq. ft. damper.
4)
Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of
damper.
5)
Dampers with 2 to 3 Inches wg. of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000
to 2500 FPM Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 1.5.
6)
Dampers with 3 to 4 Inches wg. of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500
to 3000 FPM Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 2.0.
b.
Spring Return Manual Override actuators shall a factory set 5 Degree Damper
Preload.
CONTROL VALVES
Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on
maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
Globe Valves NPS 2” and Smaller: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable
composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.
Valves shall have allowable media temperature of 20°F to 281°F to assure that the valve
packing will have a long life (valves will narrower allowable media temperatures have no
reserve packing capability for long term watertight seal).
Globe Valves NPS 2-1/2” and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc,
flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.
Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
1.
Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig. and 250°F operating conditions.
2.
Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel or brass.
a.
Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug
on top and bottom of guided plugs.
b.
Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding
surfaces for plugs on top and bottom of guided plugs.
3.
Sizing: 3 psig. maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
4.
Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; threeway valves shall have linear characteristics. Operators shall close valves against pump
shutoff head.
Terminal Unit Control Valves: 360 psi forged yellow brass body, nickel plated brass ball, with
optimizer insert for modulating applications, blow-out resistant stem, two or three-port as
indicated, and threaded ends for chilled or hot water, up to 50% glycol solutions. Actuators
shall be as noted above with 5 year warranty. Spring return is required for all Unit Ventilator
heating valves and other terminal equipment that has an outside air source. All non-spring
return valves must have manual override ability built in to the actuator.
1.
Rating: ANSI class IV, maximum static pressure of 250 psig., minimum fluid temperature
of 20ºF and maximum of 250ºF operating conditions.
2.
Sizing: 4 psig. maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff
head.
3.
Flow Characteristics:
Two-way and three-valves shall have equal percentage
characteristics.
CONTROL CABLE
Electronic and Fiber-Optic Cable for Control Wiring:
Specifications.
Communication cable shall be Category 6.
15990 - 19/24
As specified in the Electrical
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
C.
2.9
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
All cabling exposed in the return air plenum shall be plenum rated.
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
Temperature Control Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing each heating
hot water and chilled water variable speed drive. Temperature Control Contractor shall
interface the respective variable speed drives and motor starters with the building management
system. Variable Speed Drive shall comply with the following:
1.
Performance Capabilities
a.
The Invertor voltage/frequency ratio shall be selectable for reduced torque loads.
b.
The Invertor acceleration/deceleration time shall be adjustable from 1 to 120
seconds.
c.
The Invertor frequency setting signal choices shall include 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 420 mA.
d.
The Invertor shall have a minimum the following protective features with an alarm
display indication:
e.
Overcurrent Shut-Off
f.
Regenerative Overvoltage
g.
Electronic Thermal Protector
h.
Heatsink Overheat
i.
Instantaneous Power Failure
j.
Ground Fault
2.
The following operator controls shall be provided as a minimum:
a.
Hand/Off/Auto Switch
b.
Local/Remote Switch
c.
Frequency Setting Speed Pot
d.
Frequency Indication Meter Calibrated in % Speed
e.
Amp Meter
f.
Elapsed Time Meter
g.
Power On Light
h.
VFD Enable Light
i.
VFD Fault Light
3.
Additional Options
a.
Input Disconnect: The Invertor shall be supplied with a door interlocked input
disconnect motor circuit protector. The MCP shall allow trip adjustment sufficient
to start the motor across the line in the bypass mode and normally be set at a
minimum setting for maximum protection in the VFD mode.
b.
ByPass Option: The Invertor shall be supplied with a manual bypass contractor
arrangement for transfer to the utility line to operate at constant speed. This option
shall be prewired in the same enclosure, including contactors, motor overload
VFD/Bypass selector switch and Bypass ON light.
c.
Auto Restart: The Invertor shall initiate an automatic time delayed restart after
recovering from undervoltage or loss of power. The Invertor shall not automatically
restart after overcurrent, overvoltage, overtemperature, or any other damaging
conditions but shall require a manual restart.
d.
Frequency Jump: The drive shall be supplied with the capability of being field
retrofitted with a frequency jump control to avoid operating at a point of resonance
with the natural frequency of the machine.
e.
Radio Interference Filter: The drive shall be supplied with the capability of being
field retrofitted with a radio interference filter to reduce radio interference noise.
f.
Input Line Reactor: Variable Speed Drives shall be furnished with an input line
reactor packaged with the drive. The line reactor shall be 3% impedance reactor
manufactured to meet MIL-I-45208 and VDE-0550 standards and shall be UL
recognized and CSA certified. Drives using DC bus filters in lieu of line reactors
are not acceptable
15990 - 20/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
4.
B.
Manufacture Qualifications
a.
The drive manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in producing
Adjustable Frequency Motor Drives of the horsepower and voltage range required.
b.
The drive supplier shall have a local authorized service center with spare parts
stock. The Service Center shall be able to demonstrate capability of assuring
quality service and repair with quick turn around based on local parts stock and
technical expertise.
c.
The Supplier of the VFD equipment shall be an authorized local dealer or
representative of the manufacturer located within 250 miles of the job.
5.
Installation
Field start-up service shall be provided by an authorized factory service representative. The
supplier shall provide warranty and authorized factory service including field start-up and
training. A written certificate of the same shall be provided at start-up. Start-up by sales
representative is not acceptable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
EXAMINATION
Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units.
INSTALLATION
Install equipment level and plumb.
Install software in control units. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements
and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.
Verify location of room sensors, thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors
with Drawings and room details before installation.
1.
Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
2.
Install VAVDDC discharge air temperature sensors downstream of the reheat coil at a
location of full air stream mixing and as recommended by the sensor manufacture.
Install guards on sensors and thermostats where indicated on the drawings.
1.
Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section
"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping."
Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15
Section "Refrigerant Piping."
Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 15Sections specifying air ducts.
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
Contractor shall employ or contract with qualified electricians to perform the necessary electrical
work to support the temperature control project.
Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to the electrical specifications.
Install building wire and cable according to the electrical specifications
Install signal and communication cable according to the electrical specifications, and industry
standards and codes.
1.
All exposed cabling installed in the plenum return areas shall be certified and rated for
plenum applications.
2.
Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping
are exposed.
15990 - 21/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
3.
4.
5.
E.
F.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Install exposed cable in raceway.
Install concealed cable in raceway.
Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where
several cables follow a common path.
6.
Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
7.
Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control
system, except local individual room control cables.
8.
Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of
piping and equipment.
Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic
duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is
in hand position.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing to the mechanical engineer.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
2.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3.
Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation
with compatible signal generator.
4.
Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control
set points are as required.
5.
Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence
of operation. Adjust PID actions.
6.
Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
7.
Test software and hardware interlocks.
DDC Verification:
1.
Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.
2.
Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.
3.
Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,
and other applicable considerations.
4.
Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.
5.
Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and selfcontained pressure regulators.
6.
Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.
7.
Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.
8.
Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper
blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.
9.
Check DDC system as follows:
a.
Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if
applicable.
b.
Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and
approved tagging system.
c.
Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.
d.
Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
Acceptance Check Sheet
1.
Prepare a check sheet that includes all points for all functions of the temperature control
system as indicated in the sequence of operations included in this project.
2.
Submit the check sheet to the Engineer for review and approval.
15990 - 22/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
3.
E.
F.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
ACE, Inc.
MR
The engineer will use the check sheet as the basis for acceptance with the temperature
control contractor.
VAVDDC box performance verification and documentation:
1.
The temperature control contractor shall, in conjunction and coordination with Test and
Balance contractor, test each VAV box for operation and correct flow. At each step, after
a settling time, box air flows and damper positions will be sampled. Following the tests, a
pass/fail report indicating results shall be produced. Possible results are Pass, No
change in flow between full open and full close, Reverse operation or Maximum flow not
achieved. The report shall be submitted as documentation of the installation.
2.
The temperature control contractor shall issue a report based on a sampling of the VAV
calculated loop performance metrics. The report shall indicate performance criteria,
include the count of conforming and non-conforming boxes, list the non-conforming
boxes along with their performance data, and shall also include graphical representations
of performance.
3.
The temperature control contractor shall randomly test a minimum of 35% of the VAV
boxes after approximately 6-months of operation and report the findings to the engineer.
The BMS Contractor shall contact the engineer prior to execution of this follow-up testing
to obtain a list of VAV boxes to be tested.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
FACTORY STARTUP – VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
Field start-up service shall be provided for the heating hot water and chilled water variable
frequency drive shall be by an authorized factory service representative. The representative
shall provide warranty and authorized factory service including field start-up and training. A
written certificate of the same shall be provided at start-up. Start-up by sales representative is
not acceptable.
ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
Occupancy Adjustments: Within one (1) year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to
three (3) project site visits, when requested by the Owner, to adjust and calibrate components
and to assist Owner’s personnel in making program changes and in adjusting sensors and
controls to suit actual conditions.
TRAINING
On-site training shall be provided by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of the
specific installation details of the project. This training shall, at a minimum consist of the
following:
1.
Review and understanding of the project as-built temperature control drawings.
2.
Discussion and explanation of the HVAC sequence of operation.
3.
Review of the BMS software layout and naming conventions.
4.
A walk through of the facility to identify panel and device locations.
5.
Review of device and control trouble shooting.
6.
Proficiently operate the system.
7.
Understand control system architecture and configuration.
8.
Understand DDC system components.
9.
Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing routines
(algorithms).
10. Log on and off the system.
11. Access graphics, point reports, and logs.
12. Adjust and change system set points, time schedules, and holiday schedules.
13. Recognize malfunctions of the system by observation of the printed copy and graphical
visual signals.
14. Understand Operation and Maintenance manual.
15. Access data from DDC controllers
15990 - 23/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15990
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
B.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Training duration shall consist of sixteen (16) hours at substantial completion, another eight (8)
hours approximately six months after substantial completion, and another eight (8) hours at
eleven (11) months after substantial completion. Contractor shall coordinate scheduling of the
training with the school district facility personnel. Contractor shall submit report, signed by
authorized school district official, to the engineer documenting the completion of each training
session.
END OF SECTION 15990
15990 - 24/24
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4
A.
B.
SUMMARY
This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
See Division 15 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control equipment and
devices and for submittal requirements.
The work of this Division shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the associated
work of other trades.
All work in this Division shall be coordinated and provided by a single Building Management
System (BMS) Contractor.
NOTES
All heat valves to fail in heating mode on loss of electrical power.
All Temperature set points and reset schedules shall be adjustable.
Provide independent set points for occupied and unoccupied modes.
BMS shall prevent a simultaneous condition of an opened heating valve and an opened cooling
valve on the respective air handling units.
SCOPE
It is the intent of these specifications and the contract drawings to describe the work to be
performed in order to provide a complete system of temperature controls including all materials,
plans, labor and accessories necessary to the successful completion and operation of the
system as intended.
The work to be performed shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following systems
and apparatus:
1.
Valves and actuators, dampers, control panels, gauges and instruments, direct digital
system controls and sensors, electric wiring and conduit, variable speed drives, and a
workstation.
All air handling units and other terminal units and equipment items noted in the sequence of
operations shall be controlled by digital system controllers utilizing electronic actuators for the
valves and dampers.
The BMS Contractor shall field install all digital VAV box controllers and actuators. The
Temperature Control Contractor shall field coordinate the installation with the mechanical
contractor.
Temperature Control Contractor shall calibrate all instrumentation and devices prior to
substantial completion and after 8-months of system operation.
SCHEDULES
Temperature Control Contractor shall establish all occupied, non-occupied, holiday, and
summer schedules, and occupied and unoccupied (night setback) temperatures prior to final
system commissioning. The temperature control contractor shall develop a schedule matrix
worksheet and transmit to the owner for their input and development of the final schedule(s).
The worksheet matrix shall, at a minimum list the following for each system and equipment:
1.
Equipment Tag and Description.
2.
Proposed Occupied Schedule
3.
Proposed Un-occupied Schedule
4.
Proposed Holiday Schedule
5.
Proposed Summer Schedule
6.
Proposed Occupied Space Temperatures
7.
Proposed Unoccupied (night setback) Space Temperatures
Initial Space Temperature Set-Points (adjustable)
ACE, Inc.
MR
15995 - 1/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
1.
2.
Heating
a.
Unoccupied: 65 F
b.
Occupied: 72 F
Cooling
a.
Unoccupied: 85 F
b.
Occupied: 75 F
1.5
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
1.6
AHU-1 (VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNIT)
A.
SUPPLY FAN START/STOP:
1.
The supply fan shall be started according to the established schedule. If the supply fan
status does not match the commanded value, an alarm shall be generated. When the
supply fan status indicates the fan started, the control sequence shall be enabled.
B.
RETURN FAN:
1.
When the supply fan is started a command to the return fan shall be sent. If the return
fan status does not match the commanded value, an alarm shall be generated.
C.
SUPPLY FAN CONTROL:
1.
When the space temperature is between the occupied heating and cooling set-points
(inside of the bias), the supply fan shall be at the minimum speed to maintain a minimum
supply air flow rate set-point of 4,000 cfm, and the discharge air temperature shall be
maintained at the room’s space temperature set-point.
2.
Cooling:
a.
On a rise in zone temperature above the cooling set-point, the supply fan speed
shall gradually increase to try to satisfy the space’s cooling temperature set-point.
3.
Heating:
a.
On a drop in space temperature below the heating set-point, the supply fan speed
shall be set to the minimum supply air flow rate of 4,000 cfm, and the heating valve
shall modulate open to maintain the space temperature heating set-point.
b.
If the heating valve opens to 100%, and the space temperature heating set-point is
not satisfied, then the supply fan’s speed shall gradually increase to a value to
maintain the space temperature heating set-point.
D.
RETURN FAN TRACKING:
1.
The return fan shall modulate in sequence with the supply fan. The return fan’s
maximum and minimum system operating speeds will be determined and established
during the Test and Balance phase in conjunction with the space’s supply and exhaust
systems in their balanced operating state. The TC contractor shall record these speeds
and lock-in the set-points on the VFD.
E.
DISCHARGE AIR CONTROL:
1.
The return and outside air dampers, independently controlled, and the heating control
valve shall modulate in sequence to maintain the air handling unit’s discharge air
temperature commanded value. The discharge air temperature shall be maintained
between 55ºF to 90ºF (adjustable) based upon the room demand and the space
temperature set-point. The exhaust damper shall modulate in sequence with the outside
air damper. The TC contractor shall collaborate with the project’s TAB contractor and the
project’s CAX to establish the exhaust damper’s modulating parameters.
F.
ECONOMIZER DRY BULB SWITCHOVER:
ACE, Inc.
MR
15995 - 2/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
1.
Economizer cooling shall be enabled whenever the outside air temperature is less than
the return air temperature. Economizer cooling shall be disabled whenever the outside
air temperature is greater than the return air temperature.
G.
HEAT CONTROL:
1.
The heating valve shall modulate as needed to maintain the discharge air temperature
set point.
2.
Refer to Night Setback/Setup paragraph later in this section.
H.
COOLING CONTROL:
1.
When the discharge air temperature cannot be maintained with economizer cooling then
the air handling unit shall continue to run at the maximum schedule supply air rate and to
maintain the minimum outside air rate or CO2 set-point.
I.
OUTDOOR AIR CONTROLS:
1.
Primary Control – Minimum Outside Air:
a.
The outside air damper shall be set to provide a minimum of 700 cfm (adjustable)
and a maximum of 1,600 cfm (adjustable) when the supply air is at the unit’s
minimum rate of 4,000 cfm during periods of non-economizer cooling. The TC
contractor shall work with the TAB contractor and the CAX to establish these
outside air rates.
2.
Secondary Control - CO2 Control:
a.
A C02 sensor shall be mounted in the space adjacent to the room’s space
temperature sensor.
b.
CO2 set-point: 1,000 ppm.
c.
If the space CO2 value rises above the set-point, the outside air damper shall
gradually open from the minimum set-point position to maintain the space CO2
set-point. The exhaust air damper shall gradually open concurrently with the
outside air damper and at the same opening rate.
3.
The outdoor air damper shall be closed in unoccupied times, in warm up periods and cool
down periods, unless outdoor air is required per the cooling sequence of operations to
cool down or maintain the setback temperature.
J.
FILTER STATUS
1.
A Differential Pressure Switch shall be installed across the filter bank to monitor
differential pressure across the filters and shall alarm the DDC system when filters are
dirty.
K.
SAFETIES:
1.
All of the safety devices are manual reset; the device that has tripped must be manually
reset before restarting the air handling unit.
2.
If a low limit temperature sensor senses a temperature below the established low-limit set
point (32 F, adjustable) the supply fan and return fan shall be shutdown. The low limit
freeze stat shall be located immediately downstream of the heating coil.
3.
On an indication of a smoke detector (installed by the Electrical Contractor) served by
this unit, the supply fan and return fan shall stop and the outdoor air damper shall close.
4.
If a high static pressure switch located after the supply fan senses a discharge pressure
that is greater than set point, the supply fan and return fan shall be shut down.
L.
SHUTDOWN:
1.
When the unit is shut down by either a stop command or system safety, the unit shall be
set as follows:
a.
Supply fan shall be off
b.
Return fan shall be off
ACE, Inc.
MR
15995 - 3/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Supply fan VFD shall be commanded to 0%
Return fan VFD shall be commanded to 0%
Outside air damper shall close
Return air damper shall open
Exhaust air damper shall close
Heat valve shall remain in control
M.
MORNING WARMUP MODE:
1.
A warm-up mode shall be initiated by an optimal start program to ensure the space
temperature is brought up to set-point by the occupied time if all the following conditions
exist:
a.
The outside air temperature is below 45 F.
b.
The space temperature is more than 2 F below the occupied set-point.
c.
During the warm-up mode, the supply fan and return fan shall run continuously, the
outside air and exhaust dampers shall be closed, and the heating valve shall
modulate to maintain the maximum discharge air temperature but no greater than
90 F. The warm-up mode shall be terminated when one of the following conditions
exists:
d.
The occupied time is reached.
e.
The coldest space temperature reaches the occupied set-point.
f.
The warmest zone is at least 2 F above set-point.
2.
Morning warm-up cannot start prior to 5:00 am (MST), adjustable.
N.
NIGHT SETBACK/NIGHT SETUP:
1.
When in the scheduled “unoccupied” mode, the outside air and exhaust dampers shall be
closed, and the return air damper shall be opened. The unit shall cycle as necessary to
maintain the night setback zone temperature at set point. A timed cycle differential shall
prevent the unit from cycling excessively.
2.
The hot water valve shall be a position to allow continuous flow through the heating coil
when the air handling unit is cycled off. When the unit is cycled on the valve shall
modulate to maintain a discharge air temperature of 90 F (adjustable).
3.
An Occupancy override switch (integral to the new space sensor) shall be located in the
space at the space sensor location. If activated, the temporary occupied sequence will
operate for a three (3) hour period (adjustable).
O.
MONITOR AND DISPLAY:
1.
At a minimum, the following shall be monitored and displayed on the system graphics:
a.
Supply fan status and speed.
b.
Return fan status and speed.
c.
Supply Air volume based on a fan law calculation. This value is cfm2 as further
described below.
d.
Damper positions.
e.
Hydronic coil valve position.
f.
Outdoor Air (OAT), Return Air (RAT), Mixed Air (MAT), and Discharge Air (DAT)
temperatures.
g.
Outside Air Volume Rate based on the “Outdoor Air Approximation Schedule”
(OAAS), as further described below.
h.
Differential Pressure across the filter bank.
i.
Space Temperature.
j.
Indoor CO2 value.
k.
All system set-points.
2.
Fan law calculation is as follows:
a.
cfm2 = (rpm2/rpm1) x cfm1
1)
cfm1 = maximum scheduled supply air flow rate for the system
ACE, Inc.
MR
15995 - 4/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
2)
b.
1.7
A.
B.
C.
rpm1 = motor speed of the direct drive fan at maximum scheduled supply air
flow rate for the system. This value shall be determined in conjunction with
the TAB Contractor and CAX.
3)
rpm2 = motor speed corresponding to the variable speed drive frequency
output.
Outdoor Air Approximation Schedule (OAAS):
1)
In collaboration with the project’s TC and TAB contractors, and the CAX, an
OAAS shall be developed during the TAB process.
2)
The OAAS is to be tested and developed given various outside air damper
positions versus various supply fan speeds.
3)
Forty-eight (48) outside air values are to be tested and recorded by the TAB
and CAX based on the following parameters:
a)
Number of Outside Air Damper Positions: six (6) at 15% increments
from 15% to 90%.
b)
Number of Supply Fan Speeds: eight (8) at 6 hertz increments from
12 hertz to 54 hertz.
4)
The TC contractor shall then use this field tested and produced OAAS to
establish the required outside air rates and graphically display the Outdoor
Air Volume Rate.
5)
The OAAS shall be displayed on the BMS graphics.
AHU-2, AHU-3, AHU-4, and AHU-5 (VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNIT)
SUPPLY FAN START/STOP:
1.
The supply fan shall be started according to the established schedule. If the supply fan
status does not match the commanded value, an alarm shall be generated. When the
supply fan status indicates the fan started, the control sequence shall be enabled.
RETURN FAN START/STOP:
1.
When the supply fan is started a command to the return fan shall be sent. If the return
fan status does not match the commanded value, an alarm shall be generated.
SUPPLY DUCT STATIC PRESSURE RESET CONTROL:
1.
The supply fan shall modulate to maintain the discharge static pressure at set-point. The
initial set-point shall be established in conjunction with the TAB contractor with the target
set-point being the minimum value to meet design flow conditions (approximate setting is
1” W.C.). The static pressure sensor shall be located 2/3 of the way down the longest
duct run
2.
The static pressure set-point shall reset based on feedback from the respective VAVs.
The BMS shall determine the VAV box damper position of all the VAV boxes served by
the associated AHU. The BMS shall determine the quantity of VAV boxes whose damper
positions are greater than 90% open (more air). The BMS shall also determine the
quantity of VAV boxes whose damper positions are less than 70% open (less air). If the
quantity of VAV boxes with a damper position greater than 90% open is greater than the
quantity of VAV boxes with a damper position less than 70% open the supply duct static
pressure set-point shall increase by 0.1” w.c.. If the quantity of VAV boxes with a damper
position greater than 90% open is less than the quantity of VAV boxes with a damper
position less than 70% open the supply duct static pressure set-point shall decrease by
0.1” w.c.. If the quantities are equal, no change shall occur. This evaluation shall occur
once every 15 minutes.
3.
The maximum duct static pressure set-point shall be 1.75” w.c. (adjustable).
4.
The minimum duct static pressure set-point shall be 0.50” w.c. (adjustable).
5.
The following VAV Damper Position Schedule shall be displayed on the associated air
handling unit’s BMS graphic:
ACE, Inc.
MR
15995 - 5/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
VAV DAMPER POSITION SCHEDULE
Damper Position
Quantity of VAV Boxes
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Worst Case VAV Box
> 90%
(Reports quantity of VAV boxes
with damper position greater than
90%)
(Reports VAV Box with highest
damper position)
< 70%
(Reports quantity of VAV boxes
with damper position less than
70%)
(Reports VAV Box with lowest
damper position)
RETURN FAN TRACKING:
1.
The return fan shall modulate in sequence with the supply fan. The return fan’s
maximum system operating speed will be determined and established during the Test
and Balance phase in conjunction with the building supply and exhaust systems in their
balanced operating state.
BUILDING PRESSURE CONTROL:
1.
The air handling system shall employ a building pressurization system to maintain a
positive pressure in the building area served.
The exhaust damper shall be
independently controlled. The system shall utilize a two (2) part system to maintain
positive pressure.
a.
Space Static Pressure Above Set-Point:
1)
Stage 1: The exhaust damper shall gradually modulate open to maintain the
space static pressure set-point.
2)
Stage 2: If the exhaust damper’s position goes to 100% open and the space
static pressure is still above set-point, the return fan speed shall gradually
increase to maintain the space static set-point.
b.
Space Static Pressure Below Set-Point:
1)
Stage 1: The exhaust damper shall gradually modulate close to maintain
static set-point.
2)
Stage 2: If the exhaust damper’s position goes to 100% close and the space
static pressure is still below set-point, the return fan speed shall gradually
decrease to maintain the space static pressure set-point.
c.
Safety: If the return air and exhaust air dampers close to 100%, then the return fan
shall be commanded off.
2.
Three (3) static pressure sensors shall be located uniformly in the area served by the
respective air handling unit. The locations of the static pressure sensors are identified
and shown on the mechanical drawings. If the sensors are not shown contact the
project’s engineer to establish the sensor locations.
3.
The static pressure set-point, adjustable, shall be 0.05 inches w.g..
DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROL SET-POINT:
1.
The set-point shall reset based on feedback from the VAVs. The BMS shall determine the
maximum cooling and heating requests of all the VAV boxes served by the associated
AHU. As the space temperature deviates further from set-point the strength of the heating
or cooling request should increase similar to the following table:
15995 - 6/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Deviation from setpoint (deg F)
Strength of call
0-1 deg F
0
1.1-2 deg F
1
2.1-4 deg F
2
Greater than 4 deg F
3
The sum of the heating and cooling requests is compared to one another. If there is more
heat request in the facility than cool requests, the supply air temperature will increase
(and vice versa). The sum of the heating and cooling requests shall be determined every
15 minutes. The supply air temperature set-point shall increase or decrease by 2 deg F in
response to the facility’s condition.
The maximum supply air temperature set-point shall be 65 deg F (adjustable).
The minimum supply air temperature set-point shall be 55 deg F (adjustable).
The initial supply air temperature set-point (when the unit first transition to occupied mode
and there is a change in space temperature set-points from un-occupied set-points to
occupied set-points) shall be 60 deg F.
Provide the following graphic display next to the supply air temperature set-point to allow
the end user to troubleshoot how the set-point was determined:
HEATING – COOLING STRENGTH SCHEDULE
Requests
Strength of Call
G.
H.
I.
J.
ACE, Inc.
MR
Worst Case Zone
Cooling
(Reports the active strength of
call for cooling)
(Reports zone with largest
strength of call for cooling)
Heating
(Reports the active strength of
call for heating
(Reports zone with largest
strength of call for heating)
COOLING CONTROL
1.
When the discharge air temperature cannot be maintained with economizer cooling then
the cooling valve shall modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature set point.
2.
Refer to Night Setback/Setup paragraph later in this section
ECONOMIZER DRY BULB SWITCHOVER:
1.
Economizer cooling shall be enabled whenever the outside air temperature is less than
the return air temperature. Economizer cooling shall be disabled whenever the outside
air temperature is greater than the return air temperature.
PREHEAT CONTROL:
1.
The preheat valve shall modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature at set point
(adjustable).
2.
Refer to Night Setback/Setup paragraph later in this section.
OUTDOOR AIR CONTROLS:
1.
Primary Control: The outside air damper shall modulate, based on a BMS mixed air
temperature calculation, as required to maintain the minimum outside air volume rate as
scheduled on the Drawings. The below calculation shall be performed every fifteen (15)
minutes during the occupied mode to establish the outside air damper position to
maintain the outside air volume rate set-point.
a.
Mixed Air Temperature Calculation: [(scheduled outside air rate x outside air
temperature) + (supply air volume rate – scheduled outside air rate) x (return air
temperature)] / supply air volume rate.
b.
Refer to the air handling unit’s schedule on the mechanical drawings for the air
handlers’ minimum outside air rate.
15995 - 7/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
c.
K.
L.
M.
N.
ACE, Inc.
MR
The supply air volume rate equals the summation of the VAV air volume rates for
each air handling system during actual system operation.
2.
The outside air damper position shall compensate for modulating supply air system
volumes between minimum and maximum operating points. The temperature control
contractor shall establish the positions with the TAB contractor during the balancing
phases through the use of a mixed air calculation to establish the minimum outside air
setting between maximum and minimum supply air volume flow rates. The temperature
control contractor shall report the settings to the engineer and shall display the settings
on the project’s BMS respective air handling unit graphics.
3.
If the outdoor air temperature is equal to the return air temperature, the outside air
damper position shall be maintained at the last position established when the two
temperatures were not equal.
4.
The outdoor air damper shall be closed in unoccupied times, in warm up periods and cool
down periods, unless outdoor air is required per the cooling sequence of operations to
cool down or maintain the setback temperature.
FILTER STATUS
1.
A Differential Pressure Switch shall be installed across the filter bank to monitor
differential pressure across the filters and shall alarm the DDC system when filters are
dirty.
SAFETIES:
1.
All of the safety devices are manual reset; the device that has tripped must be manually
reset before restarting the air handling unit.
2.
If a low limit temperature sensor senses a temperature below the established low-limit set
point (32 F, adjustable) the supply fan and return fan shall be shutdown. The low limit
freeze stat shall be located immediately downstream of the heating coil.
3.
On an indication of a smoke detector (installed by the Electrical Contractor) served by
this unit, the supply fan and return fan shall stop and the outdoor air damper shall close.
4.
A low static pressure switch located prior to the return fan senses a suction pressure that
is greater than set point, the supply fan and return fan shall be shutdown.
5.
If a high static pressure switch located after the supply fan senses a discharge pressure
that is greater than set point, the supply fan and return fan shall be shutdown.
SHUTDOWN:
1.
When the unit is shut-down by either a stop command or system safety the unit shall be
set as follows:
a.
Supply and Return fan shall be off and VFD shall be commanded to 0%
b.
Outside air damper shall close
c.
Return air damper shall open
d.
Exhaust air damper shall close
e.
Preheat valve shall remain in control
f.
Cooling control valve shall close
MORNING WARMUP MODE:
1.
A warm-up mode shall be initiated by an optimal start program to ensure the space
temperature is brought up to set-point by the occupied time if all the following conditions
exist:
a.
The outside air temperature is below 45 F.
b.
The coldest space temperature is more than 2 F below the occupied set-point.
2.
During the warm-up mode, the supply fan and return fan shall run continuously, the
outside air and exhaust dampers shall be closed, the chilled water valve shall be closed,
and the heating valve shall modulate to maintain the maximum discharge air temperature
but no greater than 100 F. The warm-up mode shall be terminated when one of the
following conditions exists:
a.
The occupied time is reached.
b.
The coldest space temperature reaches the occupied set-point.
c.
The warmest zone is at least 2 F above set-point.
15995 - 8/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
3.
Morning warm-up cannot start prior to 5:00 am (MST), adjustable.
NIGHT SETBACK/NIGHT SETUP:
1.
When in the scheduled “unoccupied” mode, the outside air and exhaust dampers shall be
closed, and the return air damper shall be opened. The unit shall cycle as necessary to
maintain the night setback zone temperature at set point. A timed cycle differential shall
prevent the unit from cycling excessively.
2.
The hot water valve shall be a position to allow continuous flow through the heating coil
when the air handling unit is cycled off. When the unit is cycled on the valve shall
modulate to maintain a discharge air temperature of 100 F (adjustable).
3.
If the outdoor air temperature is below zero degree (0) Fahrenheit (adjustable), the
supply fan shall be enabled and shall run at minimum speed (allowed by the VFD) to
allow general circulation of building air.
4.
Occupancy override switches (integral to the space sensors) shall be located in the
space at location(s) designated by the School District to temporarily activate the air
handling system into an “occupied” sequence. The temporary occupied sequence will
operate for a three (3) hour period (adjustable).
MONITOR AND DISPLAY:
1.
At a minimum, the following shall be monitored and displayed on the system graphics:
a.
Supply fan status and speed.
b.
Return fan status and speed.
c.
Damper positions.
d.
Hydronic coil valve position.
e.
Supply Air Volume (based on a continuous volume summation of the VAV boxes).
f.
Outdoor Air (OAT), Return Air (RAT), Mixed Air (MAT), and Discharge Air (DAT)
temperatures.
g.
Heating – Cooling Strength Schedule
h.
Outdoor Air Volume Rate.
i.
Outside Air Damper Position at the minimum Supply Air Volume Rate and
minimum required Outside Air Rate.
j.
Outside Air Damper Position at the maximum Supply Air Volume Rate and
minimum required Outside Air Rate.
k.
Outdoor Air Damper control status: MAT or DAT (economizer mode) controlled.
l.
Differential Pressure across the filter bank.
m.
System Static Pressure operating set-point and operating value.
n.
Building Area Static Pressure Set-Point and actual value.
o.
VAV Damper Position Schedule
p.
Low static and high static pressure safeties: set-points, operating values, and
state.
q.
All system set-points.
O.
P.
1.8
A.
B.
VAV BOX WITH HOT WATER REHEAT
OCCUPIED MODE: When the zone temperature is between the occupied heating and cooling
set-points (inside of the bias), the primary air damper shall be at the scheduled minimum CFM
and the reheat valve shall be fully closed. On a rise in zone temperature above the cooling setpoint, the primary air damper shall increase the CFM and the reheat valve shall remain fully
closed. On a drop in zone temperature below the heating set-point, the damper shall be
commanded to its scheduled minimum CFM position, and the reheat valve shall gradually open
to 100% to maintain room temperature set-point. The control valve shall operate on a PID loop
based on room temperature and set-point.
UNOCCUPIED (NIGHT SETBACK) MODE: When the air handling unit shuts down, all box
controllers are indexed to unoccupied mode. When the zone temperature is between the
unoccupied heating and cooling set-points (inside of the bias), the primary air damper shall be
at the scheduled minimum CFM, and the reheat valve shall be fully closed. On a rise in zone
temperature above the unoccupied cooling set-point, the air handling unit shall be activated
ACE, Inc.
MR
15995 - 9/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
(unoccupied mode of operation), and the VAV air damper shall increase the CFM (if available),
and the reheat valve shall remain fully closed. On a drop in zone temperature below the
unoccupied heating set-point, the air handling unit shall be activated (unoccupied mode of
operation), and the VAV damper shall be commanded to its scheduled minimum CFM position,
and the reheat valve shall gradually open to 100% to maintain room temperature set-point. The
control valve shall operate on a PID loop based on room temperature and set-point.
Kindergarten VAV Heating Control: VAVs 305, 306, 307, 309, and 312
1.
When the VAV’s respective room is in a heating mode, the primary air damper shall be at
its scheduled minimum CFM value, and the discharge air temperature shall be
maintained at the room’s space heating set-point.
2.
Refer to the Kindergarten In-floor Radiant Heating System sequence of controls in the
latter part of this specification.
CO2 Control: VAVs 202 (Music 165), 214 (Conference 112), 301 (Commons 162), and 303
(Media Center 133)
1.
If heating and cooling set-points are satisfied (in the dead band range) and the CO2
value for the space is below set-point than:
a.
The VAV flow rate shall be reduced to the following air flow values:
1)
VAV-202: 730 cfm.
2)
VAV-214: 340 cfm
3)
VAV-301: 1,200 cfm
4)
VAV-303: 900 cfm
b.
CO2 Set-Point: 1,000 ppm.
c.
Provide an indoor CO2 sensor where shown on the plans.
d.
Mount the CO2 sensor per the manufacturer’s instructions.
C.
D.
E.
1.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Monitor and Display
1.
VAV air flow value
2.
VAV air flow set-points (minimum, heating, and cooling, and CO2 where applicable).
3.
Damper position.
4.
Reheat valve position.
5.
Inlet air temperature (from the respective AHU’s discharge air temperature).
6.
Discharge air temperature.
7.
Zone Temperature.
8.
Zone Temperature Set-point (occupied and unoccupied).
9.
Where applicable for associated VAV: CO2 Set-Point and Reading.
BOILER PLANT
Boilers are 40% of the calculated maximum facility building load.
In general, the boilers are to control via their on-board controller. Boiler firing rate, lead/lag, and
cascading features shall be controlled by the boilers’ controller. The BMS system shall enable
boilers and provide the heating hot water supply temperature set-point(s).
DDC system shall control the primary and secondary hot water supply temperature to 150 F.
Boilers shall be started after proof of flow with the system flow switch, and enable the boiler.
The boiler shall be provided with a boiler pump relay to start the associated primary boiler pump
(HWPP-1, HWPP-2). The boiler pump relay packaged with the boiler shall be utilized as it
interfaces with the boiler controls and safeties.
The boilers shall operate in a lead/lag alternating manner. The lead boiler shall run for 336
hours (adjustable) before alternating with the lag boilers. On a loss of operation of the lead
boiler, one of the lag boilers shall start immediately and an alarm shall be generated to the
BMS.
Boiler Plant Shutdown:
1.
The boiler plant shall be disabled based on the facility’s system heating demand and the
outdoor air temperature value.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15995 - 10/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
2.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
ACE, Inc.
MR
If the outdoor air temperature is between the 60 and 70 deg F, and the facility’s average
heating demand is less than 5% (value to be established in collaboration with the CAX)
from the heating zones, then the boiler plant shall be disabled.
3.
Boilers to be disabled if the outdoor air temperature is above 70 deg F (adjustable).
4.
Boilers to be enabled if the outdoor air temperature is below 60 deg F (adjustable).
Boilers shall be staged in a cascading sequence to maintain the building heating hot water
supply temperature set-point and to optimize the boiler efficiency.
Boilers shall operate on a primary outdoor air reset schedule with a secondary return water
reset schedule to optimize the boiler efficiency. BMS contractor shall setup the outdoor air reset
schedule and provide the set-point to the boilers.
1.
Primary Reset Schedule: Outdoor Air:
a.
If outdoor air less than or equal to 20 deg F (adjustable), then building loop hot
water supply temperature shall be 150 deg F (adjustable).
b.
If outdoor air temperature greater than or equal to 50 deg F, then building loop hot
water supply temperature shall be 110 deg F (adjustable).
2.
Secondary Reset Schedule: Return Water:
a.
If the water temperature differential between the building supply loop water
temperature and the building return loop water temperature is less than 20 deg F
(adjustable) then the present building loop hot water supply temperature set-point
shall be reduced by 5 deg F (adjustable).
3.
Note: hot water supply temperature header sensor is furnished with the boiler package.
The BMS control system shall interface with the boilers and control panels to monitor boiler fault
condition and transmit alarm to the building controller.
The secondary (building loop) hot water pumps (HWSP-1 and HWSP-2) shall be enabled by the
DDC control system when the outdoor air temperature is less than 65 F (adjustable) to run
continuously in a lead/standby alternating manner. The lead pump shall run for 336 hours
(adjustable) before alternating with the standby pump. On a loss of flow, the standby pump
shall start immediately and an alarm shall be generated to the BMS. Pumps shall be locked out
when outside temperature exceeds 65°F (adjustable).
1.
The secondary hot water pump shall vary its speed, but no less than the minimum speed
permitted by the VFD manufacture, via the respective VFD to satisfy the heating hot
water system’s differential pressure as sensed by a pressure transducer station mounted
in the hydraulically remote location at AHU-5.
2.
The pressure transducer station shall include, at a minimum, a differential pressure
transducer, two (2) isolation valves, and two (2) pressure gauges. Coordinate this
installation with the mechanical contractor.
Monitor and Display
1.
Boiler status.
2.
Boiler fault conditions.
3.
Status each boiler’s primary pump, HWPP-1, HWPP-2, and HWPP-3.
4.
Status each building loop pumps (HWSP-1 and HWSP-2)
5.
Inlet and discharge pressure of each building loop pumps (HWSP-1 and HWSP-2)
6.
Temperatures of the primary (boiler loop) and secondary (building loop) heating hot water
supply and return fluids.
7.
Boiler reset parameters.
8.
Heating Hot Water Differential Pressure set-point and operating value.
9.
All system set-points.
10. System overrides.
Alarms
1.
Boiler failure.
2.
Pump failure.
3.
Primary or secondary supply loop temperatures below 100 F (adjustable).
15995 - 11/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
1.10
CHILLER PLANT CONTROL
A.
Chilled Water System
1.
Chilled Water Primary Pump (CWPP-1): When the outdoor air temperature is above 55 F
(adjustable) and there is a call for a chilled water valve to open at a respective air
handling unit, the primary chilled water pump shall be activated.
2.
Chiller: When the chiller flow switch has proven flow, the chiller shall activate and
operate via the chiller’s packaged controls to maintain the supply water temperature setpoint which is based on an outdoor air temperature reset schedule.
3.
The chiller shall receive a 4-20mA signal from the BMS to reset the chilled water
temperature based on a linear outdoor air reset schedule.
4.
If the outdoor air temperature is less than or equal to 72 F, then the chilled water primary
loop supply temperature shall be 55 F (adjustable).
5.
If the outdoor air temperature is equal to or greater than 86 F, then the chilled water
primary loop supply temperature shall be 45 F (adjustable).
B.
Chilled Water Secondary Pump (CWSP-2):
1.
The secondary chilled water pump shall be energized upon activation of the primary
chilled water pump and the chiller.
2.
The secondary chilled water pump shall vary its speed, but no less than the minimum
speed permitted by the VFD manufacture, via the respective VFD to satisfy the
secondary chilled water system’s differential pressure as sensed by a pressure
transducer station mounted in the hydraulically remote location at AHU-5.
3.
The pressure transducer station shall include, at a minimum, a differential pressure
transducer, two (2) isolation valves, and two (2) pressure gauges. Coordinate this
installation with the mechanical contractor.
C.
Monitor and Display
1.
Chilled Water Differential Pressure set-point and operating value.
2.
Status and speed of Secondary Pump (CWSP-2).
3.
Inlet and discharge pressure of each pump.
4.
Supply and Return temperatures of the chiller loop and building loop fluids.
5.
System overrides.
6.
Chilled Water Reset Temperature Set-Point.
7.
Chiller Status.
8.
Active Capacity limit.
9.
Evaporator Refrigerant Pressure.
10. Evaporator Saturated Refrigerant Temperature.
11. Compressor Suction Line Temperature.
12. Condenser Refrigerant Pressure.
13. Alarm status.
D.
Alarms
1.
Pump failure.
2.
Chiller failure.
3.
Chiller faults as presented by the chiller’s packaged controls
1.11
A.
B.
EXHAUST FAN CONTROLS
Note: Independent control relays and current sensors shall be furnished and installed for each
exhaust fan listed below except for EF-14.
Monitor and Display, unless otherwise noted or enhanced below:
1.
Operating Status.
2.
If the exhaust fans’ status does not match the commanded value, an alarm shall be sent
to the BMS.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15995 - 12/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
C.
Exhaust Fan EF-1: Shall be interlocked with the dishwasher. Electrical interface to be made by
the electrical contractor.
Exhaust Fan EF-2: Shall be operated by an independent electrical switch on the respective
hood. Electrical interface to be made by the electrical contractor.
Exhaust Fan EF-3, 4, 5, & 6: Independent BMS Schedule to operate with respective AHU
operating schedule.
Exhaust Fan EF-7, 8, 9, 10, and 11: Shall be operated by the respective room’s electrical timer
switch. Timer switch and electrical interface to be furnished and made by the electrical
contractor.
EF-12: Shall be operated by a digital space temperature sensor.
1.
Monitor and Display
a.
Exhaust Fan Status
b.
Exhaust Fan Alarm
c.
Space Temperature
EF-13: Shall be operated by a digital space temperature sensor.
1.
Monitor and Display
a.
Exhaust Fan Status
b.
Exhaust Fan Alarm
c.
Space Temperature
Exhaust Fan EF-14: Shall be operated by the fan’s electrical switch. Electrical interface to be
made by the electrical contractor.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.12
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.13
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.14
A.
CABINET UNIT HEATERS & UNIT HEATERS
Note: Independent control relays and temperature sensors shall be furnished and installed for
each cabinet unit heater.
Occupied Mode: Fan shall cycle on based on a call from the space sensor to satisfy the
occupied space temperature set-point. Note: no control valve required. Coil is running “wild”.
Unoccupied Mode: Fan shall cycle on based on a call from a space sensor to satisfy the
unoccupied (night setback) space temperature set-point. Note: no control valve required. Coil is
running “wild”.
Monitor and Display:
1.
Supply Fan status
2.
Space Temperature
3.
All system set-points
KINDERGARTEN INFLOOR RADIANT HEATING SYSTEM
On a call for room heating, as sensed and commanded by the respective room’s space
temperature sensor, the BMS shall energize the respective radiant heat system pump (RHP-#).
The thermostatic mixing valve, as shown in the mechanical drawings, shall be set to maintain a
supply water temperature of 100 F (adjustable) to the radiant slab supply manifold.
Upon satisfying the heating set-point, the radiant heat system pump shall be deactivated.
A radiant heat slab sensor, furnished and installed by the temperature control contractor, shall
monitor the slab temperature.
Monitor and Display:
1.
Room Temperature.
2.
Pump Status.
3.
Supply Water Temperature to the radiant slab supply manifold.
4.
Slab Temperature
SNOW MELT RADIANT HEATING SYSTEM (BSP 1 thru 4, and SMP 1 thru 4)
AUTO-MODE: Slab Temperature/Water Detection.
1.
The facility’s main entrance (outside of Vestibule 100) snow melt system is the Master
System – refer to Drawing M-122). The other entrance snow melt systems are “Slaves”
to the Master System and will operate based on the Master System’s operation.
ACE, Inc.
MR
15995 - 13/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 15995
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
2.
Based on the outdoor air temperature, as sensed by a dedicated outdoor air sensor, and
the slab temperature and moisture content, as sensed by the dedicated snow/ice sensor
located in the entrance slab (refer to the mechanical hydronic plan M-122), rising above
the established moisture content set-point (sensitivity adjustable), the BMS shall energize
all snow melt area building (BSP-#) and snow melt (SMP-#) circulating pumps.
3.
While energized, the BMS shall maintain a constant circulation through the slab and cycle
the pumps to the heat exchanger in order to maintain the slab temperature set-point
(adjustable).
a.
Once energized, the snow melt system shall remain active for a minimum duration
of one (1) hour (adjustable), or until the outdoor air temperature rises above setpoint or there is no moisture detected.
4.
Safety:
a.
A freeze protection aquastat shall be installed on all snow melt pump supply water
lines near their respective heat exchanger. If the temperature in the supply line is
sensed below 30 deg F (adjustable) then the respective snow melt pump shall be
activated and run continuously.
Monitor and Display:
1.
Outdoor Air Temperature.
2.
Status of all pumps (BMP-# and SMP-#).
3.
Main Entrance Slab Temperature.
4.
Snow Melt Supply and Return Water Temperatures at each snow melt system.
B.
1.15
A.
B.
1.16
A.
B.
C.
DOMESTIC HOT WATER SYSTEM
The BMS shall monitor the domestic hot water temperatures and store the temperature data in
a history file. When the domestic hot water temperature is beyond the normal temperature
operating parameters, an alarm shall be sent to the BMS.
The domestic hot-water recirculating pump shall be scheduled “On” during occupied periods,
and scheduled “Off” during unoccupied periods.
NETWORK ROOM COOLING SYSTEM (CRU-1)
The system shall operate using its packaged control components. Temperature Control
Contractor shall install independent sensors to monitor space temperature and space humidity.
Monitor and Display
1.
Room Temperature
2.
Room Relative Humidity
3.
CRU-1 and CU-2 status
Alarms
1.
High Room Temperature
END OF SECTION 15995
ACE, Inc.
MR
15995 - 14/14
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
The electrical requirements are supplemental to the General and Supplementary Conditions
and the General Requirements of these Specifications. The Electrical Sections shall apply to
phases of the work specified, shown on the Drawings, or required to provide for the complete
installation of Electrical Systems for this project.
The work shall include all items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned or
scheduled in these specifications and the accompanying drawings. All material, equipment and
labor shall be furnished together with all incidental items required by good practice to provide
the complete systems described.
Examine and refer to all Architectural, Structural, Utility, Landscape and Mechanical drawings
and specifications for construction conditions which may affect the electrical work. Inspect the
building site and existing facilities for verification of present conditions. Make proper provisions
for these conditions in performance of the work and cost thereof.
See general requirements for listed Alternate Bids. Note alternates listed and include any
changes in work and price required to meet the requirements of the respective alternate.
CODES AND STANDARDS
Work shall meet the requirements of the plans and specifications and shall not be less than the
minimum requirements of applicable sections of the latest Codes and Standards of the following
organizations:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
3.
Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM)
4.
Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL)
5.
Independent Testing Laboratories (ITL)
6.
International Building Code (IBC)
7.
National Electrical Code (NEC) Latest Edition
8.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
9.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
10. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA)
11. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
12. Rules and Regulations of the State Fire Marshal
13. Requirements of the Serving Utility Company
14. Local and State Codes and Ordinances
FEES AND PERMITS
The electrical contractor shall pay all fees and arrange for all permits required for work done
under his contract and under his supervision by subcontract.
Cost of primary work noted to be by Utility Company not to be included in Contractor's Bid. All
charges made by the Utility Company for their part of the primary work will be billed directly to
the Owner and paid for by the Owner.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Manufacturer's trade names and catalog numbers listed are intended to indicate the quality of
equipment or materials desired. Manufacturers not listed must have prior approval. Written prior
approval must be obtained from the Architect/Engineer ten (10) business days prior to bid
opening. Requests are to be submitted sufficiently ahead of the deadline to give ample time for
examination. The items approved will be listed in an addendum and only this list of equipment
16000 - 1/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
JK
will be accepted in lieu of specified products. Submittals must indicate the specific item or items
to be furnished in lieu of those specified, together with complete technical and comparative data
on specified items and proposed items.
Electrical equipment shall be installed with manufacturer’s standard finish and color except
where specific color, finish or choice is indicated. If the manufacturer has no standard finish,
equipment shall have a prime coat and two finish coats of gray enamel.
The electrical contractor shall be responsible for materials and equipment installed under this
contract. Contractor shall also be responsible for the protection of materials and equipment of
others from damage as a result of his work.
Manufactured material and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used,
cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer unless herein specified to the
contrary.
The electrical contractor shall make the required arrangement with General Contractor for the
introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings.
Materials and equipment shall be stored indoors at the job site or, if this is not possible, stored
on raised platforms and protected from the weather by means of waterproof covers. Coverings
shall permit circulation of air around the materials to prevent condensation of moisture. Screen
or cap openings in equipment to prevent the entry of vermin.
Lighting fixtures proposed as substitutes to those specified must have prior approval by
Architect/Engineer as noted above. Approval will not be considered unless the request has all of
the following information:
1.
Manufacturers data showing catalog number.
2.
Construction details.
3.
Photometrics.
4.
Recommended maintenance factor.
INTENT OF DRAWINGS
The drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not necessarily show exact location of conduit
unless specifically dimensioned. Riser and other diagrams are schematic and do not
necessarily show the physical arrangement of the equipment. They shall not be used for
obtaining quantities or lineal runs of conduit. Discrepancies shown on different plans, or
between plans and actual field conditions shall be brought to the attention of the
Architect/Engineer for resolution.
RESPONSIBILITY
The electrical contractor shall be responsible for the installation of satisfactory and complete
systems in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications and shall provide, at
no extra cost, all incidental items required for completion of the work even though they are not
specifically mentioned or indicated on the drawings or in the specifications.
The drawings do not attempt to show complete details of the building construction which affect
the electrical installation; and reference is therefore required to the Architectural, Structural,
Landscape and Mechanical drawings and specifications and to shop drawings of all trades for
additional details which affect the installation of the work covered under this Division of the
Contract.
Location of electrical system components shall be checked for conflicts with openings, structural
members and components of other systems having fixed locations. In the event of any conflicts,
the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted and his decision shall govern. Necessary changes
shall be made at no additional expense to the Architect/Engineer or Owner.
The electrical contractor shall determine, and be responsible for, the proper location and
character of inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves and other openings in the construction
required for the work, and obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress
so work will not be delayed. Roughing-in fixtures, etc., must be laid out accurately.
16000 - 2/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Connections to equipment of the same class shall be equal heights, plumb, and at right angles
to the wall, unless otherwise directed.
Final location of inserts, hangers, etc., required for each installation, must be coordinated with
facilities required for other installations to prevent interference.
The electrical contractor shall take extreme caution not to install work that connects to
equipment until such time as complete Shop Drawings of such equipment have been approved
by the Architect/Engineer. Any work installed by the Contractor, prior to approval of Shop
Drawings, will be at the Contractor's risk.
At all times during the performance of this contract, the electrical contractor shall properly
protect work from damage and protect the Owner's property from injury of loss. The contractor
shall make good any damage, injury or loss, except such as may be directly due to errors in the
Bidding Documents or caused by Agents or Employees of the Owner. The electrical contractor
shall adequately protect adjacent property as provided by law and the Bidding Documents. The
electrical contractor shall provide and maintain passageways, guard fences, lights and other
facilities for protection required by Public Authority or Local conditions.
Circuiting and switching shall be exactly as shown on drawings. Combining of home runs is
acceptable but neutrals shall not be shared. Contractor shall refer to NEC Article 310-15 and
adjust accordingly. Combining of wiring of various systems in conduit runs is not acceptable
unless otherwise specified herein or noted on drawings.
Neutrals shall not be shared to avoid the requirement of installing handle-ties on breakers.
Contractor is responsible for providing UL-listed fire rated materials where required by
applicable codes and other sections of this specification to seal fire-rated membrane
penetrations. In particular this applies to requirements of IBC Section 712 as it pertains to:
1.
Electrical Boxes: Provide minimum 6 inch separation in non-rated walls. Provide
minimum 24 inch horizontal separation in fire rated walls. In rated walls locate boxes so
as to comply with IBC Section 712 separation and membrane penetration requirements.
Apply fire-rated putty pads (SpecSeal Series SSP Intumescent Putty Pads, or equal) to
all boxes where 24” box-to-box separation cannot be maintained or where openings
exceed allowable limits under IBC section 712.
2.
Flush-Mounted Panels (panelboards, fire alarm panels and any other flush-mounted
electrical enclosure exceeding 16 square inches of area): Coordinate with the general
contractor for gypsum board lined framing pockets where any flush-mounted panelboards
are located in 1 or 2-hour rated walls. Provide fire-rated putty pads on top and bottom of
panelboards to seal around conduits.
3.
Conduit and Cable: Apply fire seal where conduit or cables penetrate fire-rated
assemblies as required by NEC Article 300-21 and IBC section 712. Fire seal shall be
equal to International Protective Coating Corp. #FSC or #FS series or Chase Technology
Corp. #PR-855 Fire Stop.
INSPECTION
All work and material is subject to inspection at any time by the Architect/Engineer or
representative. If the Architect/Engineer or his representative finds material that does
conform with these specifications or that is not properly installed or finished, correct
deficiencies in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer at no additional expense to
Owner.
his
not
the
the
WORKMANSHIP
GENERAL
1.
Work under this contract shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular trade
conducting all work necessary to properly complete the installation in a workmanlike
manner to present a neat and finished appearance.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
16000 - 3/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.
C.
1.9
A.
1.10
A.
B.
Provide all excavating and backfilling as required, with backfilling only after approval of
the Architect. Backfill to be free of all debris and decayable matter. See Excavation and
Backfill requirements in DIVISION 1 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
CUTTING, PATCHING AND FRAMING
1.
Obtain Architect's/Engineer's approval before performing any cutting on structural
members or patching of building surfaces. Any damage to the building or equipment by
this Contractor shall be the responsibility of this Contractor and shall be repaired by
skilled craftsmen of the trades involved at no additional expense to the Owner.
2.
Chases, openings, sleeves, hangers, anchors, recesses, equipment pads, and framing
for equipment are provided by others only if so noted on the drawings. Otherwise, they
will be provided by this contractor for his work. Whether chases, etc., are provided by this
contractor or others, this contractor is responsible for correct size and locations.
COORDINATION
The electrical contractor shall plan his work to proceed with a minimum interference with other
trades and it shall be his responsibility to inform the General Contractor of all openings required
in the building structure for installation of work, and to provide sleeves as required. Dimensions
of equipment installed and/or provided by others shall be checked in order that correct
clearances and connections may be made.
CLEAN UP
The electrical contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or
rubbish caused by his work or employees.
Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps and debris relative to his work and leave
the premises, including tunnels, crawl spaces, and pipe chases in clean and orderly condition.
Remove all dirt and debris from the interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. After
construction is completed, wash all light fixtures and lamps, remove all labels from fixture
lenses.
1.11
A.
DUST PROTECTION
Contractor will provide suitable dust protection for all existing areas prior to beginning of cutting
or demolition. Contractor will obtain approval of partition from Owner before proceeding with
work involved in these rooms.
1.12
A.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
OFFICES
1.
The electrical contractor shall provide temporary offices for himself including lights, heat
and telephone, if required.
REMOVAL
1.
The electrical contractor shall completely remove his temporary installations when no
longer needed and the premises shall be completely clean, disinfected, patched, and
refinished to match adjacent areas.
LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDS
1.
The electrical contractor shall provide their own ladders, scaffolds, etc. of substantial
construction for access to their work in various portions of the building as may be
required. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the contractor.
PROTECTION DEVICES
1.
The electrical contractor shall provide and maintain his own necessary barricades,
fences, signal lights, etc. required by all governing authorities or shown on the drawings.
When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the contractor. The contractor shall
assume all responsibility for which the owner may be held responsible because of lack of
above items.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
JK
16000 - 4/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
E.
F.
1.13
A.
B.
1.14
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
TEMPORARY WATER
1.
The electrical contractor shall provide all water required by his trade for construction.
Temporary drinking water shall be provided from a proven safe source dispensed by
single service containers, until such time as the construction water outlet has been install,
disinfected and approved for drinking purposes.
TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
1.
The electrical contractor shall provide all necessary first-aid hand fire extinguishers for
Class A, B, C and special hazards as may exist in his own work area only in accordance
with good and safe practice and as required by jurisdictional safety authority. The
contractor shall provide general area fire extinguishers only.
TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL FACILITIES
ELECTRICAL POWER
1.
The electrical contractor shall provide temporary construction power to the remodel area
to support construction activities of all trades. All temporary power shall be derived from
a separate temporary construction service arranged and paid for by the contractor. No
tie-ins or connections to the Owner’s system shall be made without the Owner’s consent.
Construction power shall the following unless otherwise agreed to by the General
Contractor:
a.
One temporary panel located as directed by the General Contractor with provision
for 100A, 3-phase, 4-wire service at voltage available.
b.
Power centers for miscellaneous tools and equipment used in the construction
period, so that power can be secured at any desired point from temporary service
panel within building proper.
c.
Lighting for safe and adequate working conditions throughout the buildings,
stairways, and crawl spaces. Provide at least 1/2 watt of incandescent lighting per
square foot of floor area. Maintain a socket voltage of at least 110 volts. Use a
minimum of 100 watt bulbs.
d.
Power for construction site offices and for other temporary storage and
construction buildings.
e.
Power to maintain continuous construction during changeover of electrical
equipment.
f.
Power for testing and checking equipment.
TEMPORARY EGRESS/EXIT LIGHTING
1.
Provide and maintain the following minimum temporary egress/exit devices at all time in
construction zones:
a.
Illuminated exit lights at each construction zone exit.
b.
A minimum of two unswitched light fixtures in each construction zone.
SHOP DRAWINGS
Provide eight (8) copies of manufacturer's literature and/or certified prints as soon as possible
but within thirty (30) days after awarding of Contract, for items of materials, equipment, or
systems where called for in specifications. Shop drawings and literature complete showing item
used, size, dimensions, capacity, rough-in, etc., as required for complete check and installation.
Manufacturer’s literature showing more than one item shall be clearly marked as to which item
is being furnished or it will be rejected and returned without review.
Each copy of each item submitted must be clearly marked as follows for purposes of
identification and record. Submittals not marked (typewritten only) as described below will be
rejected and returned without review.
Date:
Name of Project:
Branch of Work:
Submitted by:
16000 - 5/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Specification or Plan Reference:
Prior to their submission, each submittal shall be thoroughly checked by the contractor for
compliance with the Contract Document requirements, accuracy of dimensions, relationship to
the work of other trades, and conformance with sound, safe practices as to erection and
installation. Each submittal shall then bear a stamp evidencing such checking and shall show
corrections made, if any. Submittals requiring extensive corrections shall be revised before
submission. Each submittal not stamped and signed by the contractor evidencing such
checking will be rejected and returned without review.
All submittals will be examined when submitted in proper form for compliance. Such review shall
not relieve the contractor of responsibility for errors, for deviation from the contract Documents,
nor for violation of sound safety practices.
The contractor shall keep in the field office one print of each submittal which has been reviewed
and stamped by the Architect or Engineer.
Submittals will be required for each item of material and equipment furnished as noted in
specifications.
All submittals shall be organized into a single binder and transmitted in one delivery.
Transmittal of individual sections is not permitted. Exceptions will be considered upon request
for exceptionally long-lead equipment or voluminous submittals that cannot reasonably fit into a
single binder.
Submittals which are incomplete relative to quality requirements, capacity, engineering data,
dimensional data or detailed list of specialty or control equipment will be rejected. Lists shall
include descriptive coding as specified or shown on drawings.
THE ENGINEER WILL PERFORM SHOP DRAWING REVIEW OF EACH ITEM,
HOWEVER, SUBSEQUENT REVIEW OF ITEMS PREVIOUSLY REJECTED WILL BE
BILLED TO THE CONTRACTOR AT A RATE OF $75 PER HOUR.
Schedule of Shop Drawings.
ITEM
MFG LIT
SHOP
DWG
WIRING
DIAG.
O&M
BOOK
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
X
WIRE AND CABLE
X
OUTLET BOXES
X
X
WIRING DEVICES
X
X
FIRE SEAL PRODUCTS
(see specifications 16130)
X
X
SUPPORTING DEVICES
X
FUSES
X
X
X
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
X
X
X
PANELBOARDS
X
X
X
MOTOR CONTROLS
X
X
X
LIGHTING FIXTURES
X
X
X
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
X
X
ACE, Inc.
JK
16000 - 6/7
X
X
X
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.15
A.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
At the time orders are placed for any item of equipment requiring service or operating
maintenance, the contractor shall request the manufacturer furnish three (3) copies of
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS for each piece of equipment. These shall
be included in the brochure of equipment.
1.16
A.
BROCHURE OF EQUIPMENT
Upon completion of work, prepare a "Brochure of Equipment" containing data pertinent to
equipment and systems on job. Binders containing materials shall be one or more three ring
binders of sufficient number to hold all literature. Contained in binders shall be: Installation,
maintenance, and operating instructions for each piece of equipment; parts lists; wiring
diagrams; one copy of each shop drawing and literature submittal; record drawings, etc.
All literature shall be clean, unused and filed under divider headings corresponding to the
specifications.
These brochures shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and approved by him before
authorization of final payment.
B.
C.
1.17
A.
"AS-BUILT" DRAWINGS
The electrical contractor shall furnish to the Owner and Architect/Engineer a red line marked
print set of drawings, each sheet stamped as the "As-Built" drawing and bearing the contractor's
name, date and signature. The As-Built drawing shall show the location of all concealed or
underground conduit runs and other equipment, devices, outlets, etc., installed other than as
shown on the drawings. Dimension underground lines from established building lines. As-Built
drawings to be developed from a job site record drawing set and shall be clean, neat and all
changes legible and shown in the same format and symbols used on the contract drawings.
The As-Built drawing set shall be submitted to the architect/engineer for approval, and any
deficiencies noted by the architect/engineer corrected and resubmitted until approved by the
architect/engineer at no cost to architect/engineer or owner.
1.18
A.
PLACING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION
At the completion of the work and at such time as the Owner shall direct, prior to final
acceptance, the electrical contractor performing this work shall put into satisfactory operation
the various systems installed under the specifications. At no additional cost to the Owner,
furnish the services of a person completely familiar with the installations performed under this
specification, to instruct the Owners operating personnel in the proper operation and servicing
of the equipment and systems. These services shall be available for a period of no less than
one (1) day.
Upon placing systems in operation the contractor shall measure phase currents at each main
and branch panel within the facility, including existing panels, and balance the phase currents to
within 20% of each other by moving circuit breakers to different phases.
B.
1.19
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
GUARANTEE-WARRANTY
The electrical contractor shall and hereby does warrant and guarantee that all work executed
under this Division will be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of one
year from the date of final acceptance of this work and that he will, at his own expense, repair
and/or replace all such defective materials and work and all other work damaged thereby which
becomes defective during the term of warranty, except that lamps and tubes shall be his
responsibility only for normal lamp life or one year, whichever occurs first.
END OF SECTION 16000
16000 - 7/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16075
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.
2.
Warning labels and signs.
3.
Equipment identification labels.
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with ANSI A13.1.
1.3
1.4
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation
and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145.
Use consistent designations throughout Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
JK
CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION
MATERIALS
Marker Tape: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise
indicated.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners,
with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for
mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, celluloseacetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors,
legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal
size, 10 by 14 inches.
Fasteners for Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with
nuts and flat and lock washers.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1.
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2.
Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT
OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES".
16075 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16075
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.3
A.
B.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label.
Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
APPLICATION
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor and Cable Identification: Use marker tape to identify
field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data wiring
connections.
1.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
cable pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2.
Use system of designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply
with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply metal-backed, butyrate warning signs. Identify system voltage
with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
1.
Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment
including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Power transfer switches.
b.
Controls with external control power connections.
2.
Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise
indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar
equipment in finished spaces.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay or selfadhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high
label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
b.
Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, drilled for
screw attachment.
c.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and legend to those appropriate
for viewing from the floor.
d.
All labels to include equipment tag (e.g. HWP-1), equipment description (e.g. HOT
WATER PUMP 1), voltage and phase (e.g. 208V 3-Ø), and panel and circuit
number of source (e.g. 1N1L-23/25/27).
e.
All labels shall be black letters on white background. Use red letters onwhite
background for any equipment fed from an emergency (generator or UPS) power
source.
2.
Equipment to Be Labeled:
a.
Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b.
Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
c.
Transformers.
d.
Motor-control centers.
16075 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16075
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Disconnect switches.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
Motor starters.
Push-button stations.
Power transfer equipment.
Contactors.
INSTALLATION
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
Attach non-adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to
the location and substrate.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed
below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors in all cases where the
insulation of the wire is not color coded.
1.
Color shall be factory applied.
2.
Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a.
Phase A: Black.
b.
Phase B: Red.
c.
Phase C: Blue.
3.
Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
a.
Phase A: Brown.
b.
Phase B: Orange.
c.
Phase C: Yellow.
END OF SECTION 16075
16075 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16120
ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2.
Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
3.
Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
2.4
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, XHHW.
Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for armored cable (Type AC), metal-clad
cable (Type MC) with ground wire.
Aluminum conductors permitted for 200 amperage and above.
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2.
Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3.
O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4.
3M; Electrical Products Division.
5.
Tyco Electronics Corp.
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
SLEEVES FOR CABLES
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
SLEEVE SEALS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
16120 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16120
ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2.
Calpico, Inc.
3.
Metraflex Co.
4.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
JK
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
Feeders: Size and material per feeder schedule on plans. All conductors copper for less than
200 amperage and Aluminum for 200 amperage and greater or as otherwise noted on plans.
Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING
METHODS
Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or type XHHW, single
conductors in raceway.
Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
Coordinate first paragraph below with Division 16 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways
for Electrical Systems."
Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN,
single conductors in raceway.
Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway
1.
Type AC or MC cable is NOT permitted to be used for wiring system .
Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainlesssteel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway or power-limited tray cable, in cable
tray.
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours where possible.
Support cables according to Division 16 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
16120 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16120
ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
G.
H.
I.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.5
A.
B.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1.
Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least EIGHT inches of slack.
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
Extend sleeves installed in floors 4 inches above finished floor level.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless
sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with
approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing
units applied in coordination with roofing work.
Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves
to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical
sleeve seals.
SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.
Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material
and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in
annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
FIRESTOPPING
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
Tests and Inspections:
16120 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16120
ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
1.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
JK
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test all service entrance, switchboard, panelboard, motor or equipment feeder conductors
larger than #6 AWG for compliance with requirements.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors
No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to
portable scanner.
a.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
b.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or
to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
c.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
Test procedures used.
2.
Test results that comply with requirements.
3.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 16120
16120 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16130
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, floor-boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for
electrical wiring.
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For boxes, surface raceways, wireways and fittings, hinged-cover enclosures,
and cabinets.
1.2
1.3
A.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
IMC: ANSI C80.6.
EMT: ANSI C80.3.
FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
1.
Not permitted for use as a low voltage raceway, such as serving tel/data rough-ins.
Fittings for Conduit (Including all types and flexible and liquid-tight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
1.
Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.
2.
Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type.
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
Nonmetallic conduit or tubing is not permitted above-grade under any circumstance in plenums
or healthcare projects unless specifically noted on plans.
ENT: NEMA TC 13.
RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC unless otherwise indicated.
LFNC: UL 1660.
Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
METAL WIREWAYS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2.
Hoffman.
3.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, 12, or 3R, unless
otherwise indicated.
16130 - 1/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16130
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C.
D.
E.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
Wireway Covers: Hinged type, screw-cover type, or flanged-and-gasketed type as necessary or
as indicated on plans.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
SURFACE RACEWAYS
Permitted only in utility spaces (mechanical or electrical rooms, crawl spaces, data closets), or
where indicated on plans or with written permission from the Architect.
Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard
enamel finish.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
b.
Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company.
c.
Wiremold Company; Electrical Sales Division.
Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with
texture and color indicated on plans.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division.
b.
Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division.
c.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.
d.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
e.
Panduit Corp.
f.
Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company.
g.
Wiremold Company; Electrical Sales Division.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. Provide 2-1/8” x 4” square boxes with
mud ring for wall-mounted boxes and 2-1/8” x 4” octagonal boxes for fixture outlets.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Not permitted unless specifically noted otherwise on
plans.
Floor Boxes:
1.
Non-Rated Floorboxes, Concrete Slabs:
a.
Floor boxes in slab-on-grade or non-rated floor assemblies shall be nonmetallic,
rectangular, of PVC construction, suited for concrete floors. Design shall allow
ganging of boxes up to three gang. Boxes shall be equal to Carlon E976RFB,
ganged as shown on plans. Provide an activation kit for each gang.
b.
Box covers shall be brass, ganged as required for boxes, with separate access
doors for device and cable exit and shall allow for complete concealment of the
cord plug within the floor box.
2.
Non-Rated Floorboxes, Wooden Floors:
a.
Floor boxes in wooden floors shall be steel, rectangular, designed for wooden
floors. Boxes shall be Wiremold 880 series, ganged as shown on plans.
b.
Box covers shall be brass, ganged as required for boxes. Provide bronze cover
suitable for specified devices. Coordinate requirements with tel/data contractor for
data cover requirements.
3.
Fire-Rated Floor Boxes:
a.
Boxes in fire-rated floor assemblies shall be flush, fire-rated poke-through style, UL
listed for floors with a 1-4 hour rating, Hubbell PT4XBRS2C or equal. Covers shall
16130 - 2/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16130
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
E.
F.
G.
be brass with four 15-amp receptacles. Provide four Hubbell PTX4XCAT5 RJ-45
jacks.
b.
Where shown on plans, provide flush, fire-rated poke-through style with threeservice furniture feed service fitting, Hubbell PT73SD-FRF3GY or equal. Provide
flex connections and power wiring from floorbox to modular furniture connection for
power. Provide flex connection from floorbox to modular furniture connection for
data cabling. Provide data cabling, jacks and terminations if required by other
specification sections.
4.
In slab-on-grade construction provide a dedicated 1” conduit from an accessible ceiling
space to each floorbox intended for tel/data use. This is in addition to the power conduit
required.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch,
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Provide backplate.
2.
Nonmetallic Enclosures: Not permitted unless noted on plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
JK
RACEWAY APPLICATION
Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Exposed Conduit: EMT or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, as identified on plans.
2.
Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, as identified on
plans.
3.
Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 PVC, direct buried.
4.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC or LFNC.
5.
Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R unless noted otherwise on
plans.
Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2.
Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: IMC. Includes raceways in the
following locations:
a.
Loading docks.
b.
Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
3.
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT (see also specification
16120 for permitted uses of AC and MC cable).
4.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
5.
Damp or Wet Locations: EMT.
6.
Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT.
7.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic
in damp or wet locations. See plans for specific enclosure or box specifications.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. ½-inch is acceptable only where specifically
noted on plans or other specifications.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
16130 - 3/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16130
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
ACE, Inc.
JK
INSTALLATION
Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support.
2.
Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
3.
Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising
above the floor.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
Install pull wires in ALL empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with
not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 24 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows:
1.
3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.
2.
1-Inch (25-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet .
3.
Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway
unless drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes
or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these
requirements.
Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings at the following points:
1.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located
where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C), and that has
straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.
1.
Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and
quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:
a.
Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)
temperature change.
b.
Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature
change.
c.
Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125
deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.
d.
Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.
2.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the
time of installation.
16130 - 4/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16130
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
3.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit or pre-wired
fixture whips for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration,
noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1.
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2.
Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall.
Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. Provide a dedicated 1” conduit from
an accessible ceiling space to each floorbox intended for tel/data use. This is in addition to the
power conduit required.
Support all wall-mounted boxes with B-Line BB8 (or equal) mounting brackets or BB4 (or equal)
box support brackets. Do not use materials not specifically intended for the purpose such as
scrap EMT and ty-wraps.
Mark all junction boxes with panel and circuit numbers. Mark boxes of emergency systems as
required by NEC 700.9. Use indelible ink.
Do not install boxes back to back in walls, Provide minimum 6 inch separation in non-rated
walls. Provide minimum 24 inch horizontal separation in fire rated walls. In rated walls locate
boxes so as to comply with IBC Section 712 separation and membrane penetration
requirements. Apply fire-rated putty pads (SpecSeal Series SSP Intumescent Putty Pads, or
equal) to all boxes where 24” box-to-box separation cannot be maintained or where openings
exceed allowable limits under IBC section 712.
Wherever receptacles are shown adjacent to tel/data, video or other low voltage locations,
install boxes side-by-side with a consistent distance separating the boxes of no more than 3”
between adjacent faceplates. Provide or coordinate additional framing as required.
Set non-metallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
Provide a dedicated 1” conduit from an accessible ceiling space to each floorbox intended for
tel/data use. This is in addition to the power conduit required.
Coordinate all device locations with architectural elevations and other plans before rough-in.
Adjust device locations to accommodate casework elevations or knee-space locations or any
other architectural or other trade obstruction. Contact the architect or engineer if any conflicts
are present that cannot be resolved without substantially changing the layout of devices. The
contractor shall be responsible to relocate any devices that are improperly coordinated.
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
Direct-Buried Conduit:
1.
Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in earlier Division Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches
in nominal diameter.
2.
Install backfill as specified in earlier Division Section "Earth Moving."
3.
After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches
of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling
with normal compaction as specified in earlier Division Section "Earth Moving."
4.
Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout the length of the elbow.
5.
Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through the floor.
a.
Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and
encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
16130 - 5/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16130
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
b.
6.
3.4
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel
conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or
foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
Warning Planks: Bury warning planks or tape approximately 12 inches above directburied conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the
centerline of conduit.
FIRESTOPPING
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements
are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
END OF SECTION 16130
16130 - 6/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16139
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
SUMMARY
This Section includes steel and aluminum cable trays and accessories.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include manufacturer’s data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of
cable tray indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Chalfant Manufacturing Company.
2.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
3.
Cope, T. J., Inc.; a subsidiary of Allied Tube & Conduit.
4.
GS Metals Corp.; GLOBETRAY Products.
5.
MONO-SYSTEMS, Inc.
6.
MPHusky.
7.
PW Industries.
MATERIALS AND FINISHES
Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel, complying with ASTM-A641.
1.
Pre-Galvanized Wire Basket Tray.
Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel.
Sizes and Configurations: Refer to the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings or plan notes for
specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations.
1.
Center-hanger supports may be used only when specifically indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
JK
INSTALLATION
Comply with recommendations in NEMA VE 2. Install as a complete system, including all
necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate support systems, barrier strips, hinged
horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses.
Install tray, whenever possible, below other ceiling installations such as pipes, ducts, etc. Install
to allow access to valve handles, duct controls and other installations requiring regular
maintenance.
Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.
Fasten cable tray supports to building structure.
1.
Design each fastener and support to carry load.
2.
Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules.
16139 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16139
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
3.2
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances
furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form
as required by application.
4.
Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
5.
Manufacture center-hung support, designed for 60 percent versus 40 percent eccentric
loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.
Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray and to equipment.
Support cable tray independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable tray on equipment
enclosure.
Install expansion connectors where cable tray crosses building expansion joint and in cable tray
runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA FG 1. Space connectors and set gaps
according to applicable standard.
Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.
Make cable tray connections using standard fittings.
Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping." Use firestop pillows wherever possible to facilitate easy installation of cables in
the future.
Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed
cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.
Workspace: Install cable trays with enough space to permit access for installing cables.
Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and
data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.
After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on or near
cable trays.
Install cables only when cable tray installation has been completed and inspected.
Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties as recommended by
NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable
jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.
On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 18 inches. Install intermediate supports when cable
weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.
In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable tray.
Install covers, where specified, after installation of cable is completed.
Ground cable trays according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor with cable tray, in addition to those required
by NFPA 70.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for
compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey:
1.
Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in
cable tray, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause
or have caused damage.
2.
Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable tray do not exceed that
permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communication or data-processing circuits are
separated from power circuits by barriers.
3.
Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that
could damage cables.
4.
Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of tray ventilation.
5.
Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical
continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and
retorque in suspect areas.
6.
Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with
specified hardware.
16139 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16139
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
7.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that
all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray.
END OF SECTION 16139
16139 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
WORK INCLUDED
Wall Switches.
Receptacles.
Device Plates and Box Covers.
Dimmers.
Occupancy Sensors
A.
B.
C.
RELATED WORK
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables
Raceway & Boxes for Electrical Systems
Interior Lighting
A.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
All devices shall be UL listed.
A.
B.
SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS
Submit product data as required.
Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturers instructions.
1.2
1.3
1.4
16120
16130
16500
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
General Electric
Lithonia
COLORS
All devices and cover plate colors shall be SELECTED BY ARCHITECT except as noted under
DEVICE PLATES AND BOX COVERS.
WALL SWITCHES
In all finished spaces:
1.
Specification Grade AC Toggle Switch, 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, clamp type, screw terminal,
side or back wired:
a.
Single Pole, 20 ampere
Hubbell CS1221I
b.
Double Pole, 20 ampere
Hubbell CS1222I
c.
Three-way, 20 ampere
Hubbell CS1223I
d.
Four-way, 20 ampere
Hubbell CS1224I
In mechanical/electrical equipment rooms, maintenance areas, janitor rooms, crawl spaces and
other high abuse areas ONLY:
1.
Specification Grade AC Toggle Switch, 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, clamp type, screw terminal,
side or back wired:
a.
Single Pole, 20 ampere
Hubbell CS1221I
b.
Double Pole, 20 ampere
Hubbell CS1222I
c.
Three-way, 20 ampere
Hubbell CS1223I
16140 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
d.
Four-way, 20 ampere
Where shown on plans:
1.
Pilot Light Switch, 20 ampere, light on with load on:
a.
SPST, 20 ampere, 120V, w/ pilot light
2.
Fused Switches:
a.
Box cover units with switch and plug fuse holder
Provide fuse sized for load
3.
Keyed Switches:
a.
Lock-Type, chrome lock dome
Provide FOUR keys to Owner
C.
2.4
B.
A.
Hubbell HBL1221 PL
Bussman SSU, SSW, SSY
Leviton 1221-2KL
DIMMERS
Fluorescent: Leviton Mural L/S (Level Set) Decora Style 450-watt Preset Digital Dimmer for use
with Advance Mark X dimming ballasts. Provide Leviton PE200-10W power extender if noted on
plans. Install all power extenders in concealed location.
All dimmers shall be of same manufacturer and style and shall be identical in appearance and
function regardless of load type being dimmed.
A.
2.5
Hubbell CS1224I
RECEPTACLES
In all finished spaces:
1.
Extra Heavy Duty Specification Grade, 20 ampere, 120 volt, clamp type, screw terminal, side
or back wired.
a.
Duplex, 20 ampere, 125V (NEMA 5-20R) Leviton BR20 Series
b.
Duplex, ground fault interrupter, 20 ampere, (NEMA 5-20R)
Leviton
7899
Series
c.
Isolated Ground Receptacle, 20 ampere, (NEMA 5-20R) Leviton 5362IG Series
d.
Duplex, Tamper Resistant, 20 ampere, (NEMA 5-20R)
Leviton TBR20
e.
Duplex, ground fault interrupter, tamper resistant, (NEMA 5-20R) Leviton T7899
REFER TO THE DRAWINGS FOR OTHER OUTLETS REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.8
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
Television Outlet
Leviton 80781 Series
DEVICE PLATES AND BOX COVERS
In all rooms with finished, painted gypboard walls:
1.
Smooth High Impact Nylon
Hubbell P Series
Smooth High Impact Nylon, Style Line
Hubbell HPS Series
Recept Plate, weatherproof “while in-use”
Hubbell No. WP Series
Note special plates specified herein or on the drawing. Substitute materials must have sample
submitted for approval.
Device plates for thirty ampere and larger outlets shall be No. 302 /No. 430 stainless steel and
suitable for the wiring device used.
All plates in mechanical/electrical equipment rooms, maintenance areas, janitor rooms, crawl spaces
and other high abuse areas shall be as follows:
1.
Where devices are surface-mounted and conduit is exposed use ½” deep galvanized box
covers, Steel City RS Series, or equal.
2.
Where devices are flush use anodized aluminum plates, Hubbell A Series, or equal.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
Ceiling Mounted
1.
Combination ultrasonic and passive infrared motion detector, ceiling-mounted, self-adjusting,
available with coverage of 500, 1000 and 2000 sq-ft. Select appropriate coverage for room
served. Provide power packs as required. Sensor Switch Series or equal, see plans for
model numbers.
16140 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
B.
C.
Wall-Mounted
1.
Infrared occupancy sensor, self –adjusting, 180 degree field of view, 2100 square feet of
coverage. Select appropriate wattage rating for load served. Sensor Switch Series or equal,
see plans for model numbers.
2.
Where indicated on plans provide Sensor Switch series, or equal, with automatic switching
for two separate lighting loads.
Installation
1.
Set all occupancy sensors to maximum delay (typically 30 minutes or as noted on plans).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Furnish and install wiring devices as shown on the contract drawings and as specified herein.
Install wiring devices plumb with walls so that device plates are tight to finish surfaces.
Device plates in finished areas and on painted walls shall be smooth high-impact nylon.
Device plates in mechanical and electrical rooms, mounted on exposed boxes shall be galvanized
steel.
Dimmers shall not be ganged, unless otherwise noted on the plans. Install with a minimum of 6
inches between dimmers. Do not remove cooling fins.
Run equipment grounding wire from isolated receptacle ground terminal to main service panel
ground. Isolate this conductor from all other interim grounding points.
Wiring devices shall be minimum 20 ampere in all areas, unless noted otherwise herein or on the
contract drawings.
GFCI receptacles shall not be utilized for feed thru function to protect downstream devices. Each
GFCI device as shown on plan shall dedicated to server location where shown only.
DEVICE HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS
Mount wiring devices at heights above finished floor as noted below or as shown on the contract
drawings:
1.
Convenience Receptacles
18 inches to center
2.
Switches/Dimmers
44 inches to center
3.
Telephone/Data/TV
18 inches to center
4.
Telephone (wall-mounted)
44 inches to center
5.
Fire Alarm Notification Appliances
Top of appliance 6” below ceiling or 80” above floor,
whichever is lower
6.
Fire Alarm Pull Stations
44 inches to center
7.
Thermostats
48 inches to center
8.
Clocks
As noted on drawings
Coordinate all device locations with architectural elevations and other plans before rough-in. Adjust
device locations to accommodate casework elevations or knee-space locations or any other
architectural or other trade obstruction. Contact the architect or engineer if any conflicts are present
that cannot be resolved without substantially changing the layout of devices. The contractor shall be
responsible to relocate any devices that are improperly coordinated.
Wherever receptacles are shown adjacent to tel/data, video or other low voltage locations, even if on
separate plans, install boxes side-by-side with a consistent distance separating the boxes of no
more than 3” between adjacent faceplates. Provide or coordinate additional framing as required.
END OF SECTION 16140
16140 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16190
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
SUMMARY
Section includes:
1.
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Provide supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
Provide equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
imposed with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the necessary force.
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit product data for all proposed materials.
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
JK
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
Do not use wooden materials for support, anchorage or attachment components unless the
facility is framed of wooden materials.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
b.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c.
ERICO International Corporation.
d.
GS Metals Corp.
e.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g.
Wesanco, Inc.
2.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
3.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4.
5.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded
body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in
riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as
required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
16190 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16190
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
F.
G.
2.2
A.
B.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; galvanized or painted.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
b.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
Hilti Inc.
2)
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3)
MKT Fastening, LLC.
4)
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors:
Insert-wedge-type, zinc-plated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
b.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2)
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3)
Hilti Inc.
4)
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5)
MKT Fastening, LLC.
3.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
5.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel
shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
APPLICATION
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less
than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
16190 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16190
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other
support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 40 percent in future without
exceeding specified design load limits.
1.
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single or two-bolt conduit clamps.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC
may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lbs.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. Use washers.
2.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or
greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less
than 4 inches thick.
6.
To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or
Spring-tension clamps.
7.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. Drill
holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
CONCRETE BASES
Coordinate with general contractor for the construction of concrete bases of dimensions
indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so
anchors (if present) will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
2.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
16190 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16190
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
PAINTING
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 for cleaning and touchup painting of field
welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 16190
16190 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16191
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
INTRODUCTION
Seismic Restraint: A fixed device (a seismic brace, an anchor bolt or stud, or a fastening
assembly) used to prevent vertical or horizontal movement, or both vertical and horizontal
movement, of an electrical system component during an earthquake
Design, provide, and install all required seismic restraints for electrical equipment including
conduit, lighting, panelboards, transformers transfer switches, and generators in accordance
with the IBC requirements for seismic bracing and Federal Emergency Management (FEMA)
413 – Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment.
SUMMARY
Section includes:
1.
Channel support systems.
2.
Restraint cables.
3.
Hanger rod stiffeners.
4.
Anchorage bushings and washers.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1.
Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.
2.
Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC:
Design Category B.
a.
Component Importance Factor: 1.25.
b.
Component Response Modification Factor: 3.
c.
Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.
3.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods: Sds = 0.282.
4.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: Sd1 = 0.096.
Seismic
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall
bear anchorage pre-approval OPA number from OSHPD, pre-approval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum
seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based
on calculations. If pre-approved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent
testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support
seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2.
California Dynamics Corporation.
16191 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16191
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4.
Hilti Inc.
5.
Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division.
6.
Mason Industries.
7.
TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.
8.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application
requirements shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES,
OSHPD, or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted
steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building
structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating;
and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service;
and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and
size of attachment devices.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for
interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength
required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times
diameter.
Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane
methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.
Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless
steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as
tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
3.2
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
APPLICATIONS
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps
approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, OSHPD, or an agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings
to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits.
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
Equipment and Hanger Restraints:
1.
Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.
16191 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16191
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
3.5
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
3.
Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service
member of ICC-ES, OSHPD, or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
providing required submittals for component.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full
design strength.
3.
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
4.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
5.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
6.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways
where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different
structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to
a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary
load-spreading members.
2.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
Architect.
3.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
4.
Measure isolator restraint clearance.
5.
Measure isolator deflection.
6.
Verify snubber minimum clearances.
7.
If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
ADJUSTING
Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
16191 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16191
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C.
D.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
ELECTRICAL VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE
Anchor panelboards, motor-control centers, motor controls, switchboards, switchgear,
transformers, fused power-circuit devices, transfer switches, busways, battery racks, static
uninterruptible power units, power conditioners, capacitor units, communication system
components, and electronic signal processing, control, and distribution units as follows:
1.
Size concrete bases so expansion anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from
the edge of the concrete base.
2.
Concrete Bases for Floor-Mounted Equipment: Use female expansion anchors and install
studs and nuts after equipment is positioned.
3.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Install to allow for resilient media between anchor bolt or stud and mounting hole in concrete.
4.
Anchor Bolt Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment: Install to allow resilient
media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
5.
Torque bolts and nuts on studs to values recommended by equipment manufacturer.
Lighting:
1.
Provide a 12 ga wire hanger on opposite (diagonal) corners of each light fixture installed
in a lay-in ceiling. Connect wire to structure. This wire is in addition to wiring supporting
lay-in ceiling grid and shall be installed by electrical contractor. Recessed cans may
have only one wire hanger.
2.
Drive two screws through lay-in ceiling runner into each side of light fixture, or provide
seismic hold down clips.
3.
On pendant mounted fixtures, provide a concealed safety cable connected to the
luminaire. The safety cable shall run through the luminaire pendant and be securely
attached to structure above the ceiling.
Conduit/Raceways
1.
Secure all conduits and raceways directly to wall or ceilings using approved straps or
strut clamps.
2.
Where conduits are suspended, install clevis hangers, j-hangers, or a trapeze support
system using threaded rod or other approved materials. Provide rod stiffeners where
required.
Provide lateral supports using strut or angle, or cable braces in quantity
determined by seismic criteria under section 1.3.
END OF SECTION 16191
16191 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16420
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
SUMMARY
Arrange with Electrical Utility Company for permanent electric service including all charges or fees
levied by the serving utility company relative to this project. All service fees shall be paid by Owner.
Underground service entrance, items furnished by serving utility company:
1.
Pad mounted transformer.
2.
Current transformers.
3.
Meter and meter conductors.
4.
Primary cable and installation.
WORK INCLUDED - SECONDARY
Items furnished by contractor (verify all requirements with Utility Company):
Secondary conduit and conductors.
1.
Meter base.
2.
Primary Trenching and Conduit
3.
Secondary Conductors, Conduit, Trenching and installation
4.
1” Conduit from CT cabinet to the base.
5.
Transformer pad and vault. (By Electrical Contractor)
A.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
System voltage: 480Y/277 volts, three phase, four wire, 60 hertz.
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Install service entrance in accordance with Utility Company's rules and regulations.
1.4
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate all work relative to the electrical service with the serving Utility Company prior to
construction.
END OF SECTION 16420
ACE, Inc.
JK
16420 - 1/1
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16426
FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches,
panelboards, switchboards, enclosed controllers, and motor-control centers.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
2.
Edison Fuse, Inc.
3.
Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
4.
Littelfuse, Inc.
FUSES
Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit
voltages.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
FUSE APPLICATIONS
Service Entrance: Class RK1, time delay; or Class J, time delay.
Feeders: Class RK1, time delay; Class RK5, time delay; or Class J, time delay.
Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.
Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay; Class RK5, time delay; or Class J, fast acting.
Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.
INSTALLATION
Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
Provide a spare fuse cabinet equal to Bussman SFC-FUSE-CAB (30” x 24” x 12”). Mount near
main distribution panel or where majority of fused devices are located. Provide three spare
fuses of each fuse type and size used in project.
16426 - 1/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16426
FUSES
3.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
IDENTIFICATION
Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door
of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.
END OF SECTION 16426
16426 - 2/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16440
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Fusible switches.
2.
Non-fusible switches.
3.
Shunt trip switches.
4.
Stand-alone molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
5.
Enclosures.
DEFINITIONS
NC: Normally closed.
NO: Normally open.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated.
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
Field quality-control reports.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
FUSIBLE SWITCHES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
5.
Hubbell
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac (as required to accommodate actual
voltage), 1200 A and smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads
16440 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16440
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
C.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
JK
to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
Accessories:
1.
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3.
Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
4.
Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
5.
Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
NON-FUSIBLE SWITCHES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac to accommodate specified voltage,
1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability
to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
Accessories:
1.
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3.
Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
2.
Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
3.
Littelfuse, Inc.
General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting
and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.
Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt-trip mechanism and Class J fuse
block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed
position.
Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and
secondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip,
connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.
Accessories:
1.
Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function.
2.
Oiltight ON pilot light.
3.
Isolated neutral lug.
4.
Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and
closed.
5.
Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.
6.
Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; confirm coil voltage with fire alarm
contractor.
7.
Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.
16440 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16440
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
8.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.5
A.
Provide auxiliary switch on or interlocked with lockable handle. Switch to change state if
handle is switched.
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting
capacity to comply with available fault currents.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for
circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following
field-adjustable settings:
1.
Instantaneous trip.
2.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
3.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
4.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
Features and Accessories:
1.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2.
Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits.
4.
Following items if specified on plans:
5.
Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type
with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay
settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zerosequence current transformer/sensor.
6.
Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
7.
Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic
circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
8.
Alarm Switch: One N.O. contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.
ENCLOSURES
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to
comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1.
Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
3.
Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
INSTALLATION
Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
16440 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16440
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
Install fuses in fusible devices.
Comply with NECA 1.
IDENTIFICATION
Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2.
Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches
and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION 16440
16440 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16441
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
2.
Transient voltage suppression devices.
3.
Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
4.
Instrumentation.
5.
Control power.
6.
Accessory components and features.
7.
Identification.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment:
1.
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings.
2.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in switchboards.
3.
Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, overcurrent protective
devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.", if this specification is included
with this project.
Field quality-control reports.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Comply with NEMA PB 2.
Comply with NFPA 70.
Comply with UL 891.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
16441 - 1/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16441
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
ACE, Inc.
JK
MANUFACTURED UNITS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:
1.
Main Devices: Panel mounted.
2.
Branch Devices: Panel mounted.
3.
Sections front and rear aligned.
Nominal System Voltage: In accordance with riser diagram in contract documents.
Main-Bus Continuous: Per riser diagram in contract documents.
Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand
seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems."
Enclosure: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1 for interior and Type 3R for exterior.
1.
Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a
rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
2.
Enclosure: Flat roof; bolt-on rear covers for each section, with provisions for padlocking.
Cubical Space Heaters: Factory-installed electric space heaters of sufficient wattage in each
vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point.
Space-Heater Control: Thermostats to maintain temperature of each section.
Space-Heater Power Source: 120-V external branch circuit.
Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with
utility company's requirements. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match
and align with basic switchboard. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable
service entrance features.
Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.
Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank
compartments.
Pull Box on Top of Switchboard:
1.
Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as
switchboard.
2.
Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily
removable for drilling and cutting.
3.
Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into
switchboard.
4.
Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables
indicated, including those for future installation.
Phase and Neutral Buses and Connections: Three-phase, four-wire unless otherwise indicated.
Tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy with tin-plated aluminum circuitbreaker line connections.
1.
Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch minimum size, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity,
equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors.
2.
Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of
switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both
ends.
3.
Neutral Buses: 100-percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,
equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables.
16441 - 2/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16441
SWITCHBOARDS
O.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and
appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment. Extend buses the length or height
of all available spaces to allow for easy addition of future circuit breakers.
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES
Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-state,
parallel-connected, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second
edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating,
and with the following features and accessories:
1.
Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
2.
LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
3.
Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
4.
Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,
for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of
any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device.
5.
Transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.
Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase.
Withstand Capabilities: 5000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with
less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with shall be as follows:
1.
Line to Neutral:
800 V for 480Y/277: 400 V for 208Y/120.
2.
Line to Ground:
800 V for 480Y/277: 400 V for 208Y/120.
3.
Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277: 400 V for 208Y/120.
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with fully rated-connected rating to
meet available fault currents. Provide following breakers per the riser diagram:
1.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip
setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3.
Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
Instantaneous trip.
b.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
4.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b.
Lugs: Mechanical or Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor material.
c.
Application Listing:
Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d.
Ground-Fault Protection: When indicated on the plans provide circuit breaker with
integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay
settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
e.
Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function.
f.
Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with
functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system
16441 - 3/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16441
SWITCHBOARDS
B.
C.
D.
2.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control.", if
applicable.
g.
Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent
of rated voltage.
h.
Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without
intentional time delay.
i.
Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic
circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
j.
Key Interlock Kit: When indicated on plans provide externally mounted to prohibit
circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off
position.
Bolted-Pressure Contact Switch: Operating mechanism uses rotary-mechanical-bolting action
to produce and maintain high clamping pressure on the switch blade after it engages the
stationary contacts.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
b.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
c.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2.
Operating Mechanism: Manual handle operation to close switch; stores energy in
mechanism for opening and closing.
a.
Electrical Trip: Operation of lever or push-button trip switch, or trip signal from
ground-fault relay or remote-control device, causes switch to open.
b.
Mechanical Trip: Operation of mechanical lever, push button, or other device
causes switch to open.
3.
Auxiliary Switches: Factory installed, single pole, double throw, with leads connected to
terminal block, and including one set more than quantity required for functional
performance indicated.
4.
Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
5.
Ground-Fault Relay: Comply with UL 1053; self-powered type with mechanical groundfault indicator, test function, tripping relay with internal memory, and three-phase current
transformer/sensor.
a.
Configuration: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and
time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
6.
Open-Fuse Trip Device: Arranged to trip switch open if a phase fuse opens.
Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
Fuses are specified in Division 16 Section "Fuses."
INSTRUMENTATION
Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:
1.
Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary and secondary shorting
device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay
devices.
2.
Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units
larger than 3 kVA.
3.
Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary
wiring to ground over-current relays, via shorting terminals, to provide selective tripping of
main and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker, ground-fault
protection.
Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or fourwire systems and with the following features:
1.
Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy
tolerances as indicated:
16441 - 4/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16441
SWITCHBOARDS
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
2.6
Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated
values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.
i.
Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from
five to 60 minutes.
Mounting:
Display and control unit flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
CONTROL POWER
Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from controlpower transformer.
Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection
of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.
Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide
flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for
conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
A.
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Suitably identified, wall-mounted, lockable, compartmented steel box or
cabinet. Arrange for wall mounting.
A.
IDENTIFICATION
Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with
one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
2.7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
ACE, Inc.
JK
INSTALLATION
Receive, inspect, handle, store and install switchboards and accessories according to
NECA 400.
Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness.
Coordinate required dimensions with general contractor.
1.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
2.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems", if applicable.
Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.
Install over-current protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and
instrumentation.
1.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
Install spare-fuse cabinet.
Comply with NECA 1.
16441 - 5/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16441
SWITCHBOARDS
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
JK
IDENTIFICATION
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying
with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and over-current protective device and each
meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION 16441
16441 - 6/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16442
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
1.5
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5.
Include evidence of NRTL listing for a fully rated system of installed devices.
6.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
7.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
8.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective
devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
Comply with NFPA 70.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 16 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets as indicated on panel schedules.
1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
16442 - 1/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16442
PANELBOARDS
b.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
3.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
a.
All circuit directories shall be typed. Hand written circuit directories are not
acceptable.
Incoming Mains Location: Determined by Contractor unless otherwise noted on plans.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent
conductivity.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1.
Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type.
3.
Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression or Mechanical type.
4.
Feed-Through Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor
material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
5.
Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor
material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one
or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
Future Devices:
Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary
appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully Rated for connected system with integral or
remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by a NRTL. Include size and type
of allowable upstream and branch devices, and listed and labeled for fully rated-connected
short-circuit rating by an NRTL.
2.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
ACE, Inc.
JK
DISTRIBUTION & SERVICE ENTRANCE PANELBOARDS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Provide two keys for every
panelboard provided. All keys keyed alike.
Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only as indicated on panel schedules.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Bolt-on circuit breakers. Plug-in style breakers are not permitted.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:
Bolt-on circuit breakers. Plug-in style breakers are not permitted.
Fused switches are not permitted in panelboards unless specifically noted on contract
documents.
All main service panelboards shall be rated for use as a service-entrance.
On all main service entrance panelboards, and on other panelboards specified on the plans,
provide integral transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) device with 180 kA surge current
rating at 240 VAC, 180 ka at 480 VAC. TVSS shall bolt onto panel bus in same fashion as
circuit breaker. Device shall be equal to Square-D SurgeLogic.
Provide GFI protection for the main service circuit breaker for all 277/480 volt services of 1000
amperes or more in accordance with NEC 230-95.
Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully Rated -connected system with integral or remote upstream
overcurrent protective devices and labeled by a NRTL. Include size and type of allowable
upstream and branch devices, and listed and labeled for fully rated-connected short-circuit
rating by an NRTL.
16442 - 2/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16442
PANELBOARDS
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only as indicated on panel schedules.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units. Plug-in style breakers are not permitted.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Provide two
keys for every panelboard provided. All keys keyed alike.
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with fully rated-connected rating to
meet available fault currents. Provide thermal-magnetic breakers unless otherwise indicated on
contract documents.
1.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip
setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3.
Electronic trip circuit breakers with RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplaceable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
Instantaneous trip.
b.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
4.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. Provide only when indicated on panel schedule.
5.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip). Provide only when indicated on panel schedule.
6.
Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault
protection (30-mA trip). Provide only when indicated on panel schedule.
7.
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V,
single-pole configuration. Provide only when indicated on panel schedule.
8.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories, provide where
indicated on plans:
a.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b.
Lugs: Compression or Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings,
and conductor materials.
c.
Application Listing:
Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d.
Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
16442 - 3/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16442
PANELBOARDS
e.
C.
2.5
A.
Communication Capability:
Circuit-breaker-mounted or Integral-mounted
communication module with functions and features compatible with power
monitoring and control system if specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Power
Monitoring and Control."
f.
Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at [55] [75]
percent of rated voltage.
g.
Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in
on or off position.
h.
Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
1.
Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 16
Section "Fuses."
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
INSTALLATION
Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to
NECA 407.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
Mount top of trim 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1.
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
At all flush-mounted panelboards in finished spaces, stub spare ¾-inch empty conduits from
panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future.
Comply with NECA 1.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room
designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
Panelboard Nameplates:
Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
16442 - 4/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16442
PANELBOARDS
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
JK
2.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NECA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION 16442
16442 - 5/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
A.
B.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.2
1.3
A.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
2.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
CONDUCTORS
Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless
otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
Bare Copper Conductors:
1.
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2.
Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3.
Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
5.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6.
Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 15/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
7.
Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
CONNECTORS
Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,
with at least two bolts.
1.
Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
Ground Rods: Copper-clad, zinc-coated or stainless steel; 3/4 inch by10 feet or as otherwise
accepted by local authority having jurisdiction.
16450 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
APPLICATIONS
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, sized per plans. Bury at
least 24 inches below grade.
Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two
bands of yellow.
Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1.
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2.
Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3.
Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4.
Connections to Structural Steel: Welded or bolted connectors.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in all circuits. Provide equipment grounding
conductor in all armored or metalclad cable assemblies.
Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway
fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a
separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
1.
Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus.
2.
Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate
insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with
branch-circuit conductors.
INSTALLATION
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if
any.
2.
For grounding electrode system, install at least rods spaced at least one-rod length from
each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and
connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
16450 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C.
D.
E.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3.
Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes,
using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using
one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed,
connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor
conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
Where indicated on the plans provide a concrete-encased (“UFER”) ground. Use bare
conductor no smaller than #4 AWG and encase in bottom of concrete slab or footer no less than
2” from bottom of concrete. Bond to reinforcing bars or encase at least 20’ of bare conductor.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test
wells.
a.
Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
b.
Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
B.
Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
1.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
2.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
C.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify
engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
D.
In health care facility projects, the electrical contractor, upon completion of the project, shall test
the grounding system in all patient care areas in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 99
section 4.3.3 (or as numbered in latest edition) “Performance Criteria and Testing”. Testing
shall be conducted in full cooperation with the governing Department of Health and electrical
inspection agency. The contractor shall maintain and provide all necessary records required by
NFPA and the governing Dept. of Health Agency and shall turn over such records to the Owner
upon completion of the project. Any deficiencies discovered by testing shall be repaired by the
contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.
Health care facilities shall be as defined by the National Fire Protection Association
Standard for Health Care Facilities (NFPA 99) and shall include hospitals, nursing
homes, limited care facilities, clinics, medical and dental offices, and ambulatory health
care centers.
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
16450 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Patient Care Areas shall be as defined by the National Fire Protection Association
Standard for Health Care Facilities (NFPA 99) and shall include any portion of a health
care facility wherein patients are intended to be examined or treated.
END OF SECTION 16450
16450 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16460
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
A.
B.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with
capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1.
Distribution transformers.
2.
Buck-boost transformers.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each product indicated.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and weights.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification:
Submit certification that transformers,
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
Field quality-control test reports.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division.
2.
Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp.
3.
Controlled Power Company.
4.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
5.
Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp.
6.
General Electric Company.
7.
Hammond Power Solutions
8.
Magnetek Power Electronics Group.
9.
Micron Industries Corp.
10. Myers Power Products, Inc.
11. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
12. Sola/Hevi-Duty.
13. Square D; Schneider Electric.
GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1.
Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
2.
Coil Material: Aluminum or Copper as indicated on contract documents. If unstated, coil
material shall be aluminum.
16460 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16460
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
D.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
2.4
A.
B.
2.5
A.
All transformers larger than 112.5 kva shall have an insulation system equal or greater than
class 155 and shall be completely enclosed except for ventilation openings.
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 16
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
Cores: One leg per phase.
Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
1.
Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
2.
Provide weathershield for NEMA 3R rating for all transformers located outdoors.
Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1.
Finish Color: Manufacturer’s Standard.
Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None.
Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below
normal full capacity.
Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Minimum of two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5
percent taps below normal full capacity.
Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of
115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1.
Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.
2.
Tested according to NEMA TP 2.
K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561
requirements for non-sinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by
designated K-factor.
1.
Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion
corresponding to designated K-factor.
2.
Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
Electrostatic Shielding: Transformers indicated to be shielded shall have each winding shielded
with an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
BUCK-BOOST TRANSFORMERS
Description: Self-cooled, two-winding dry type, rated for continuous duty and with wiring
terminals suitable for connection as autotransformer.
Transformers shall comply with
NEMA ST 1 and shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561.
Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
1.
Finish Color: Manufacturer’s Standard,
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate. Nameplates are specified in
Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
INSTALLATION
Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer
manufacturer.
1.
Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 16 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
16460 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16460
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
B.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's
written instructions and requirements in Division 16 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
ADJUSTING
Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower
than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus
or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.
Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
END OF SECTION 16460
16460 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16490
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
SUMMARY
This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device
coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device
coordination study.
1.
Coordination of Fully rated devices is required.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
Product Certificates:
For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software
programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.
Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for
system protective devices has been completed. Submittals may be in digital form.
1.
Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2.
Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.
3.
Coordination-Study Report.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.
Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of
computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude
on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1.
Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible
for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision
and control of engineer.
Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.
Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
Comply with IEEE 399.
Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory,"
"very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-currentcharacteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device
settings and ratings of all over-current protective devices and shall demonstrate selective
coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
POWER SYSTEM DATA
Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:
1.
Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 16 Sections
and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment
16490 - 1/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16490
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
2.
3.
4.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
JK
designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams,
overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended
device settings.
Impedance of utility service entrance.
Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,
showing the following:
a.
Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.
b.
Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.
c.
Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, and X/R ratios.
d.
Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.
e.
Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,
insulation, and length.
f.
Busway ampacity and impedance.
g.
Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.
Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with
tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a.
Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting
and stopping.
b.
Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush
current, and overload capability.
c.
Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of
start, and thermal-damage curve.
d.
Generator thermal-damage curve.
e.
Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
f.
Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
g.
Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
h.
Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere
or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range,
and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
i.
Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment
range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio
for overcurrent relays.
j.
Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating
in amperes rms symmetrical.
FAULT-CURRENT STUDY
Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuitbreaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a
current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the
following:
1.
Switchgear and switchboard bus.
2.
Medium-voltage controller.
3.
Motor-control center.
4.
Distribution panelboard.
5.
Branch circuit panelboard.
Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and
alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.
Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with
IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.
1.
Transformers:
16490 - 2/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16490
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
E.
F.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
JK
a.
ANSI C57.12.22.
b.
IEEE C57.12.00.
c.
IEEE C57.96.
2.
Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010.
3.
Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.
4.
Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.
Study Report:
1.
Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on
electrical distribution system diagram.
Equipment Evaluation Report:
1.
For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or
higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
2.
For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication
factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
3.
Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;
verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors
at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal
to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
COORDINATION STUDY
Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written
report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.
1.
Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.
2.
Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) shortcircuit currents.
3.
Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.
Comply with IEEE 241 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.
Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1.
Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a.
Inrush current when first energized.
b.
Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is
specified for that transformer.
c.
Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
2.
Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.
Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that
equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping
time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine
temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed
standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.
Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of
coordination study:
1.
Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:
a.
Device tag.
b.
Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup
values.
c.
Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous
settings.
d.
Fuse-current rating and type.
e.
Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.
2.
Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to
achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists
between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices.
16490 - 3/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16490
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
F.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods
where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:
a.
Device tag.
b.
Voltage and current ratio for curves.
c.
Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.
d.
No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.
e.
Cable damage curves.
f.
Transformer inrush points.
g.
Maximum fault-current cutoff point.
Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
END OF SECTION 16490
16490 - 4/4
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16500
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
A.
B.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2.
Emergency lighting units.
3.
Exit signs.
4.
Lighting fixture supports.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include
data on features, accessories, finishes.
Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions,
weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed
by product manufacturer.
Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
ACE, Inc.
JK
MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include manufacturers specified on Light
Fixture Schedule.
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1.
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing
and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a.
Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is
specified.
16500 - 1/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16500
INTERIOR LIGHTING
2.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
ACE, Inc.
JK
b.
UV stabilized.
Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
BALLASTS
Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant or
programmed-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps
served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is
indicated.
1.
Sound Rating: A.
2.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
3.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
4.
BF: 0.95 or higher.
5.
Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
Electromagnetic Ballasts: Not acceptable.
Ballasts for Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electromagnetic
type designed for use with indicated lamp types.
Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic
type, as specified on Light Fixture Schedule.
1.
Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and
lamp type indicated.
Ballasts for bi-Level or step-dimmed controlled lighting fixtures with linear fluorescent Lamps:
Electronic type.
1.
Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output
of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.
a.
High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.
b.
Low-Level Operation: 50 percent of rated lamp lumens.
2.
Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.
3.
Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and
lamp type indicated.
Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying
with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed
for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:
1.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
2.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
3.
Sound Rating: A.
4.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
6.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
7.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
8.
BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.
9.
Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.
Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic
type, as specified on Light Fixture Schedule.
1.
Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and
lamp type indicated.
Internal-Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter
unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with
UL 924. Remote-style only if specified on Light Fixture Schedule.
1.
Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100
lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to
fixture ballast.
16500 - 2/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16500
INTERIOR LIGHTING
2.
3.
I.
J.
2.4
Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.
Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or
entering ceiling space.
a.
Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operability.
b.
Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
4.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
5.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer
relay.
Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029.
Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
2.
Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single-lamp ballasts.
3.
Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.
4.
Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
5.
Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to
minimize audible fixture noise.
Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise
indicated:
1.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
2.
Sound Rating: A.
3.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent.
4.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
5.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.
6.
Power Factor: .90 or higher.
7.
Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
8.
Protection: Class P thermal cutout.
LED DRIVERS AND MODULES
A.
Long-life LED’s, coupled with high-efficiency drivers, rated to deliver L80 performance for
50,000 hours.
B.
Minimum color rendering of 80 CRI.
C.
Minimum efficiency of 80 lumens/watt.
2.5
EXIT SIGNS
1.
Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and
lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
2.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.
1.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.
2.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
3.
Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to
80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery
when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on
charger.
16500 - 3/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16500
INTERIOR LIGHTING
4.
5.
2.7
Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;
bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
LAMPS & MODULES
A.
Provide lamps or LED’s modules as specified on Light Fixture Schedule
B.
Furnish spare fluorescent and metal-halide lamps identical to those installed in each fixture.
Quantity: 20% of total lamps used or a minimum of three (3) lamps of each type, whichever is
greater.
C.
Furnish spare fluorescent and metal-halide ballasts identical to those used in each fixture.
Quantity: 1 ballast or 6% of each fixture type, whichever is greater.
D.
Furnish spare LED drivers and modules identical to those used in each fixture type. Quantity: 1
driver and 1 module or 3% of each fixture type, whichever is greater.
2.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
Comply with Division 16 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channeland angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing or equal or better by manufacturer with swivel ball
fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.
Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes or equal or better by manufacturer with single
canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gauge or equal or
better by manufacturer.
Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each
fixture.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports.
C.
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1.
Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2.
Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3.
Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
D.
Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to satisfaction of owner.
E.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
F.
Organize and execute a 100-hour, uninterrupted burn-in period for all fluorescent luminaries.
Luminaires shall be installed in final location prior to burn-in.
G.
Re-lamp all luminaries used for construction purposes at completion of project for final
acceptance.
H.
Align luminaries and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of Project. Clean paint splatters,
dirt and debris from installed luminaries. Replace any dented, scratched, soiled or cracked lens
or other fixture parts.
ACE, Inc.
16500 - 4/5
02131517.00
JK
05/19/2014
A.
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16500
INTERIOR LIGHTING
3.2
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.
END OF SECTION 16500
16500 - 5/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16530
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.
2.
Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.
3.
Poles and accessories.
See Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior
surfaces of buildings.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting
unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: Include anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by
manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
ACE, Inc.
JK
MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: As indicated on Light Fixture Schedule or as approved through prior
approval process.
LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations
by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for
luminaires.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form
and support to prevent warping and sagging.
Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform
in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or
replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.
Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat,
and UV radiation.
Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light
distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
16530 - 1/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16530
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
K.
L.
M.
N.
2.3
A.
B.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
1.
White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2.
Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3.
Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and
cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested
luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support
materials.
Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Color as selected by Architect. Comply with
NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
for applying and designating finishes.
Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Color shall be as specified on Light Fixture
Schedule or selected by Architect, if so specified. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes
Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes.
LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.
Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory
set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time delay.
Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from
causing false turnoff.
1.
Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with NEMA C136.10.
2.
Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS
Low-Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable starting and
operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures 0 deg F and higher.
Ballast Characteristics:
1.
Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
2.
Sound Rating: A.
3.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
4.
Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor,
Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection.
5.
Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum.
6.
Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 Category A or better.
Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast
provided at temperatures 0 deg. F. and higher.
Fluorescent Lamps: Low-mercury type. Comply with the EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching
procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to
NEMA LL 1.
LED DRIVERS AND MODULES
A.
Long-life LED’s, coupled with high-efficiency drivers, rated to deliver L80 performance for
50,000 hours.
B.
Minimum color rendering of 80 CRI.
C.
Minimum efficiency of 80 lumens/watt.
ACE, Inc.
JK
16530 - 2/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16530
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
2.6
A.
2.7
BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction
average life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
2.
Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C).
3.
Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C).
4.
Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current
ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.
LAMPS
A.
Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI and color temperature equal or
greater than lamp specified on Light Fixture Schedule. Provide lamps or LED’s modules as
specified on Light Fixture Schedule
B.
Furnish spare fluorescent and metal-halide lamps identical to those installed in each fixture.
Quantity: 20% of total lamps used or a minimum of three (3) lamps of each type, whichever is
greater.
C.
Furnish spare fluorescent and metal-halide ballasts identical to those used in each fixture.
Quantity: 1 ballast or 6% of each fixture type, whichever is greater.
D.
Furnish spare LED drivers and modules identical to those used in each fixture type. Quantity: 1
driver and 1 module or 3% of each fixture type, whichever is greater.
2.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
JK
POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4.
1.
Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure,
permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in Part 1 "Structural
Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3.
2.
Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of
luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be
used in pole selection strength analysis.
Luminaire Attachment Provisions:
Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting
requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support
components.
1.
Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.
2.
Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated.
3.
Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural
steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and
strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.
Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4.
16530 - 3/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16530
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
2.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
STEEL POLES
Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig
(317 MPa); 1-piece construction up to 40 feet (12 m) in height with access handhole in pole
wall.
1.
Shape: As specified on Light Fixture Schedule.
2.
Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway
support.
Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.
1.
Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with plated or galvanizedsteel bolts.
2.
Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate
luminaire.
3.
Match pole material and finish.
Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and
securely fastened to pole top.
Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 15-inch (381-mm) vertical spacing,
alternating on opposite sides of pole; first step at elevation 10 feet (3 m) above finished grade.
Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded lug, complying with
requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for
attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and
accessible through handhole.
Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable
and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.
Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Color shall be as
specified on Light Fixture Schedule or selected by Architect, if so specified selected by
Architect.
POLE ACCESSORIES (if specified on Light Fixture Schedule)
Duplex Receptacle: 120 V, 20 A in a weatherproof assembly complying with Division 16
Section "Wiring Devices" for ground-fault circuit-interrupter type.
1.
Recessed, 12 inches above pole base.
2.
Nonmetallic polycarbonate plastic or reinforced fiberglass cover, color to match pole, that
when mounted results in NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure.
3.
With cord opening.
4.
With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and tag-out requirements.
Minimum 1800-W transformer, protected by replaceable fuses, mounted behind access cover.
Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and
nuts. Finish same as pole.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
Install lamps in each luminaire.
Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.
1.
Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the
application and approved by manufacturer.
Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming to satisfaction of Owner.
16530 - 4/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16530
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
POLE INSTALLATION
Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their
mounting provisions on the pole.
Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and
underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
1.
Fire Hydrants: 8’.
2.
Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, Storm Drainage and Sewer Lines: 6’.
3.
Trees: 15’.
Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by
pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
1.
Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application
and approved by manufacturer.
2.
Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrink or expanding concrete
grout firmly packed to fill space.
3.
Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Use a short piece of 1/2-inch diameter PVC pipe to make a drain hole through grout.
Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.
Embedded Poles with Tamped Earth Backfill: Set poles to depth below finished grade indicated
on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height.
1.
Dig holes large enough to permit use of tampers in the full depth of hole.
2.
Backfill in 6-inch (150-mm) layers and thoroughly tamp each layer so compaction of
backfill is equal to or greater than that of undisturbed earth.
Embedded Poles with Concrete Backfill: Set poles in augered holes to depth below finished
grade indicated on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height.
1.
Make holes 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter larger than pole diameter.
2.
Fill augered hole around pole with air-entrained concrete having a minimum compressive
strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) at 28 days, and finish in a dome above finished grade.
3.
Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter pipe to make a drain hole through
concrete dome. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.
4.
Cure concrete a minimum of 72 hours before performing work on pole.
Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).
All poles shall be checked after one (1) year of operation for proper vertical alignment and shall
be adjusted to true plumb if necessary.
BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.
Install on concrete base with top of base 4 inches above finished grade or surface at bollard
location, unless otherwise specified on plans. Cast conduit into base, and shape base to
match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials,
installation, and finishing are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES
Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location,
unless otherwise specified on plans. Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing
smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Division 3 Section "Castin-Place Concrete."
GROUNDING
Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1.
Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated.
16530 - 5/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16530
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
2.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding
system.
Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1.
Install grounding electrode for each pole.
2.
Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
3.
Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
END OF SECTION 16530
16530 - 6/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16721
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (VEFAS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.2
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
SCOPE
The electrical contractor, through subcontract with an authorized fire alarm supplier, shall
furnish and install, complete and ready for operation, an intelligent, addressable, digital Voice
Evacuation Fire Alarm System, including panel, local operating consoles, detectors, pull
stations, door holders, local alarms, wiring, remote booster power supplies, signal appliances,
and any and all other equipment necessary for a complete operational system, as shown on the
drawings and indicated herein.
The Fire Alarm Supplier shall be licensed by the State of Wyoming. All fire alarm equipment
shall be installed exclusively by installers and workmen that are employees of the fire alarm
system supplier. All installers and workmen shall be National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies (NICET) certified for fire alarm systems at level two or greater. All
submittal preparers shall be resident NICET level four in fire alarm and shall be state licensed.
Contractors and workmen not complying with this specification shall not be allowed to perform
this work.
The Fire Alarm Supplier shall prepare plans and calculations required by the authority having
jurisdiction (AHJ), shall submit all required documents to the AHJ for approval, and shall obtain
all necessary permits or approvals from the AHJ including anything required prior to installation
and/or after completion and testing.
The electrical contractor shall provide for all rough-in (including supply and installation of
electrical boxes and raceways) and wire pulling. The fire alarm supplier shall supply wiring and
any specialty back-boxes required for the fire alarm suppliers equipment. The electrical
contractor shall NOT install any fire alarm system components beyond rough-in and wire
pulling. The fire alarm supplier shall coordinate all requirements with the electrical contractor
prior to bidding.
All portions of the systems shall be installed in accordance with the drawings, details, and
specifications or as required by jurisdictional authorities and codes. Jurisdictional authorities
and codes shall take precedence over plans, details and specifications in the event of a dispute
between the requirements of contract documents and jurisdictional authorities or codes.
The position is taken that the Owner is entitled to a project which meets or exceeds the
minimum requirements of nationally recognized fire protection standards. All efforts and
installations shall be directed toward this end. All deficiencies as noted by fire rating bureaus,
insurance service offices or jurisdictional authorities shall be corrected. No extra charges will be
allowed on this account.
The fire alarm supplier shall coordinate all requirements with the electrical contractor. Any
additional requirements or detail not shown on the drawings, but required for a complete
working integrated system will be the responsibility of the fire alarm supplier.
Work to be performed under this section shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.
Fire Alarm System
a.
Control Panel
b.
Programming
c.
Audible/Visual Alarm Devices
d.
Pull Stations
e.
Smoke/Heat Detectors
f.
Installation of Auto-Dialer
RELATED WORK
All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the requirements
of both the General and Special Conditions and the Electrical Specification.
16721 - 1/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16721
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (VEFAS)
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
A.
B.
1.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
REGULATORY AGENCIES
The term jurisdictional authority used in this section of the specification shall include, as
applicable, but not be limited to the following:
1.
Local Building Department and Fire Department.
2.
State Fire Marshall.
3.
Insurance Services Office or Insuring Authority having jurisdiction.
4.
Owner.
The design and installation of all systems of fire protection shall conform to all requirements of
applicable codes and publications herein defined:
1.
International Building Code 2012
2.
International Fire Code 2012
3.
NFPA #72
4.
NFPA #70
5.
All State and local ordinances
6.
Underwriters Laboratories.
7.
Factory Mutual.
8.
American Society of Testing Materials.
9.
American National Standards Institute.
10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
11. Americans with Disabilities Act.
SUBMITTALS
The successful Supplier shall provide submittal data as required under other portions of these
specifications. Submittals shall conform to the instructions set forth in the General and Special
Conditions of these specifications entitled Shop Drawings and Submittals.
Submittals shall include, at a minimum, the following:
1.
Cut sheets of all equipment and wiring.
2.
AUTOCAD-based floor plans, with location of control panel, batteries, annunciators,
primary power supplies, detectors, notification appliances, and each alarm initiating
devices. Show single-line fire alarm/voice notification systems riser diagram, device and
zone schedules. Each device on the riser should be identified by type and location, with
device number. Indicate connection of equipment by circuit runs, or
3.
Summary of battery calculations.
4.
Summary of Voltage Drop calculations.
Electronic submittals are acceptable however one hard-copy binder of all materials, including
drawings shall be prepared and submitted to the engineer along with electronic submittals.
The supplier shall submit to the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) all necessary documents,
plans, calculations and any other details required by NFPA and the AHJ necessary to receive
approval and permitting from the AHJ for the work required. Should the AHJ require
Professional Engineering stamping of plans, it shall be the suppliers responsibility to obtain
stamping at suppliers cost.
JOB CONDITIONS
The Supplier shall determine, and be responsible for, the proper locations and character of
inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for fire
alarm system work, and shall obtain this information well in advance of the construction
progress to avoid delay of the work.
All fees and permits specifically required for fire alarm work, not obtained by others as specified
elsewhere shall be applied for and paid for by the fire alarm supplier.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Three (3) sets of operating and maintenance instructions shall be provided the Owner upon
completion.
16721 - 2/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16721
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (VEFAS)
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
TRAINING
The fire alarm supplier shall supply on-site training at the owner's facility to familiarize the
Owner with the basic operation of the system.
GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
The Fire Alarm Supplier shall guarantee to the Owner in writing, all equipment and
workmanship for a period of THREE (3) years after the fire alarm system has been placed in
continuous service and has been accepted by all authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Approved Manufacturers/Installers, subject to compliance with specifications:
1.
Simplex
2.
Notifier
3.
Edwards
4.
Others by prior approval only as accepted by owner with service contracts outlined.
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm and voice evacuation control unit and
fire alarm and voice evacuation control. The panel shall have central processing, memory, input
and output terminals, LCD display units and shall comply with UL 864 and listed and labeled by
an NRTL. Provide panel capable of including DVC inside panel. Provide sealed lead-acid
batteries.
LOCAL OPERATING CONSOLE (LOC)
The LOC shall consist of a firefighter's microphone or telephone and associated controls to
allow emergency responders and/or building occupants to operate the VEFAS including delivery
of recorded and/or live messages. The LOC shall also include an integral remote annunciator.
A separate remote annunciator may be provided and installed adjacent to the LOC. Remote
annunciator shall be backlit LCD, 80-character, with system status LED's for power, alarm,
trouble, supervisory and alarm silenced. Provide control switches for system acknowledge,
signal silence, drill, and reset.
1.
The LOC and remote annunciator housing(s) shall be surface, shall be suitable for
installation on block wall and contain a lockable door.
AUXILIARY MICROPHONE STATIONS (AMS)
Microphone jack locations consisting of single microphone jack and stainless steel faceplate
identified as voice notification auxiliary microphone stations.
1.
Provide a quantity of three microphones compatible for use with these jacks.
Microphones to be desktop style with push-to-talk button, similar in style to Bogen
MBS1000A.
DIGITAL VOICE COMMAND (DVC)
Digital audio processor and event driven audio message generator connected directly to fire
alarm control panel.
1.
Up to 32 minutes of standard quality digital audio storage of user-selected/created
messages and tones.
2.
Capable of supporting remote microphones.
3.
Auxiliary inputs for low-level audio sources and external audio sources such as telephone
paging or background music.
16721 - 3/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16721
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (VEFAS)
2.6
B.
DETECTORS
SMOKE & HEAT DETECTORS: Intelligent, photelectric, low-profile (less than 2-1/4" high).
Equal to Notifier FSP or FST series.
Smoke detectors shall not be installed until the project has undergone FINAL cleaning in
accordance with NFPA 72. In the event detectors are installed prior to final cleaning, the
supplier shall clean or replace all detectors at no additional cost to the Owner. Installation of
protective plastic covers does not meet the intent of this requirement.
A.
MANUAL PULL STATIONS
Dual action push-in pull-down style, addressable, surface mounted and red. Equal to Notifier
NBG-12LX.
A.
2.7
2.8
A.
B.
2.9
A.
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
SPEAKER/STROBES – Red (no "ALERT" or other printing on the housing), clear lensed,
surface-mounted device box, field-selectable candela ratings, rotary switch for speaker voltage
and power settings (1/4, 1/2, 1 and 2 watts), suitable for indoor or outdoor installation.
SPEAKER – Red (no "ALERT" or other printing on the housing), surface-mounted device box,
rotary switch for speaker voltage and power settings (1/4, 1/2, 1 and 2 watts), suitable for indoor
or outdoor installation.
REMOTE NAC POWER SUPPLIES
Where remote power supplies are required for notification appliance circuits, they shall be
located in utility spaces only. These locations shall be clearly indicated on shop drawings.
Contractor shall provide dedicated 120v circuit to each NAC at no extra cost.
2.10
A.
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER
Low profile, semi-flush wall mounted holder with catch plate assembly. Equal to Simplex RSG
series with chrome finish and multi voltage capable (12VDC,24VDC/120VAC). Provide with
proper length catch plate extender rod to facilitate door location swing in relation to holder.
1.
Where noted in plan holder shall be floor mounted model in surface box, same model as
wall unit.
2.11
A.
B.
SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
Comply with UL 864.
Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for three
years.
Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program
software upgrades that become available within three years from date of Substantial
Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or
revised licenses for use of software.
C.
2.12
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
JK
WIRE AND CONDUIT
All wiring shall be installed in accordance with NFPA #70 (NEC).
Provide for the protection of all circuits necessary for the operation of notification appliances in
accordance with 2007 NFPA 72 section 6.9.10.4.2 and 6.9.10.4.3. Circuits requiring protection
under this section shall be run 100% in EMT conduit or surface mounted steel wiremold.
It is not acceptable to run wire in accessible ceiling and floor spaces by simply looping wire in
the shortest path possible draped over equipment, ducts, pipes, etc. All wire must be run in
raceway in a neat and orderly manner.
All wiring shall be routed in conduit and steel wiremold. Conceal conduit to the greatest extent
possible.
16721 - 4/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16721
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (VEFAS)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
ACE, Inc.
JK
DESIGN CRITERIA
Approximate fire alarm devices, alarm panel, notification appliances, and detector arrangement
is indicated on the drawings. Supplier is responsible for all required devices and locations.
1.
Final Speaker Quantity & Locations: Quantity and location of speakers on the plan is
approximate. The required quantity and location of speakers may vary depending on the
characteristics and capabilities of different manufacturer's speakers. Therefore it is the
responsibility of the VEFAS supplier to determine the final quantity and location of
speakers in order to meet the requirements for sound levels and intelligibility in NFPA 72
and acceptance by the authority-having-jurisdiction. This shall be done using supplier's
software and other engineering resources. In the event the installed system is not
accepted by the AHJ, it is the responsibility of the VEFAS supplier to make whatever
corrections, including installation of additional speakers, removal of speakers, or
relocation of speakers to satisfy the AHJ. This shall be done at no additional cost to the
Owner or Engineer.
The entire fire alarm system is not shown on plans. The intent is to provide complete fire alarm
systems including all necessary manufacturer's components to provide a complete, functional
system. The Supplier shall be responsible for preparing working drawings for the total system.
Supplier shall provide additional devices as required.
The FACP shall provide power, annunciation, supervision, and control for the system.
Addressable systems shall be microcomputer based with a minimum word size of eight bits with
sufficient memory to perform as specified.
Provide notification appliance circuits. The visual alarm notification appliances shall have the
flash rates synchronized as required by NFPA 72.
Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the battery, battery
voltage, and placement of system modules within the control panel.
Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open condition,
or ground fault. The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply,
absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory panel
modules. Provide a trouble alarm silence feature at both the FACP and Annunciator that shall
silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual indicator. After the system returns
to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is
acknowledged. A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for the actual presence of
smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition.
Alarm, supervisory, and/or trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to a UL-listed
central station. As part of this contract, include the cost of 5 years of subscription service to the
call center. The Call center shall be the same center for all the School District #2 school’s Fire
alarm systems report to.
Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions. Supervisory functions shall
override trouble functions.
The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panel’s keyboard. Programmed
information shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or monitoring both addressable and
non-addressable alarms and supervisory devices.
There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of addressable
devices that may be in alarm simultaneously.
Where the fire alarm/voice evacuation system is responsible for initiating an action in another
emergency control device or system, the addressable fire alarm relay shall be in the vicinity of
the emergency control device.
The supplier shall provide a smoke detector at the fire alarm control panel as shown on the
plans. The supplier shall provide additional detectors at any other control units or sub-panels
required by their system design if required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
16721 - 5/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16721
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (VEFAS)
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
SYSTEM OPERATION
An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:
1.
Transmission of an alarm signal to a UL-listed central station
2.
Visual indication of the device operated on the control panel, and on remote
annunciators.
3.
Continuous actuation of all alarm notification appliances.
4.
Announcement over system speakers of a pre-recorded fire announcement.
5.
Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the fire control system unit.
6.
All control relays shall change state.
A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:
1.
Visual indication of the device operated on the FACP, and on the remote annunciator,
and sounds the audible alarm at the respective panel.
2.
Transmission of a supervisory signal to a UL-listed central station.
3.
Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the control unit.
A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following functions:
1.
Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP, on the remote annunciator, and
sound the audible alarm at the respective panel.
2.
Transmission of a trouble signal to a UL-listed central station].
3.
Recording of the event in the history log of the control unit.
The system shall continuously check for malfunctions or troubles. Upon detecting any fault the
following shall occur.
1.
Activate a reporting signal tone at main panel.
2.
Indicate the point location on the main F.A. panel as to the location and type of the fault.
3.
Add all information to the history log of the panel.
VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
Notification Appliance Network - The audible notification appliance network shall consist of
speakers located to provide intelligible instructions at all locations in the building. The Voice
Evacuation System announcements shall take priority over all other audible announcements of
the system including the output of the fire alarm system in a normal or alarm state. When a
Voice Evacuation announcement is activated during a fire alarm, all fire alarm system functions
shall continue in an alarm state except for the output signals of the fire alarm audible and visual
notification appliances.
Voice Notification - An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and control
the notification appliance network and provide consoles for local operation. Using a console,
personnel in the building can initiate delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, and provide live
voice messages and instructions. The autonomous voice notification control unit will temporarily
override audible fire alarm notification while delivering Voice Notification messages to ensure
they are intelligible.
Voice Notification Messages
1.
Voice notification messages shall utilize a female voice at 1000 Hz tones or as otherwise
required by NFPA 72 and shall be similar to the following:
a.
"May I have your attention please. May I have your attention please. A fire
emergency has been reported in the building. Please leave the building by the
nearest exit." (Provide a 3 second pause.) "May I have your attention please,
(repeat the message)."
b.
Up to an additional four messages shall be recorded at the Owner's discretion.
The fire alarm supplier shall consult with the owner and provide messages as
directed.
2.
The LOC shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, redundant controls and
system status indicators of/for the system. The LOC shall incorporate microphone
override of any tone generation or prerecorded messages. The unit shall be fully
supervised from the control panel.
16721 - 6/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16721
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (VEFAS)
3.
3.4
A.
B.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Auxiliary microphone locations shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, to
allow Public Address paging in the facility. The Public Address paging function shall not
override any alarm or notification functions and shall be disabled by such signals.
INSTALLATION
Final connections between all fire alarm equipment and the wiring system shall be made only by
or under the supervision of an authorized representative of the system manufacturer.
The fire alarm contractor shall provide red labels:
1.
On the fire alarm control panel indicating the panel and circuit supplying power to the
panel.
2.
Next to the circuit breaker inside the panel supplying power to the fire alarm control panel
stating “FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL”.
FINAL TESTS AND REPORT
Upon completion of the installation and system tests, the certified test technician shall submit to
the Engineer three copies of a written report on forms provided by the manufacturer, to indicate
the system has been fully tested in supervision, trouble and alarm modes and is fully
operational conforming to the letter of these Specifications.
SYSTEM INSPECTIONS
The contractor shall provide FOUR inspections of each system under this Contract during the
THREE (3) year warranty period. The first inspection shall be at the six month interval after
system acceptance and the second at the 12 month interval. The third and fourth inspections
shall be at the 24 month and 36 month intervals after system acceptance. Inspections shall
include confirmation that the system is in proper working order. Inspections shall also include a
complete checkout of the control and alarm system. Documents certifying satisfactory system
conditions shall be submitted to the Owner's technical representative upon completion of each
inspection.
END OF SECTION 16721
16721 - 7/7
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16740
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
QUALITY CONTROL
Applicable Publications: The publications and standards listed below Form a part of this
specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic
designation only.
1.
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Associations (TIA/EIA)
a.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
b.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A-5
Transmission Performance Specifications
c.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569
Electromagnetic Interference on Cabling Systems
d.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-607
Grounding for Telecommunication Systems
e.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A
Standard Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
f.
TSB67
Transmission Performance Specification for Field Testing of
UTP
Cabling Systems
g.
TSB-95
Transmission Performance Bulletin
2.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
3.
National Electrical Code NFPA 70
4.
All work and equipment local standards and requirements.
5.
Single Source Responsibility: All components that are the same product of a single
manufacturer.
CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS
Contractor shall employ, in conjunction with construction of the project, capable, experienced, and
reliable foreman and such skilled workmen as may be required for the various classes of work to be
performed. Contractor shall be required to submit evidence of foreman’s skilled workman’s
experience on EIA/TIA certified Category 6 systems. Minimum experience for any workman involved
in Category 6 work shall be:
1.
Cable pulling and termination work on seven Category 6 projects.
2.
Completion of training (40 hrs. minimum) which certifies the workman in Category 6
installations.
3.
If, in the option of the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor’s employees do not possess the
necessary qualifications to install Category 6 cabling and terminations, the Contractor will be
required to obtain the services of workmen, who are certified and trained by and appropriate
schooling organization. These workmen, if required, shall be provided at no additional
expense to the Owner.
4.
The Contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer of the products installed and adhere to
the manufacturer’s engineering, installation, and testing procedures.
5.
The Contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for the successful
installation and testing of optical and Category 6 copper premise distribution systems.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Telecommunications is defined as any transmission, emission or reception of signs, signals,
writings, images, sounds or information of any nature by cable, optical or other electromagnetic
systems. Telecommunications, telephone, telephone/data, tel/data, data/communication and
data/com are used interchangeably and refer to the same devices relative to cables and outlets.
Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall become familiar with the details of the work, shall
verify dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancy before
performing any work.
Standard Products: Materials and equipment shall be new and the standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. All components of a particular
16740 - 1/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16740
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
D.
E.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
JK
product or system shall be provided by a single manufacturer to maintain single source
responsibility.
Workmanship: All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with recommendations
of the manufacturer to conform to the contract documents. The installation shall be accomplished by
workmen skilled in this type of work. All workmen must be TIA/EIA certified for Category 6 systems.
Delivery and Storage: Material shall be delivered in manufacturer’s original unopened containers,
plainly labeled with manufacturer’s names and brands. Equipment placed in storage shall be
protected from any damage or degradation in performance due to the storage environment.
SCOPE OF WORK
Work by Contractor: The Contractor is to furnish and install all items necessary, stated herein or
not, to furnish the Owner with a functional telecommunications system.
1.
Contractor shall provide a system including: All 4-pair UTP copper and outlets, faceplates,
patch panels, patch cords, racks, shelves, cable ties, cable management devices, wire
basket cable tray, J-hooks, seismic bracing, termination blocks, cross-connect wire,
grounding of telecommunications equipment, ground bars, and any other items required for a
complete “turnkey” telecommunications system.
2.
Plug strips for attachment to equipment racks.
3.
Documentation of installed work, including labeling each cable, faceplate, patch panel port,
termination location at the telecommunications closet, creation of as-built drawings and a
computer based documentation system.
4.
A channel test of each horizontal cable from the cross-connect to the workstation outlet.
5.
Fire stopping of all penetrations through fire rated barriers created as a pathway for cabling.
6.
Training of Owner appointed persons to operate and maintain the installed system. Training
shall include a description of the system, a tour of the facilities and an explanation of the
cable tester used and the testing documentation provided.
7.
Cutting, patching and painting associated with the work for which the Contractor is
responsible.
8.
Furnishing and installation of all conduits, sleeves, mud rings, junction boxes, pull boxes,
fittings, floor boxes, cable tray, etc., as required to facilitate the work specified herein and on
the drawings.
9.
Pull tapes in all conduits.
10.
Labeling of all conduits and junction boxes associated with telecommunications cabling.
11.
Furnishing and installation of telecommunications backboards, filled, sanded, primed and
painted with two coats of flame retardant grey paint.
12.
Coordination with other trades.
13.
Equipment shall be connected to building cabling by cross-connection. Interconnection of
equipment, that is, the direct connection of equipment to building cabling without a patch
cord, will not be allowed. Provide patch cords in required lengths and numbers.
14.
Provide a direct telephone line out form Principal’s Office that bypasses the PBX system.
Work By Others
1.
The furnishing and installation of a telephone switch is not included.
2.
The furnishing and installation of active equipment is not included in the scope of this project.
Active equipment is defined as equipment that requires a 120 volt power source to operate.
Examples of active equipment include computers, servers, routers, hubs, telephones, data
switches, facsimiles and modems.
The Drawings and the Specifications do not describe all work required to achieve the intent of the
Contract Documents. The Drawings and the Specifications are intended to set forth standards of
quality and performance desired by the Owner.
The Contract Document Drawings depicting equipment installation and wiring are diagrammatic and
indicate the general arrangement of the same. The most direct routing of conduits, and wireways is
not assured. Exact requirements shall be governed by architectural, structural, and mechanical
conditions on the job. Coordinate with and consult the drawings of other trades.
16740 - 2/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16740
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
E.
F.
G.
1.5
A.
No work shall be concealed until after inspection and approval by the proper authorities. If work is
concealed without inspection and approval, the party that concealed said work shall be responsible
for all work required to open and restore the concealed areas, in addition to all required
modifications.
The Owner reserves the right to specify a new location of any outlet or telecommunications
equipment without increasing contract cost providing that the new location is specified prior to
rough-in and is not further than 10 feet from the originally specified location.
If, in the opinion of the Contractor, an installation practice is desired or required that is contrary to
the Contract Documents, a written request for modification shall be made to the Architect/Engineer
for approval.
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
All work must follow the guidelines set forth by telecommunications industry standards, unless
specifically instructed to follow an alternate method. The Contractor is expected to have a working
knowledge of the following standards:
1.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
2.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
3.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI), Telecommunications Distribution
Methods Manual (TDM
4.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
5.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
6.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces
7.
ANSI/TIA/EIA TSB67: Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of
Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems
8.
IEEE 802.3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTION
BRAND NAME DISCLAIMER: Where only one brand name is listed, the use of a brand name item
is to set a standard of quality and is not intended to restrict the Contractor from offering an item from
other source(s) of supply as approved by the Architect/Engineer.
SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall submit, for approval, manufacturer’s literature for the following items:
1.
Telecommunications Outlets (modules and faceplates)
2.
Copper Cables
3.
Equipment Racks and Related Seismic Restraints
4.
Patch Panels (fiber and copper) and Connection Blocks (copper)
5.
Patch Cords
6.
Raceway Cable Hooks
7.
Multimode fiber optic cable
Shop Drawings
1.
The Contractor shall submit, for approval, the following drawings:
Detailed riser diagram.
a.
Equipment rack elevations illustrating vertical location of terminal equipment (e.g.,
fiber, patch panels, etc.)
b.
Mounting and attachment details, including any seismic restraints, illustrating the
connection of equipment racks to the structure, and the connection of the specified
cable tray to the equipment racks.
As-Built Drawings and Cable List
16740 - 3/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16740
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
1.
The Contractor shall provide the following as-built drawings to the Owner’s Representatives:
A complete riser diagram showing cable routing.
a.
Finalized equipment rack elevations illustrating vertical location of terminal equipment.
b.
Finalized mounting and attachment details illustrating the connection of equipment
racks to the structure, and connection to the equipment racks.
c.
Finalized outlet layout floor plans including Owner-assigned room numbers and outlet
numbers.
The Contractor shall provide the Owner’s Representative with cable run sheets indicating the source
and destination terminal points for all cabling. Contractor shall provide both one hard copy of the
run sheets and a computer file on disk. Information on the run sheets shall include:
1.
Cable source
2.
Cable destination
3.
Cable type (e.g., horizontal cable)
4.
Generic cable specifications (e.g., CAT6)
5.
Manufacturer’s cable specification number
6.
Cable jacket color
7.
Cable label number
Test Results
1.
The Contractor shall provide to the Owner’s Representative one hard copy and a computer
file on a DVD of all test results.
Contractor shall submit Contractor’s foreman qualifications, and qualifications of all workmen
involved in Catergory 6 work.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete data and communications distribution system
including, but not limited to, data and telephone cable, telephone tie cable, J-hooks, raceway,
equipment rack, cable termination equipment, outlets, patch panels, and connecting blocks, as
indicated on plans.
All cross connection/patch cord cables shall be provided by Contractor. All patch cords factory
made to proper lengths. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s Representative and make all
cross connections as directed.
Complete system testing and certification shall be included.
A.
B.
C.
2.4
A.
C.
D.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
The telecommunications “system” shall include outlets, cables, patch cords, connecting blocks, and
patch panels.
B.
The telecommunications system performance shall meet all ANSI/TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC
CHANNEL requirements for Category 6.
The system shall support Gigabit Ethernet applications.
The system shall be fully downward compatible with existing Category 5 hardware to be installed by
Owner.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
WARRANTY
The wiring distribution system shall have a manufacturer’s warranty which guarantees that the
cables and termination equipment (including outlets and all telecommunications rooms components)
shall be free from defects in material, workmanship and fabrication for a period of fifteen years
following the date of delivery of such products to the customer. The manufacturer shall also warranty
the performance as described in paragraph 1.5 for fifteen years.
COORDINATION
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s Representative to determine how all crossconnections are to be made.
16740 - 4/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16740
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
2.7
A.
B.
2.8
A.
2.9
A.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
BRAND NAME DISCLAIMER
The use of a brand name item is to set a standard of quality and is not intended to restrict the
Contractor from offering an item from other source(s) of supply as approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
Preferred manufacturer is Leviton.
OUTLET COMPONENTS
Products of Amp and Lucent Technologies as approved by Architect/Engineer are acceptable.
Architect/Engineer to select color from standard colors.
1.
Single-gang faceplate
Siemon MX-FP-S-04-XX
2.
Double-gang faceplate
Siemon MX-FP-D-08-XX
3.
Wall phone faceplate
Siemon MX-WP-SS
4.
Data module – Category 6
Siemon MX6-XX
5.
Voice module – Category 6
Siemon MX6-XX
6.
Wall phone module – Category 6
Siemon MX6-K(XX)
7.
Blank insert
Siemon MX-BL-XX
8.
Rubber jack covers
Siemon MX-AD-XX
FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS
SC duplex connector
Siemon FC2-SC-MM-J
EQUIPMENT RACK COMPONENTS ( See Detail, Electrical Detail Sheet)
48-Port telco patch panel kit
Siemon CT-PNL-24-U2-01
48-Port voice/data patch panel kit
Siemon MX-PNL-48 (# of patch panels as required by
cabling plus
twenty percent)
Data module – Category 6
Siemon MX6-F (XX)
Voice module – Category 6
Siemon MX6-F (XX)
Fiber module – duplex SC
Siemon MX-F-SC-(XX)
Fiber interconnect center
Siemon RIC24F-(XX)
SC adapter cables
SiemonRIC-F-SC8-(XX)
Fiber storage center
Siemon FSC3-(XX)
Bend radius guide
Siemon BRG2-02
19”x7’ equipment rack (4-Pole)
Chatsworth 55053-503
19”x7’ equipment rack (4-Pole)
Chatsworth 46383-503
26” deep shelf (2 per 19” rack)
Chatsworth 11054-523
Sliding keyboard tray (2 per 23’ rack) Chatsworth 11690-532
Heavy duty shelf (2 per 23” rack)
Chatsworth 11164-523
6”x7’ vertical wire management rack Chatsworth 11374-503
Rack grounding kit (1 per rack) Chatsworth 41026-006
70” power strip (1 per rack)
Chatsworth 12070-701
Rear wire minder
Siemon WM-BK
Front wire manager
Siemon S110-RWM-01
2.11
A.
B.
C.
D.
MAIN TERMINAL BOARD MOUNTED COMPONENTS
Cross-connect frame
Siemon CC-2014-TB-DC
Standard S66 blocks
Siemon S66M1-50
Prewired S66 blocks
Siemon S66M2-5W
Ground bar kit
Chatsworth 10622-010
2.12
A.
B.
NETWORK ROOM EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS
19”x7’ Equipment Rack (4-Pole)
Chatsworth 55053-503
48-Port voice/data patch panel kit
Siemon MX-PNL-48 ( # of patch panels as required plus
20%)
Data module – Category 6
Siemon MX6-F (XX)
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
16740 - 5/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16740
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.13
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Voice module – Category 6
Rack mount cable manager
Fiber Interconnect Center
Fiber Module – Duplex SC
SC Adaptor Cables
Fiber Storage Center
Siemon MX6-F (XX)
Siemon WM-144-5
Siemon RIC-24-(XX)
Siemon MX-F-SC-(XX)
Siemon RIC-F-SC12-(XX)
Siemon FSC3-(XX)
CABLE
The following vendors are acceptable manufacturers of UTP copper cables: CommScope, General
Cable, Mohawk Wire and Cable, Berk-Tek/Nexans, and Belden Wire & Cable. The Contractor may
submit cables made by other manufacturers for consideration of approval. (At the time of writing,
the manufacturers listed above are “cable allies” of the Siemon Company. The Contractor shall
submit cables of manufacturers that are current “cable allies” of Siemon, Amp or Lucent.)
Voice and data horizontal UTP cable: 100 ohm, 24 AWG solid bare copper, 4-pair UTP, Category 6,
plenum rated jacket.
25-pair telco cross-connect cable: Ortronics OR-801025P series in length as required to connect IT
Rooms.
12 strand, 50um, duplex, multimode fiber optic cable in length as required to connect IT Rooms.
Fiber to be in plenum rated inter-duct.
All wire and cable to be Plenum rated.
2.14
A.
B.
C.
PATCH CORDS
Provide factory terminated patch cords. Field terminated cords will not be accepted.
Double-ended, 4-pair stranded modular cord, Category 6 Siemon MC6-8T-(XX)-B(XX)
Fiber jumper, multimode duplex, SC-SC
Siemon FJ2-SCSC(X)MM-(XX)
2.15
A.
B.
C.
D.
TERMINAL BOARDS
¾” AC Plywood Construction
Paint board with two (2) coats of white fire-treated enamel.
Provide #4AWG ground from ground bar to service ground.
Size as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
F.
G.
GENERAL
In performing the work, the Contractor shall adhere to all applicable professional practices including
but not limited to the standards set forth in the Contract Documents governing the installation of
telecommunications wiring and associated components.
Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware, wire managers, connectors, modules, patch panels,
cables, etc., as required by the Contract Documents and the manufacturer for complete and
warranted installation.
System shall be installed completely so all aspects of installation are finished and functioning to the
satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and Architect/Engineer.
The system shall be installed, pass required tests, and demonstrate to the Contracting Officer and
Architect/Engineer before being placed in service.
The installation of all cable, outlets, and rack equipment shall be done by a Contractor meeting the
requirements of section 1.1 B. of this section.
Contractor shall use installation tools that are required or recommended by the manufacturer.
All wiring shall be terminated to the T586A scheme of the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 standard.
A.
INSTALLATION
System Topology
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
ACE, Inc.
JK
16740 - 6/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16740
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
1.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Horizontal cabling (defined as the cabling from the cross-connect to the telecommunications
outlet) shall be installed in a star topology. Bridged taps (daisy chain) shall not be used.
2.
The Owner’s equipment shall be connected to the building cabling by the cross-connection
connection scheme. Interconnection of equipment, that is, the direct connection of equipment
to building cabling without a patch cord, will not be allowed.
Outlet Installation
1.
Install telecommunications outlets complete including modules, blank inserts, faceplates,
rubber jack covers, labels and icons.
2.
Each room’s telecommunications outlet(s) shall be duplicated at the patch panel with voice
and data modules grouped by room with voice above data.
Cable Installation
1.
Install blue 4-pair data cable on bottom, and white 4-pair voice cable on top, number of
cables are indicated on plans, from each telecommunications outlet location to the patch
panel mounted in the equipment rack.
2.
Install service loops in all cables. These loops shall be placed at the racks and backboards
and at the outlets upon termination of the cables. Provide an 36 inch service loop at the
outlet and a 3 foot loop at the racks and backboards. All cables shall be carefully dressed
into cable trays, racks, etc. for maximum appearance value and ease of maintenance.
TIA/EIA cable dressing requirements shall be carefully observed.
3.
Install cable without damaging conductors or jacket. Do not bend cable to a smaller radius
than minimum recommended by manufacturer. Bends in cable shall never exceed 90°. Do
not exceed manufacturer’s recommended pulling tensions. Pull cables simultaneously where
more than one is being installed in the same raceway or at the same location. Use pulling
compound or lubricant where necessary. Compound used must not damage conductor or
insulation. Use pulling methods that will not damage cable or raceway, including fish tape,
cable, rope, and wire-cable grips.
4.
The length of cable between the telecommunications outlet and the horizontal cross-connect
shall not exceed 90 meters (295 feet).
5.
The length of UTP cross-connect jumpers, patch cords or optical fiber jumpers in the crossconnects shall not exceed 5 meter (16 feet).
6.
Install cables parallel to and at right angles to walls. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to
terminal points with no excess. Use wire distribution spools at points where cables are fanned
or conductors turned. Cables shall be continuous runs with no splices. Terminate all cables at
outlet and patch panel locations.
7.
Splices shall not be used for horizontal UTP cabling.
8.
No more than one optical fiber splices shall be permitted in the cabling between a given
transmitter and receiver.
Terminations
1.
General
Separate termination areas for copper and fiber cabling terminations shall be provided
in each of the telecommunications rooms.
a.
Loose wires not retained by rings or other similar devices shall be tie wrapped at each
breakout point.
b.
All cabling shall be bonded and grounded per NEC codes and regulations.
c.
All terminations at outlets and equipment rack shall be done in a neat fashion.
Maintain twists in wire. A maximum of ½” untwisting shall be allowed. Minimize jacket
removal of cable to that necessary for termination.
d.
Voice cables shall be terminated on S66 connecting blocks at the Main Point of Entry
(The CenturyTel demarcation point.) and in patch panels, like data cables, elsewhere.
Identification
1.
All patch panels, connecting blocks, outlets, etc., shall be clearly, logically, and permanently
labeled during installation. Each patch panel port and corresponding workstation outlet shall
be labeled with the room number where the outlet is located. If there are multiple outlets in a
room, the numbering shall include a hyphen suffix designation, such as: 232-A, 232-B and
16740 - 7/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16740
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
F.
G.
3.3
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
shall begin at the main doorway and proceed left to right around the room. No hyphen where
only one outlet is installed in a room. Use of laminated nameplates on racks and large
equipment boxes shall be required. CONFIRM ROOM NUMBERS WITH THE OWNER’S
REPRESENTATIVE BEFORE LABELING. THE ROOM NUMBERS CHOSEN BY THE
OWNER MAY DIFFER FROM THE ROOM NUMBERS OF THE DRAWINGS.
2.
The distinction between voice and data cabling shall be made by color: blue for voice and red
for data. Provide red or blue plugs, as appropriate, at both the telecommunications outlet and
at the patch panel for horizontal cabling, and at both ends of patch cords.
3.
Label all cables both at the outlet and equipment rack with vinyl wire markers. Cables shall be
labeled in a manner similar to system described above: i.e. 232-A, 232-B, etc.
Raceways and Boxes
1.
All raceway shall be installed in accordance with Sections 16110, 16114, and 16130.
2.
Provide 1 1/4” raceway from each telecommunications outlet into accessible ceiling space, or
terminate the raceway on the cable tray. Bush both ends of the raceway and bond to the
cable tray.
3.
Provide IMC conduit sleeves through walls wherever cables will pass through walls. Bush
both ends of sleeves. Not all sleeves required are shown on the Contract Drawings; provide
as required. Cables penetrating walls without being enclosed in raceways or sleeves will not
be allowed.
4.
Do not exceed 40 percent maximum fill of raceways and sleeves.
5.
Provide fire stopping of openings made in fire rated assemblies.
6.
Contractor shall install minimum 2-1/2” deep by 4 11/16” square boxes at all
telecommunications outlet locations. Provide single or double gang plaster rings as required.
7.
Continuous conduit runs shall not exceed 100 feet or contain more than two 90 degree bends
without using appropriately sized pull boxes.
Equipment Rack
1.
The equipment rack shall be constructed using approved materials and configured as
detailed on drawings.
2.
Provide all miscellaneous installation hardware such as screws, brackets, hangers,
equipment trays, etc. which may not be called out on detail, but are required for installation
which is acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
3.
All equipment racks shall have dedicated vertical power strip mounted back of rack.
4.
Install rack with vertical and horizontal supports to meet seismic zone 3 requirements.
5.
Refer to equipment rack installation detail.
6.
All racks shall be 4-pole construction.
TESTING
General
1.
All testing shall be done by the Contractor under the supervision of the Owner’s
Representative. Any cable test reports submitted for cable or system tests which were not
supervised shall be rejected and the test shall be redone at Contractor’s expense.
2.
Furnish two copies of test results to Architect/Engineer for review and comment and make all
necessary changes to equipment and wiring as required to rectify any failed test results.
Retest all work affected by deficiencies.
3.
Provide at least ten (10) days notice in writing to the Owner’s representative when the system
is ready for final acceptance testing.
4.
Results shall be presented to and accepted by the Architect/Engineer and the Contracting
Officer prior to acceptance of the project as complete. Testing shall be in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommended procedures and in accordance with the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B
standard. Test results shall be made available in disk form and in hard copy.
Category 6 Cable Testing
1.
Testing for compliance with Category 6 shall be in conformance with the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B standard. Test reports shall be generated with computer software as part of the testing
system. Hand typed or written reports shall not be acceptable. Testing shall be done with a
16740 - 8/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16740
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
C.
3.4
A.
B.
MICROTEST OMNIScanner, or approved equal, for Windows software which will test and
give a printout for, but not limited to, the following:
Wire map
a.
Length
b.
NEXT Loss pair-to-pair (both ends)
c.
NEXT Loss power sum (both ends)
d.
ELFEXT pair-to-pair (both ends)
e.
ELFEXT power sum (both ends)
f.
Attenuation
g.
Return Loss
h.
Propagation Delay
i.
Delay Skew
j.
Capacitance
k.
Attenuation-to-Crosswalk Ratio (ACR)
l.
Loop Residence
m.
Impedance
2.
Each cable shall be 100 percent tested and retested until a PASS result for each of the
parameters listed above is obtained. Only PASS results shall be stored in the field testers
database.
3.
All field testers shall be factory calibrated by the field test manufacturer per the requirements
in the test equipment manufacturers manual that is provided with the field tester. Calibration
certificates for field testers shall be provided to the Owner’s Representative upon request.
4.
Autotest setting provided in the field tester for testing the installed cabling shall be set to the
default parameters. Any autotest settings that have modified to change test parameters may
disqualify the test results.
5.
The minimum cable test length shall be 50 feet. When testing shorter runs, a patch cord of
adequate length should be employed from the injector to the faceplate to make the overall
channel longer than 50 feet.
Fiber Optic Cable Testing
1.
Testing of optical fibers shall be performed with an approved power meter and light source.
2.
Guidelines and requirements for connections, test configuration and measurement
procedures specified in the manuals provided with the optical fiber tester shall be followed.
Testing shall be in conformance with the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B standard.
3.
All power meters shall be factory calibrated by the field test manufacturer per the
requirements in the test manufacturers manual provided wit the field tester. Calibration
certificates for field testers shall be provided to the Owner’s Representative upon request.
4.
Connector dB loss shall not exceed 0.5 dB per connector or 1.0 dB per connector pair.
5.
Splice dB loss shall not exceed 0.3 dB per splice.
CERTIFICATION
At contract completion, the Contractor shall provide a letter to the Architect/Engineer. That letter
should substantially contain the following:
1.
“We, the undersigned, having been selected by the Contractor and Installer, do hereby certify
that these systems are installed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommended
procedures. The system has been thoroughly tested and is complete and fully operational. It
has been demonstrated to the Owner’s Representative and was accepted as complete.”
Provide certificate of warranty as described in Part 1.
END OF SECTION - 16740
ACE, Inc.
JK
16740 - 9/9
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16760
INTERGRATED INTERCOM/TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All bids shall be based on the equipment as specified herein. The catalog numbers and model
designations are that of the RAULAND-BORG CORPORATION.
Bidders wishing to submit alternate equipment shall submit to the specifying authority, at least
10 days prior to bid opening, the equipment proposed to provide a precise functional equivalent
system to meet specifications. Bidder shall provide adequate information prior to bid date such
as specification sheets, working drawings, shop drawings, and a demonstration of the system.
Alternate supplier-contractor must also provide a list to include six installations of the identical
system proposed which have been in operation for a period of two years.
Final approval of the alternate system shall be determined at the time of job completion. Failure
to provide the "precise functional equivalent" shall result in the removal of the alternate system
at the contractor's expense.
The intercom system shall be fully intergratable with the Owner provided Sysco telephone
system.
ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS CONTRACTORS
Communications Systems Inc.
Simplex Grinnell
Rocky Mountain Fire Systems Inc.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
1.
Basic Electrical Requirements.
2.
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
SUMMARY
This Section includes Integrated Intercom/Telecommunications System. It includes
requirements for system components including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Ceiling/Wall Mounted Speaker Assemblies.
2.
One-Touch Emergency Notification
3.
Normal and Normal/Emergency Intercom Call Buttons.
4.
Bell/Class Change Signaling System.
5.
Public Address/Intercom System.
6.
Administrative Digital Readout Displays.
7.
Controls, Amplifiers, and Terminal Equipment.
8.
Power supplies.
9.
Wiring.
10. Wall-mounted Paging Horns.
11. Volume Attenuators.
12. Master Clock.
13. Secondary Clocks.
14. Program Sources – Tuner, Cassette, CD
15. Door Contact Alarms
Related Sections: The following Division 16 Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1.
Section 16110: Raceways & Fittings
2.
Section 16130: Outlet Boxes
16760 - 1/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16760
INTERGRATED INTERCOM/TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
3.
1.5
A.
B.
1.6
A.
B.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Section 16740: Telephone/Data System
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
General: Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, and materials in accordance with these
specifications and drawings to provide a complete and operating Integrated Intercom/clock/call
system for Rock Springs School.
All costs associated with procurement of telephone circuits from the serving telephone utility
shall be borne by the Owner. The Contractor shall act under a letter of agency as the Owner’s
representative in all matters concerning procurement of these circuits. All costs shall be
identified by this Contractor.
LETTER OF AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall assume total system responsibility in coordinating all inter-building wiring,
common carrier provided network facilities, and Owner provided equipment.
The Contractor shall obtain a limited letter of agency from the Owner, authorizing direct
communication and coordination with other vendors which may be involved in work that must
be interfaced to this system (i.e. Owner provided Sysco Telephone System). The Owner shall
retain final approval authority for any circuits, facilities, or services that are to be ordered on his
behalf.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections:
1.
Submit equipment prints, inter-panel and intra-panel, full electronic wiring diagrams and
specification sheets for each item specified herein. Provide a tabulation of the
specification clearly comparing the submitted item with the specified item, being able to
refer to all written expressed functions and capabilities. Specification Sheets shall be
submitted on all items including cable types.
2.
Shop drawings, detailing Integrated Electronic Communications Network system
including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Built-in station arrangement.
b.
Equipment cabinet arrangement.
3.
Wiring diagrams, detailing wiring for power, signal, and control, differentiating clearly
between manufacturer -installed wiring and field-installed wiring. Identify terminals to
facilitate installation, operation and maintenance.
4.
Submit wiring diagrams showing typical connections for all equipment.
5.
Provide a riser diagram for the system showing in technically accurate detail all
connections, interconnections, and all provisions available and made for adaptability of
all specified future functions. In addition, riser diagram must include all calculations,
charts, and test data necessary to demonstrate that all systems and system components
deliver the specified signals, grades, and levels at all required points and locations.
6.
Submit a certificate of completion of installation and service training.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the manufacturer to
function as a complete system and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's complete
service notes and drawings detailing all interconnections.
The contractor shall be an established communications and electronics contractor that has had
and currently maintains a locally run and operated business for at least 5 years. The contractor
shall utilize a duly authorized distributor of the equipment supplied for this project location with
full manufacturer's warranty privileges.
The contractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that the supplier maintains a
fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the
system. The supplier shall maintain at his facility the necessary spare parts in the proper
16760 - 2/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16760
INTERGRATED INTERCOM/TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.9
A.
B.
proportion as recommended by the manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment being
supplied.
Electrical Component Standard: Provide work complying with applicable requirements of NFPA
70 "National Electrical Code" including, but not limited to:
1.
Article 250, Grounding.
2.
Article 300, Part A. Wiring Method.
3.
Article 310, Conductors for General Wiring.
4.
Article 725, Remote Control, Signaling Circuits.
5.
Article 800, Communication Systems.
EIA Compliance: Comply with the following Electronics Industries Association Standards:
1.
Sound Systems, EIA-160.
2.
Loudspeakers, Dynamic Magnetic Structures, and Impedance, EIA-299-A.
3.
Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment, EIA-310-A.
4.
Amplifiers for Sound Equipment, SE-101-A.
5.
Speakers for Sound Equipment, SE-103.
Installation and start up of all systems shall be under the direct supervision of a local agency
regularly engaged in installation, repair, and maintenance of such systems. The supplier shall
be accredited by the proposed equipment manufacturers and be prepared to offer a service
contract for system maintenance on completion of the guarantee period and provide the names,
locations, and size of five (5) recent successful installations in the area.
The agency providing equipment shall be responsible for providing all specified equipment and
mentioned services for all equipment as specified herein. The agency must be a local
authorized distributor of all specified equipment for single source of responsibility and shall
provide documents proving such. The agency must provide written proof that the agency is
adequately staffed with factory-trained technicians for all of the specified equipment.
The contractor shall guarantee availability of local service by factory-trained personnel of all
specified equipment from an authorized distributor of all equipment specified under this section.
On-the-premise maintenance shall be provided at no cost to the purchaser for a period of one
(1) year (parts and labor) from date of acceptance unless damage or failure is caused by
misuse, abuse, neglect, or accident. Additionally, all manufacturer supplied products must be
covered by a five (5) year (parts only) limited warranty from the date of acceptance. The
warranty period shall begin on the date of acceptance by the owner/engineer.
The contractor shall, at the owner’s request, make available a service contract offering
continuing factory authorized service of the system after the initial warranty period.
The supplier shall visit the sites and familiarize himself with the existing conditions and field
requirements prior to submitting a proposal.
IN-SERVICE TRAINING & PROGRAMMING
The contractor shall provide a minimum of sixteen (16) hours of in-service training from a
manufacturer’s service representative with this system. These sessions shall be broken into
segments that will facilitate the training of individuals in the operation of this system. Operators
Manuals and Users Guides shall be provided at the time of this training.
The contractor, prior to programming the system, shall provide ample time to explain all system
options to the Owner and assist in selecting options that meet the Owner’s needs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
ACE, Inc.
JK
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Rauland-Borg.
The intent of this specification is to establish a standard of quality, function and features. It is
the responsibility of the bidder to insure that the proposed product meets or exceeds every
standard set forth in these specifications.
16760 - 3/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16760
INTERGRATED INTERCOM/TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
ACE, Inc.
JK
The functions and features specified are vital to the operation of this facility, therefore, the
acceptance of alternate manufacturers does not release contractor from strict compliance with
the requirements of this specification.
The Contractor for this work shall be held to have read all of the Bidding Requirements, the
General Requirements of Division 1, and Contract Proposal Forms; and in the execution of this
work, he will be bound by all of the conditions and requirements therein.
The contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete functional system including all
necessary components whether included in this specification or not.
In preparing the bid, the bidder should consider the following:
1.
No claim will be made against the owner for any costs incurred by the bidder for any
equipment demonstrations which the owner requests.
Any prior approval of an alternate system does not automatically exempt the supplier from
meeting the intent of these specifications. Failure to comply with the operational and functional
intent of these specifications may result in the total removal of the alternate system at the
expense of the contractor.
Alternate equipment shall be considered if submitted to the specifying authority at least ten (10)
days prior to bid date. Submission of an alternate shall contain engineering drawings of the
system with specification sheets covering all components of the system. The system and
equipment drawings and specifications sheet shall meet all items of the specification.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL:
1.
The system shall provide the state of the art in technology intercom communications,
emergency call-in notification, life safety paging, electronic door holder release, and
evacuation tones, secondary clock corrections, and bell schedule. The system shall be
easy to learn and operate. All standard system programming shall be user friendly to
allow the system administrator the ability to easily program system features.
Provide complete and satisfactorily operating Integrated Intercom/Telecommunications System
as described herein, using materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings, and performances
as indicated. Use materials and equipment that comply with referenced standards and
manufacturer’s standard design and construction, in accordance with published product
information. Coordinate the features of all materials and equipment so they form an integrated
system, with components and interconnections matched for optimum performance of specified
functions.
Features offered by this system shall be implemented and controlled by software programs that
can be changed and expanded as customer needs evolve.
The system shall allow system monitoring and administration from a local Windows XP PC or
remote Windows XP PC via a modem. The contractor shall provide all necessary software for
this purpose.
The system shall be an electronic system consisting of amplified intercom channels,
(classroom) speakers, call switches, and solid state logic and sensing.
Ability to provide multiple zone program distribution which is not interrupted by intercom
communications.
Ability to initiate life-safety paging announcements, evacuation tones, take cover tones to any
location within the facility.
Ability to selectively communicate or monitor individual classrooms in emergency situations; all
communication within the classroom shall be hands free and will not require any interaction by
the end-user to answer.
The system shall lend itself to expansion by simple addition of modules.
The central switching system shall provide for switching of the intercom talk path to a telephone
mode, during the course of a call, should the user press the “transfer” button.
Ability to release all electronic door holders in the event of a “Panic”. Panic calls shall be
administered from Admin 102, Teacher Lounge 188, and Principal 103 ONLY. Provide
16760 - 4/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16760
INTERGRATED INTERCOM/TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
2.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
separate call button adjacent to normal call button and label “Panic”. Panic button will alert
Emergency to intercom and release all door holders.
Two-way communication between any telephone and any room speaker.
Room speakers and call switches shall be programmable and may be assigned any three, four
or five digit number. Any extension may be reassigned at any time, and it shall not be
dependent on wiring or circuit numbers.
Twelve (12) separate paging zones shall be provided; each location shall be programmed in
software to belong to any combination of software zones. Initially, zones shall be provided for
the following:
1.
One zone for inside classroom speakers per grade-level.
2.
One zone for gymnasium speakers.
3.
One zone for corridor speakers.
4.
One zone for common areas.
5.
One zone for administrative areas.
6.
One zone for teachers' lounge and workrooms.
7.
One zone for outside speakers, there are no “bells”.
The intercom system shall be compatible with the Owner’s phone system to allow each dialing
administrative or staff telephone in the system to be programmed for the following options:
1.
Allow zone paging.
2.
Allow All-Page announcements.
3.
Allow Executive Override.
4.
Allow Emergency paging.
5.
Allow activation of Time Zone tones.
6.
Set the priority level and target display of "normal" calls.
7.
Set the priority level and target display of "emergency" calls.
8.
Assignment of architectural number.
9.
Assignment of associated speaker to paging zone.
Amplified two-way voice communication shall be available from any dial phone in the system,
through any speaker in the system. This shall allow hands-free communication to any
classroom or any individual loudspeaker unit. A programmable pre-announce tone shall sound
immediately before the intercom path is opened and a supervisory tone shall continue to sound
at regular intervals when speaker monitoring is active.
The system shall be UL listed to the UL1950 Third Edition standard.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
CENTRAL CONTROLLER UNIT
The Integrated Electronic Communications Network shall have the following capabilities:
1.
Facilities for multiple operations simultaneously without interference with an established
pattern of priorities for all administrator/classroom communication capabilities.
2.
Facilities for centralized attendant answering.
3.
The system shall provide Personal Identification Numbers for selected administrators. By
dialing their PIN at any system telephone, the administrator shall have access to the
same intercom/paging capabilities assigned to their office telephone, regardless of the
restrictions on the phone they are currently using.
4.
Facilities for the central control unit to store information and give reports on features,
system activity, etc. upon request either on site or remotely.
5.
Facilities for automatically sounding a warning tone signal over any loudspeaker selected
for two-way communications to alert the station attendant (classroom teacher) to the call
and prevent unauthorized monitoring.
6.
Facilities for access to any single loudspeaker unit, zone loudspeaker unit, or all
loudspeaker units. The warning tone signal shall sound as soon as the station is
selected and shall be automatically repeated at regular intervals for the duration of the
call if the voice circuit is not activated.
16760 - 5/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16760
INTERGRATED INTERCOM/TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
ACE, Inc.
JK
The Central Controller Unit shall provide an RS-232 port for the connection of on-site or
off-site diagnostics by distributor or factory-trained personnel.
a.
This port shall be usable for the programming and saving of all programmed data
for each system with the utilization of an on-site or off-site computer.
b.
This port shall provide the capability of logging of various activities within the
system.
Facilities for executive override permitting an assigned telephone to "override" on-going
intercom conversation(s) in the system.
Facilities for the instantaneous distribution of emergency announcements
simultaneously, by a single button access, to all locations equipped with speakers.
a.
Emergency announcements originating from any assigned administrative
telephone shall have priority over all regular system functions.
Facilities for the distribution of alarm signals to all areas equipped with speakers by
single button access.
a.
Up to nine (9) separate distinct alarm signals shall be provided. Each of the
distinct alarm signals can be activated by a designated single button.
Capability for assigning speaker locations to any one or more of the twelve (12) zones for
zone paging, up to twelve (12) zones for program distribution, six (6) zones for class
change “bells”, and up to six (6) security zones. All of these zones may be configured to
be independent of the other zones.
Facilities for the origination of “alarm” calls from any location equipped with door/window
contacts or, motion detectors.
It shall be possible to review all calls stored in memory in the order received.
Facilities for answering calls registered in the digital read-out display merely by pressing
a single response button. This capability shall not prevent other calls from being placed
or answered by dialing their numbers.
Facilities to cancel all staff station originated calls from any administrative telephone.
Facilities for assigning or changing classroom numbers by architectural or any desired
numbering system; either three-digit, four-digit, or five-digit numbers may be assigned.
Facilities for multiple loudspeaker or telephone conversations to take place and not
prevent announcements, educational, or music programs from being distributed to other
areas of the building.
A facility to notify a user that the intercom path called earlier is now available. If a busy
signal is obtained, user shall dial callback feature code and hang up. System shall
automatically call back user when intercom path is available and complete an intercom
call to speaker.
Facilities for universal wiring for all data network, telephones, intercom speakers, and call
switches using category 6 cable. Systems requiring a custom cable plant dedicated to
just the intercom system will not be acceptable.
Facilities to provide automatic emergency instructions to be broadcast to the entire
school when an alarm is tripped. The emergency instructions are preprogrammed and
require no user intervention.
Facilities to provide redundant security annunciation when interfaced with the primary
security system. The redundant annunciation will announce via tones and/or a voice
prompt of the nature of the emergency.
Facilities to automatically ring the dialing staff telephone should the intercom path to the
associated intercom speaker be unavailable.
Facilities for single button access to allow page announcements into speaker zones
without interrupting others performing simultaneous functions.
Facilities to page one or more area-wide pocket pagers when a call is placed of a specific
call priority or all call priorities. The pocket pager will display the calling room number
and a numeric call priority. One (1) ICSTIM interface module required.
Facilities to automatically alter a call switch’s class of service by time of day and date as
directed by the owner.
16760 - 6/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16760
INTERGRATED INTERCOM/TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
26.
B.
C.
D.
ACE, Inc.
JK
It shall be possible to initiate Class of Service changes either manually or automatically
on a per station basis using internal clock set.
a.
A minimum of four independent program memory sets shall be provided.
b.
Choice of time of service change and active memory set selected shall be
completely programmable.
1) Class of Service Changes shall be programmable by time of day and date.
2) A minimum of 64 unique classes of service shall be available.
27. Capability for assigning speaker locations to any one or more of the zones for zone
paging or time signal reception; this assignment to be a programmable function.
28. Time signal tones shall be generated on a manual or automatic basis.
29. Emergency tones shall be distributed from designated Administrative Telephones.
30. Power amplifiers shall meet all specifications exactly as specified herein, including power
capacity and count. Power amplifier shall be BIAMP MPA series.
EMERGENCY/NORMAL CALL SWITCH
Emergency/Normal Call Switches indicated on the drawings shall provide functions as
scheduled below and shall be equal to Rauland-Borg TC series:
1.
Provide two (2) “Emergency” call switches that shall activate a distinctive “EMER” level
call from a single button activation. Button shall be clearly marked “EMER” and shall
route call to any one or more Administrative Telephones and/or Displays for quick and
easy response from an Administrative Telephone. In accordance with the Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA), the “Emergency” call will provide a flashing call assurance
LED confirming that the call has been placed in the system.
2.
Provide “Normal” call switches that shall activate a distinctive “NORM” level call from a
single button activation. Button shall be clearly marked “NORM” and shall route call to
any one or more Administrative Telephones and/or Displays for quick and easy response
from an Administrative Telephone. In accordance with the Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA), the “Normal” call will provide a steady call assurance LED confirming that the
call has been placed in the system.
PROGRAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
1.
The system shall provide facilities to distribute program material (i.e. cassette tape, CD,
radio broadcasts) in the following manner:
a.
The media operator shall cue remotely located music source or select radio
station.
b.
The media operator shall dial from an Administrative Telephone to select the
room(s) or areas to distribute program. Dial-up program distribution shall be
accessible from the system. System shall include Rauland-Borg MCX 325
AM/FM CD player, or equal.
2.
Power amplifiers shall meet all specifications exactly as specified herein, including power
capacity and count, provide a minimum of ½ watt power to all intercom speaker locations
plus 15 watts power to all horn type speaker locations.
TIME PROGRAMMING
The master time controller shall provide the following functions:
1.
Non-volatile memory capacity for storing 400 events and up to 80 Calendar dates for
schedule changes.
2.
Ability to review, edit and delete events via a Windows 95/98 PC running the
configuration program.
3.
Review events from any entered time of day.
4.
Events shall be programmable to any or all of (6) zone circuits.
5.
Selection of any of (6) schedules to allow flexibility due to seasonal changes or special
events.
6.
Fully automatic Calendar execution.
7.
User programmable Automatic Daylight Savings Time Change.
8.
Programmable Music-on-Class-Change. This feature shall be programmable from 1 to
3600 seconds (60 minutes).
16760 - 7/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16760
INTERGRATED INTERCOM/TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
9.
10.
11.
E.
F.
G.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Separate bell-tone selection and separate bell duration for each event.
Latched operation of zones to control lighting or other devices.
Interface with most types of secondary slave clocks whether synchronous wired or
electronic.
12. User-programmable custom slave clock correction. Output relays rated at 5 amperes
shall be provided on all zone circuits as necessary.
13. Lithium battery will provide not less than 5 years battery back-up for timekeeping
function.
CLASSROOM SECURITY AND SUPERVISION INTERFACE
1.
Each classroom connected to the system shall offer the ability to interface to a security
transducer-like motion detector, door switch or window switch.
2.
All field wiring shall be individually supervised for opens or shorts to each call station and
security devices.
3.
No other wiring or equipment shall be needed to secure a classroom.
4.
Arming and disarming functions shall be performed by dial-up via the Administrative
Telephone(s).
5.
Security alarms may be programmed to automatically trigger pre-recorded emergency
announcements and/or emergency tones to sound when the alarm is activated.
6.
Security alarms may be programmed to dial-out the emergency personnel’s telephone
extension or cell phone. When answered the system will announce the calling room and
type of emergency/security call-in.
7.
Easy interface shall be provided to the main security and/or fire alarm system.
Emergency tones and/or announcements can be triggered, via the primary security
and/or fire alarm system, to provide redundant annunciation using the classroom and
corridor speakers.
8.
Any systems not providing inherent security functions in the classrooms shall not be
acceptable.
DATA LOGGING
1.
System wide events. The System Log shall contain all events that occurred in the system
for which event logging has been enabled to diagnose or document system usage.
2.
Schedule parameters. Shows for each day-of-the-week the times-of-day when system
configuration modes change.
3.
System logging. The System Log Dump report shall list all events that occurred in the
system for which event logging has been enabled to diagnose or document system
usage.
4.
System shall be self-monitoring. System shall include a background process dedicated to
self-monitoring.
ACCESSORIES
1.
Loudspeakers, Ceiling and Wall-Mounted
a.
8" Cone.
b.
Frequency Response: 65 to 17,000 Cycles.
c.
Power Rated: 8 Watts.
d.
Magnet: 5 Ounce.
e.
Axial Sensitivity: 93 dB at 4 feet with 1-watt input.
f.
5-watt variable tap transformer.
g.
Rauland Model ACC1400 Speaker Assemblies with ACC1101 Backbox and
ACC1104 Tile bridge for recessed application
2.
Analog Clock
a.
Clocks shall be atomic analog type with 15” diameter and operate on battery.
b.
Provide wire-guards where indicated.
3.
Outdoor speakers
a.
Rauland-Borg Model 3603 Horn Speaker, or equal.
b.
Rauland-Borg Model A15G Weather Proof Strain Adaptor, or equal.
16760 - 8/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16760
INTERGRATED INTERCOM/TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
H.
I.
Equipment Racks
1.
Equipment racks shall be located in a climate-controlled area/room as shown on
drawings. Equipment racks shall be:
a.
Self-contained, specifically engineered racks with provisions for all present and
future components as described and recommended by the manufacturer within
this specification.
b.
Racks shall be accessible from front and rear.
c.
All program, zone, and time circuitry, data, linkage, power, telecommunications
components, and circuitry to be located in racks configured as approved by the
Engineer.
Electronic Door Holders
1.
Door holders shall be Magnetically held, 24Vqc, flush mounted with long catch plate.
2.
Door holders shall be Edwards 1504 AQ, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
JK
EXAMINATION
Examine conditions, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting the performance of the Integrated Electronic Communications Network
system work.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
General:
1.
Install system in accordance with NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. Install
equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Wiring Methods:
1.
Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and counters, and except in
accessible ceiling spaces, and in gypsum board partitions, where cable wiring method
may be used. Use UL listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces including plenum
ceilings. Conceal wiring except in unfinished spaces.
Impedance and Level Matching:
1.
Carefully match input and output impedance’s and signal levels at signal interfaces.
Provide matching networks where required.
Control Circuit Wiring:
1.
Install control circuits in accordance with NFPA 70 and as indicated. Provide number of
conductors as recommended by system manufacturer to provide control functions
indicated or specified.
2.
The contractor shall mount a main distribution frame behind the Integrated Electronic
Communications Network console. All wires shall be laid down on terminal punch blocks
and identified by the actual room location it serves. All the communications points shall
be wired into this main distribution frame, laid down in sequence, and identified by which
line it is on and the point position it serves.
3.
All housings are to be located as specified and shown on drawings.
4.
Make installation in strict accordance with approved manufacturer's drawings and
instructions.
5.
The contractor shall provide necessary transient protection on the AC power feed, all
station lines leaving or entering the building, and all central office trunks. All protection
shall be as recommended by the equipment supplier and referenced to earth ground.
Wiring Within Enclosures:
1.
Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to
terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars.
2.
Provide physical isolation from each other for speaker-microphone, line-level,
speaker-level, and power wiring. Run in separate raceways, or where exposed or in
16760 - 9/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16760
INTERGRATED INTERCOM/TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
same enclosure, provide 12 inch minimum separation between conductors to
speaker-microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Provide
physical separation as recommended by equipment manufacturer for other Integrated
Electronic Communications Network system conductors.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations:
1.
Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered terminal punch blocks in junction, pull,
and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures.
Identification of Conductors and Cables:
1.
Use color coding of conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires
and cables so all media are identified in coordination with system wiring diagrams.
Weatherproofing:
1.
Provide weatherproof enclosures for items to be mounted outdoors or exposed to
weather.
Repairs:
1.
Wherever walls, ceilings, floors, or other building finishes are cut for installation, repair,
restore, and refinish to original appearance.
GROUNDING
Provide equipment grounding connections for Integrated Electronic Communications Network
systems as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL
Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.
Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize to
the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and
other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and
report ground resistance.
The contractor shall provide all necessary transient protection on the AC power feed and on all
station lines leaving or entering the building.
The contractor shall note in his system drawings, the type and location of these protection
devices as well as all wiring information.
The contractor shall furnish and install a dedicated, isolated earth ground from the central
equipment rack and bond to the incoming electrical service ground buss bar.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Manufacturer's Field Services:
1.
Provide services of a duly factory authorized service representative for this project
location to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.
Inspection:
1.
Make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labeled and
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Provide a list of final tap settings of
paging speaker line matching transformers.
Testing:
1.
Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely re-test work affected by such
deficiencies at Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system
meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards.
COMMISSIONING
Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least seven days advance notice.
OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS:
Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting
sound levels, resetting matching transformer taps, and adjusting controls to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to three visits to the site for this purpose. Provide program modifications
if required by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 16760
16760 - 10/10
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16780
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE GYMNASIUM ROOM #156
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
SCOPE
The electrical contractor shall furnish, through subcontract with an authorized Audio System Vendor,
a complete, equalized, and hand-mixed quality sound system. The system shall be as shown on
construction drawings and specifications. It shall contain all necessary equipment to perform all
functions as required in this specification. The system shall provide + 3 dB at 2000 Hz DIRECT
FIELD on the floor of the gymnasium room. The system shall be designed for speech intelligibility
and music transmission.
The system shall consist of the following: a wall mount type equipment rack, mixers, automatic gain
control, manual gain control(s), equalizer(s), amplifiers, speakers, microphones & auxiliary input
jacks, microphones (wireless and hardwired), cables, control relays, and all other miscellaneous
equipment required for a complete and operable system. The system shall be installed in a method
that complies with all applicable codes, standards and this specification. Additional information is as
published in the "SOUND SYSTEM ENGINEERING" handbook second edition by Don & Carolyn
Davis.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 and other portions of Division 16 apply to the work
specified in this section.
The Audio System Vendor shall provide proof of completion of training for their design person in
basic sound design equal to "SYN-AUD-CON". In addition, the person shall be at least NICET level
three in audio/low voltage work. That person shall design the system speaker layout on computeraided design software equal to "ACOUSTA CADD" by Altec Lansing or "EASE" as distributed by
Renkus-Heinz, Inc.
SUBSTITUTION
Request for substitution of specified equipment shall be made to the specifying engineer. The
suitability of substitute equipment shall be the responsibility of the specifying engineer of the
"ENGINEERING" firm only. The engineer will receive request for specific substitution of equipment
ten (10) working days prior to bid date.
The request shall include a list of the specified equipment, a list of which equipment the contractor
wishes to substitute, and a packet of literature containing supporting specification sheets for each
piece of substitute equipment requested. The packet shall also include the type and version of
software, the certificate(s) of the firm's designer(s) and NICET certificate numbers of installers for
the company. The Engineer will list acceptable request by published addendum. Acceptable
equipment and vendors will appear on the list. Incomplete substitution request shall be discarded
without review or comment.
SYSTEM OPERATION:
The system shall be activated by inserting an input source, adjusting the input gain/master output
gain and applying power to the system at the rack. The equalizer shall automatically adjust for each
change in set without further manual operation of additional switches.
The input levels shall maintain "maximum gain before feedback" at all times.
The system shall be integrated in the facility's intercommunications system as a program source as
described in specification 16760.
16780 - 1/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16780
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE GYMNASIUM ROOM #156
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
ACE, Inc.
JK
GENERAL
The system shall be equal to BOGEN, BI-AMP, ELECTRO VOICE, ALTEC LANSING, DUKANE,
SOUNDOLIER and others. Refer to manufacturer's catalog for an exact description of equipment
specified. Features shall be exactly matched with no exceptions. Equal equipment and vendor
substitutions will be listed by addendum. All devices shall be UL listed for the application intended.
RACK
1.
Dukane 13A161 basic wall rack (36 inches of rack space)
Equals: Lowell l260-36 with front door and MBS222 caster base
2.
Provide custom wheel sets under rack, 90 lbs per wheel
3.
Provide front door with lock (provide four keys)
4.
Dukane 560-xxxx blank rack panels (fill unused space as required)
5.
Middle Atlantic rack drawer 7 inches deep minimum
MANUAL MIXER
1.
2A96A Dukane manual mixer (quantity one)
Equals: Biamp 801
2.
8 microphone/ auxiliary inputs (minimum per mixer)
3.
Manual gain control
4.
Mic priority/ all mute
5.
Provide partially loaded (5 microphone & 3 auxiliary)
6.
Provide isolation transformer equal to ATC-15 by FSR to interface intercom system
7.
Access to line/ pre/ post level mixer bus
8.
+ 0.5dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
9.
< .5% THD 20Hz to 20 kHz
SOUND PROCESSING
1.
EQUALIZER
MicroAudio CQ POD 1.2 SP
1)
Equals: Biamp MSP11
Programmable equalizer blind (no knobs to "readjust")
Linear "Q" from .5 to 50
Range +6 to -50 dB
Shelving filter 20uS to 500mS
28 bands parametric
8 individual preset equalization modes
Modes selectable by contact closure
One in and one output
Note: If owner request, provide programming software for their use at no additional charge.
2.
FEEDBACK SUPPRESSION DEVICE
SABINE FBX1020(+) FEEDBACK ELIMINATOR (NO SUBSTITUTIONS)
Ten user programmable filters
1/10 or 1/5 octave filters (selectable by user)
DSP controlled, variable to -50 dB
Dynamic vs. selective filter sets (selective by user)
Signals to noise 86 dB minimum
AMPLIFIER
1.
QSC
2.
CX902 (provide 2 units)
3.
550 watts per channel dual channel amplifiers
4.
Frequency Response 20Hz to 20,000 Hz
5.
0.1% total harmonic distortion @ 10 dB below rated power
6.
Fan cooling, variable speed
7.
Amplifier protected (full short circuit, open circuit, thermal, RF, ultra sonic)
8.
Damping factor 500 or better
16780 - 2/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16780
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE GYMNASIUM ROOM #156
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
ACE, Inc.
JK
9.
1 dB gain controls
CD PLAYER
1.
Ch6000 Dukane 5-disc player with remote control
a.
Equals: Marantz PMD371
2.
This unit provides line level only output
3.
Provide rack mounting kit
4.
Note: AM/FM/cassette program input comes from intercom system)
SPEAKERS - Quantity as required to achieve system performance.
1.
Altec/EV (Electro Voice) FRX+940 (3 each)
2.
15 inch woofer
3.
90x40 precise coverage at 2000 Hz
4.
Vented low frequency
5.
Provide black finish
6.
Provide cover to prevent physical damage
7.
Provide full range operation
8.
Provide engineered eyebolt system and mounting hardware ("L"- track rigging)
9.
400 watts of audio power handling
WIRE
1.
All wire and cable shall be Plenum rated.
2.
West Penn Wire
3.
All speakers WPW 227 12ga two conductor with overall jacket (1" c. for 4 cables)
4.
All microphones WPW 292 20ga pair shielded
5.
Auxiliary line WPW 292 20ga pair shielded
6.
All conduits shall be 3/4" minimum trade size. NO microphones or auxiliary input(s) wire shall
be in the same conduit as any speaker wire. Provide one microphone/auxiliary conduit from
each microphone location shown on the plans to the sound junction box at the rack location.
The junction box shall be 12"x12"x4" deep mounted at 48" AFF. Provide a 1" conduit
(minimum) for speaker four cables.
JACKS
1.
At each remote location provide a 2-gang plate (Siemon CT8-FP-20) with three D3F
Switchcraft jack mounted in CT-BLNK-20 and one Switchcraft RCA jack mounted in a CT-ARC-20. Provide labels from a laminated labeler.
2.
At sound rack provide one blank single rack unit (Siemon CT-PNL-16) with 4 Switchcraft
3501 RCA (CT-A-RC-20) jacks and 1 D3F mounted in a CT-BLNK-20. Provide additional
CT-BLNK-20 as required to cover spare holes.
WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEM
1.
Provide one ElectroVoice MS3000E rack mounted lavaliere system with matching factory
assembly (EVI APD4) remote antenna expansion unit mounted in the ceiling area. Provide
two 3/4 "conduits to this location as directed by the Audio System Vendor. System shall
operate free from pops, fades, or dropouts from any place on the Multipurpose Room Floor.
2.
In addition to the system above, provide a "Handheld Transmitter Microphone" (EVI MSHN7)
on the same frequency.
3.
Provide a standard microphone (Switchcraft A3F) to belt pack transmitter adapter cable.
HARD-WIRED MICROPHONE SYSTEM
1.
Provide two each EVI N/D 267S microphones.
2.
Provide two each RAPCO SAP-25 20awg 25 foot cables and two each RAPCO SAP-50
20awg 50 foot cables.
3.
Provide two each Soundolier TL34E Tripod microphone stands.
16780 - 3/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16780
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE GYMNASIUM ROOM #156
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
GENERAL
The Audio System Vendor shall perform all work as required including oversight of placing of wire in
conduit. All work shall be done with quality assurance as the prime goal. The equipment supplier
shall maintain a service office within two-hundred-fifty miles (250 mi.) of the project site or shall be
capable of responding within eight hours to a service request while charging no more than one hour
of travel time to the Owner. The Audio System Vendor shall maintain adequate tool and or test
equipment at all times to provide service after the installation. The Engineer may make a request for
this list prior to the letting of the contract.
SHOP DRAWINGS
Drawings shall be prepared prior to beginning any construction work on the site.
Submit actual installation layout drawings on floor plans showing conduit runs, conductor sizes,
color coding, number of conductors, and location of devices and equipment. Submit these drawings
with the initial shop drawing submittal package.
Provide color graphic display of expected coverage pattern on software equal to "ACOUSTA CADD"
or "EASE" with shop drawing package. Provide 3-dB plot pattern at 2000 Hz direct field for each set
(stage or sports event).
Submit proof of completion of training for their Montana-resident design person in basic sound
design equal to "SYN-AUD-CON".
The ENGINEERING FIRM of record reviewing the submittal may charge a review fee for second
and subsequent reviews of the shop drawing package, if incomplete or inaccurate first package is
presented for review. This fee shall be at the customary and standard hourly rate or portion thereof.
The minimum charge will be one hour. The second or subsequent review(s) shall not commence
until the fee is paid.
INSTALLATION / WIRING
The sound system equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with all manufacturers'
guidelines. Additional installation practices shall be as published in the "SOUND SYSTEM
ENGINEERING" handbook second edition by Don & Carolyn Davis. The entire audio system shall
be installed by direct employees of the Audio System Vendor. A team of Montana licensed
electricians and the NICET technicians assigned to the project by the Audio System Vendor may
perform wire pulling. The senior workman shall be NICET level 2 audio certified. All other installation
workmen will be workers that are NICET level 1 certified. They will also have a minimum of 2 years
experience with this system and 5 years experience with systems similar to the systems provided on
this project. Provide letter of authorization from the manufacturer of the equipment being installed,
upon request by engineer, PRIOR to placing any wire for system in conduit. Final connections
between the equipment and the wiring system shall be made by factory trained personnel.
The entire sound system shall be installed in conduit. The Audio System Vendor shall be
responsible for the entire system installation. The "Electrical contractor" shall provide conduit and
wire pulling team members, as required. The Electrical Contractor may provide installation of
equipment if he has NICET certified staff (provide certification numbers). No special requirements
are needed for the installation of conduit, wire pulling, and 120 ac volt outlets for the use of the
systems contractor. This work does not require NICET certificates.
The complete system shall be installed, tested and demonstrated before being placed in service. A
senior Audio Technician (NICET Level III) shall inspect all work at the site and then shall set up the
system for optimum performance. The senior technician shall adjust the equalizer for the project
while the owner is present in the building. The system shall be maintained under warranty for a
period of one year from the date of "beneficial occupancy" or final acceptance. During the one year
warranty period, the Audio System Vendor shall maintain and provide diagnostic tools, and shall
make service calls to perform service and repairs as required to keep the system fully operational at
all times.
16780 - 4/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16780
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE GYMNASIUM ROOM #156
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
B.
3.6
A.
B.
3.7
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Provide specialty back boxes matched to the equipment in all cases, boxes shall be aligned plumb
and square. Verify exact location and sizes of all conduit runs and back boxes prior to rough in with
Audio System Vendor.
All cables shall be extended to each outlet or device location with complete electrical continuity and
free of shorts, grounds, or opens. Cables shall be run as necessary to each remote station. Splices
shall be kept to a minimum.
The AC power circuit to the sound system shall be run in steel raceway and shall include an
insulated, isolated, #12 AWG ground (orange outlet and circuit). This ground conductor shall serve
as the system earth reference point.
All audio termination shall be made in a neat and a workman like manner. Each cable terminated
shall be tagged and labeled. Labels shall be equal to IDPRO by Brady. Use of ring type
compression lugs is required. Size as required by wire and screw being connected to.
The Audio System Contractor shall secure all required FCC licenses, permits or any other required
approvals from jurisdictions involved in this project and shall pay all fees accordingly.
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
Provide necessary support or speakers to be suspended from roof deck to an acceptable height, not
lower than 6” above bottom of roof joists.
MANUALS
The contractor shall furnish to the owner two (2) complete sets of operation and service manuals.
Manuals shall include the following:
1.
User's manual (basic and advanced)
2.
Maintenance manual and parts list
3.
Coverage test reports as generated by calibrated test tool equal to "IVIE PC-40". Provide
additional RT-60 reports generated by actual testing after the room is acoustically treated.
4.
FCC License, if required
As-built drawings shall be maintained during construction of the project. They will be delivered to the
owner or his representative at the same time as the operation and service manuals mentioned in
above paragraph.
TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION
The contractor, prior to acceptance of the project as complete, shall conduct testing. Testing shall be
in accordance with manufacturers recommended procedures and as published in the "SOUND
SYSTEM ENGINEERING" handbook second edition by Don & Carolyn Davis. Device test results
shall be made available to the owner or his representative.
The contractor shall provide six (6) hours training time for the owner's staff prior to completion of the
project. Training shall be conducted by factory authorized and trained personnel, training shall
include hands on experience.
CERTIFICATION:
Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall provide a letter to the owner or his
representative. A Copy shall be sent to the Engineer. The letter should substantially contain the
following:
"We the undersigned, having been selected as the SOUND & AUDIO
CONTRACTOR and installer, do hereby certify that these systems are installed
in accordance with the manufacturers recommended procedures. The system
was install in full compliance with this specification. The system has been
thoroughly tested and is complete and fully operational. It has been
demonstrated to the OWNER or their assigned representative and was accepted
as complete and acceptable."
16780 - 5/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16780
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE GYMNASIUM ROOM #156
3.8
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
SERVICE
The Audio System Vendor must employ factory trained technicians and maintain a service
organization including permanent shop within 100 miles of the project site or shall be capable of
responding within four hours to a service request while charging no more than one hour of travel
time to the Owner. Use of subcontract repair- persons is not allowed and will override prior approval
of manufacturer's approval in section one. Suppliers unable to comply with this specification should
not bid the project.
This organization must have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in servicing systems of the
type specified above. In addition the Audio System Vendor must be a duly authorized dealer for the
equipment provided for this project now and for the last seven (7) years.
The Audio System Vendor shall, in addition provided a quotation for "Biannual testing and
maintenance" to the owner. This agreement, if accepted, shall take effect after the warranty period
has expired. This agreement shall "lock in" the highest hourly rate charged for non-warranty service
for the length of the agreement.
END OF SECTION 16780
16780 - 6/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16781
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE COMMONS ROOM #162
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
SCOPE
The electrical contractor shall furnish, through subcontract with an authorized Audio System Vendor,
a complete, equalized, and hand-mixed quality sound system. The system shall be as shown on
construction drawings and specifications. It shall contain all necessary equipment to perform all
functions as required in this specification. The system shall provide + 3 dB at 2000 Hz DIRECT
FIELD on the floor of the commons room. The system shall be designed for speech intelligibility and
music transmission.
The system shall consist of the following: a wall mount type equipment rack, mixers, automatic gain
control, manual gain control(s), equalizer(s), amplifiers, speakers, microphones & auxiliary input
jacks, microphones (wireless and hardwired), cables, control relays, and all other miscellaneous
equipment required for a complete and operable system. The system shall be installed in a method
that complies with all applicable codes, standards and this specification. Additional information is as
published in the "SOUND SYSTEM ENGINEERING" handbook second edition by Don & Carolyn
Davis.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
All provisions of the contract including Division 1 and other portions of Division 16 apply to the work
specified in this section.
The Audio System Vendor shall provide proof of completion of training for their design person in
basic sound design equal to "SYN-AUD-CON". In addition, the person shall be at least NICET level
three in audio/low voltage work. That person shall design the system speaker layout on computeraided design software equal to "ACOUSTA CADD" by Altec Lansing or "EASE" as distributed by
Renkus-Heinz, Inc.
SUBSTITUTION
Request for substitution of specified equipment shall be made to the specifying engineer. The
suitability of substitute equipment shall be the responsibility of the specifying engineer of the
"ENGINEERING" firm only. The engineer will receive request for specific substitution of equipment
ten (10) working days prior to bid date.
The request shall include a list of the specified equipment, a list of which equipment the contractor
wishes to substitute, and a packet of literature containing supporting specification sheets for each
piece of substitute equipment requested. The packet shall also include the type and version of
software, the certificate(s) of the firm's designer(s) and NICET certificate numbers of installers for
the company. The Engineer will list acceptable request by published addendum. Acceptable
equipment and vendors will appear on the list. Incomplete substitution request shall be discarded
without review or comment.
SYSTEM OPERATION:
The system shall be activated by inserting an input source, adjusting the input gain/master output
gain and applying power to the system at the rack. The equalizer shall automatically adjust for each
change in set without further manual operation of additional switches.
The input levels shall maintain "maximum gain before feedback" at all times.
The system shall be integrated in the facility's intercommunications system as a program source as
described in specification 16760.
16781 - 1/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16781
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE COMMONS ROOM #162
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
GENERAL
The system shall be equal to BOGEN, BI-AMP, ELECTRO VOICE, ALTEC LANSING, DUKANE,
SOUNDOLIER and others. Refer to manufacturer's catalog for an exact description of equipment
specified. Features shall be exactly matched with no exceptions. Equal equipment and vendor
substitutions will be listed by addendum. All devices shall be UL listed for the application intended.
RACK
1.
Dukane 13A161 basic wall rack (36 inches of rack space)
a.
C.
2.
Provide custom wheel sets under rack, 90 lbs per wheel
3.
Provide front door with lock (provide four keys)
4.
Dukane 560-xxxx blank rack panels (fill unused space as required)
5.
Middle Atlantic rack drawer 7 inches deep minimum
MANUAL MIXER
1.
2A96A Dukane manual mixer (quantity one)
a.
D.
Equals: Lowell l260-36 with front door and MBS222 caster base
Equals: Biamp 801
2.
8 microphone/ auxiliary inputs (minimum per mixer)
3.
Manual gain control
4.
Mic priority/ all mute
5.
Provide partially loaded (5 microphone & 3 auxiliary)
6.
Provide isolation transformer equal to ATC-15 by FSR to interface intercom system
7.
Access to line/ pre/ post level mixer bus
8.
+ 0.5dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
9.
< .5% THD 20Hz to 20 kHz
SOUND PROCESSING
1.
EQUALIZER
a.
MicroAudio CQ POD 1.2 SP
1)
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Programmable equalizer blind (no knobs to "readjust")
Linear "Q" from .5 to 50
Range +6 to -50 dB
Shelving filter 20uS to 500mS
28 bands parametric
8 individual preset equalization modes
Modes selectable by contact closure
One in and one output
Note: If owner request, provide programming software for their use at no additional
charge.
FEEDBACK SUPPRESSION DEVICE
a.
b.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Equals: Biamp MSP11
SABINE FBX1020(+) FEEDBACK ELIMINATOR (NO SUBSTITUTIONS)
Ten user programmable filters
16781 - 2/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16781
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE COMMONS ROOM #162
E.
c.
d.
e.
f.
AMPLIFIER
F.
1.
QSC
2.
CX902 (provide 2 units)
3.
550 watts per channel dual channel amplifiers
4.
Frequency Response 20Hz to 20,000 Hz
5.
0.1% total harmonic distortion @ 10 dB below rated power
6.
Fan cooling, variable speed
7.
Amplifier protected (full short circuit, open circuit, thermal, RF, ultra sonic)
8.
Damping factor 500 or better
9.
1 dB gain controls
CD PLAYER
1.
1/10 or 1/5 octave filters (selectable by user)
DSP controlled, variable to -50 dB
Dynamic vs. selective filter sets (selective by user)
Signals to noise 86 dB minimum
Ch6000 Dukane 5-disc player with remote control
a.
Equals: Marantz PMD371
G.
2.
This unit provides line level only output
3.
Provide rack mounting kit
4.
Note: AM/FM/cassette program input comes from intercom system)
SPEAKERS - Quantity as required to achieve system performance.
H.
1.
Atlas Sound # FAP82T
2.
14” speaker assembly, 8 inch woofer
3.
Provide WHITE finish
4.
Provide cover to prevent physical damage
5.
Provide full range operation
6.
Provide engineered eyebolt system and mounting hardware
7.
60 watts of audio power handling
8.
Speaker assemblies to be recessed mounted in T-bar ceiling.
WIRE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
I.
All wire and cable shall be Plenum rated.
West Penn Wire
All speakers WPW 227 12ga two conductor with overall jacket (1" c. for 4 cables)
All microphones WPW 292 20ga pair shielded
Auxiliary line WPW 292 20ga pair shielded
All conduits shall be 3/4" minimum trade size. NO microphones or auxiliary input(s) wire shall
be in the same conduit as any speaker wire. Provide one microphone/auxiliary conduit from
each microphone location shown on the plans to the sound junction box at the rack location.
The junction box shall be 12"x12"x4" deep mounted at 48" AFF. Provide a 1" conduit
(minimum) for speaker four cables.
JACKS
1.
ACE, Inc.
JK
At each remote location provide a 2-gang plate (Siemon CT8-FP-20) with three D3F
Switchcraft jack mounted in CT-BLNK-20 and one Switchcraft RCA jack mounted in a CT-ARC-20. Provide labels from a laminated labeler.
16781 - 3/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16781
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE COMMONS ROOM #162
2.
J.
At sound rack provide one blank single rack unit (Siemon CT-PNL-16) with 4 Switchcraft
3501 RCA (CT-A-RC-20) jacks and 1 D3F mounted in a CT-BLNK-20. Provide additional
CT-BLNK-20 as required to cover spare holes.
WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEM
1.
K.
Provide one ElectroVoice MS3000E rack mounted lavaliere system with matching factory
assembly (EVI APD4) remote antenna expansion unit mounted in the ceiling area. Provide
two 3/4 "conduits to this location as directed by the Audio System Vendor. System shall
operate free from pops, fades, or dropouts from any place on the Multipurpose Room Floor.
2.
In addition to the system above, provide a "Handheld Transmitter Microphone" (EVI MSHN7)
on the same frequency.
3.
Provide a standard microphone (Switchcraft A3F) to belt pack transmitter adapter cable.
HARD-WIRED MICROPHONE SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
Provide two each EVI N/D 267S microphones.
Provide two each RAPCO SAP-25 20awg 25 foot cables and two each RAPCO SAP-50
20awg 50 foot cables.
Provide two each Soundolier TL34E Tripod microphone stands.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
GENERAL
The Audio System Vendor shall perform all work as required including oversight of placing of wire in
conduit. All work shall be done with quality assurance as the prime goal. The equipment supplier
shall maintain a service office within two-hundred-fifty miles (250 mi.) of the project site or shall be
capable of responding within eight hours to a service request while charging no more than one hour
of travel time to the Owner. The Audio System Vendor shall maintain adequate tool and or test
equipment at all times to provide service after the installation. The Engineer may make a request for
this list prior to the letting of the contract.
SHOP DRAWINGS
Drawings shall be prepared prior to beginning any construction work on the site.
Submit actual installation layout drawings on floor plans showing conduit runs, conductor sizes,
color coding, number of conductors, and location of devices and equipment. Submit these drawings
with the initial shop drawing submittal package.
Provide color graphic display of expected coverage pattern on software equal to "ACOUSTA CADD"
or "EASE" with shop drawing package. Provide 3-dB plot pattern at 2000 Hz direct field for each set
(stage or sports event).
Submit proof of completion of training for their Montana-resident design person in basic sound
design equal to "SYN-AUD-CON".
The ENGINEERING FIRM of record reviewing the submittal may charge a review fee for second
and subsequent reviews of the shop drawing package, if incomplete or inaccurate first package is
presented for review. This fee shall be at the customary and standard hourly rate or portion thereof.
The minimum charge will be one hour. The second or subsequent review(s) shall not commence
until the fee is paid.
INSTALLATION / WIRING
The sound system equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with all manufacturers'
guidelines. Additional installation practices shall be as published in the "SOUND SYSTEM
ENGINEERING" handbook second edition by Don & Carolyn Davis. The entire audio system shall
be installed by direct employees of the Audio System Vendor. A team of Montana licensed
electricians and the NICET technicians assigned to the project by the Audio System Vendor may
perform wire pulling. The senior workman shall be NICET level 2 audio certified. All other installation
16781 - 4/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16781
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE COMMONS ROOM #162
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.4
workmen will be workers that are NICET level 1 certified. They will also have a minimum of 2 years
experience with this system and 5 years experience with systems similar to the systems provided on
this project. Provide letter of authorization from the manufacturer of the equipment being installed,
upon request by engineer, PRIOR to placing any wire for system in conduit. Final connections
between the equipment and the wiring system shall be made by factory trained personnel.
The entire sound system shall be installed in conduit. The Audio System Vendor shall be
responsible for the entire system installation. The "Electrical contractor" shall provide conduit and
wire pulling team members, as required. The Electrical Contractor may provide installation of
equipment if he has NICET certified staff (provide certification numbers). No special requirements
are needed for the installation of conduit, wire pulling, and 120 ac volt outlets for the use of the
systems contractor. This work does not require NICET certificates.
The complete system shall be installed, tested and demonstrated before being placed in service. A
senior Audio Technician (NICET Level III) shall inspect all work at the site and then shall set up the
system for optimum performance. The senior technician shall adjust the equalizer for the project
while the owner is present in the building. The system shall be maintained under warranty for a
period of one year from the date of "beneficial occupancy" or final acceptance. During the one year
warranty period, the Audio System Vendor shall maintain and provide diagnostic tools, and shall
make service calls to perform service and repairs as required to keep the system fully operational at
all times.
Provide specialty back boxes matched to the equipment in all cases, boxes shall be aligned plumb
and square. Verify exact location and sizes of all conduit runs and back boxes prior to rough in with
Audio System Vendor.
All cables shall be extended to each outlet or device location with complete electrical continuity and
free of shorts, grounds, or opens. Cables shall be run as necessary to each remote station. Splices
shall be kept to a minimum.
The AC power circuit to the sound system shall be run in steel raceway and shall include an
insulated, isolated, #12 AWG ground (orange outlet and circuit). This ground conductor shall serve
as the system earth reference point.
All audio termination shall be made in a neat and a workman like manner. Each cable terminated
shall be tagged and labeled. Labels shall be equal to IDPRO by Brady. Use of ring type
compression lugs is required. Size as required by wire and screw being connected to.
The Audio System Contractor shall secure all required FCC licenses, permits or any other required
approvals from jurisdictions involved in this project and shall pay all fees accordingly.
A.
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
Provide necessary support or speakers to be suspended from roof deck to an acceptable height, not
lower than 6” above bottom of roof joists.
A.
MANUALS
The contractor shall furnish to the owner two (2) complete sets of operation and service manuals.
Manuals shall include the following:
3.5
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.6
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
User's manual (basic and advanced)
Maintenance manual and parts list
Coverage test reports as generated by calibrated test tool equal to "IVIE PC-40". Provide
additional RT-60 reports generated by actual testing after the room is acoustically treated.
4.
FCC License, if required
As-built drawings shall be maintained during construction of the project. They will be delivered to the
owner or his representative at the same time as the operation and service manuals mentioned in
above paragraph.
TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION
The contractor, prior to acceptance of the project as complete, shall conduct testing. Testing shall be
in accordance with manufacturers recommended procedures and as published in the "SOUND
16781 - 5/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16781
SOUND SYSTEM FOR THE COMMONS ROOM #162
B.
3.7
A.
3.8
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
SYSTEM ENGINEERING" handbook second edition by Don & Carolyn Davis. Device test results
shall be made available to the owner or his representative.
The contractor shall provide six (6) hours training time for the owner's staff prior to completion of the
project. Training shall be conducted by factory authorized and trained personnel, training shall
include hands on experience.
CERTIFICATION:
Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall provide a letter to the owner or his
representative. A Copy shall be sent to the Engineer. The letter should substantially contain the
following:
"We the undersigned, having been selected as the SOUND & AUDIO CONTRACTOR
and installer, do hereby certify that these systems are installed in accordance with the
manufacturers recommended procedures. The system was install in full compliance with
this specification. The system has been thoroughly tested and is complete and fully
operational. It has been demonstrated to the OWNER or their assigned representative
and was accepted as complete and acceptable."
SERVICE
The Audio System Vendor must employ factory trained technicians and maintain a service
organization including permanent shop within 100 miles of the project site or shall be capable of
responding within four hours to a service request while charging no more than one hour of travel
time to the Owner. Use of subcontract repair- persons is not allowed and will override prior approval
of manufacturer's approval in section one. Suppliers unable to comply with this specification should
not bid the project.
This organization must have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in servicing systems of the
type specified above. In addition the Audio System Vendor must be a duly authorized dealer for the
equipment provided for this project now and for the last seven (7) years.
The Audio System Vendor shall, in addition provided a quotation for "Biannual testing and
maintenance" to the owner. This agreement, if accepted, shall take effect after the warranty period
has expired. This agreement shall "lock in" the highest hourly rate charged for non-warranty service
for the length of the agreement.
END OF SECTION 16781
16781 - 6/6
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16791
SECURITY CAMERA SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
ACE, Inc.
JK
SCOPE
Design, provide and install a complete Security camera system for areas shown on drawings and
consisting of:
1.
Installation of a new security camera system; including cameras, monitors, switches, cable,
video recorders, etc.
2.
All necessary raceways, conduits, pullwires, boxes, etc. shall be provided by the electrical
subcontractor.
3.
Any additional requirements or detail not shown on the drawings, but required for a complete
system shall be the responsibility of the security camera system subcontractor.
4.
See drawings for Alternate and Base Bid for quantity and type of cameras and price
separately.
RELATED WORK
All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the requirements of
both the General and Special Conditions and the Electrical Specification.
Related work specified elsewhere:
1.
Raceway and Fittings
Section 16110
2.
Outlet Boxes
Section 16130
3.
Supporting Devices
Section 16190
Examine the above referenced specification parts thoroughly before submitting a proposal for
accomplishment of work in this section.
REGULATORY AGENCIES
Meet requirements of the following:
1.
National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
2.
Underwriters Laboratories.
3.
Factory Mutual.
4.
American Society of Testing Materials.
5.
American National Standards Institute.
6.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
7.
International Building Code.
8.
Owner.
SUBMITTALS
Within five (5) days after award of contract, Contractor shall submit for approval, twelve (12) copies
of product information and shop drawings with the following minimum data for all materials,
equipment and appurtenances required under this section and shall include job name, locations
and governing specification paragraph or subparagraphs, and/or governing drawing numbers.
All items of material and equipment required shall be submitted in a prepared complete single
package, in indexed brochure form, for each system in this section, and shall bear the approval of
the Contractor and the Architect prior to ordering or installing of any equipment and/or work.
Submittal items shall include but not be limited to:
1.
Security Camera System
a.
Indoor Cameras – Nuvico CD-STD21N-L.
b.
Indoor PTZ Camera - Nuvico MP-OV22N.
c.
Outdoor Cameras – Nuvico DV-STD21N-L.
d.
Outdoor PTZ Cameras – Nuvico SC-A36N-PHW.
e.
Monitors – 21” Dell LCD Monitor, quantity 2.
f.
Cable and Wire – as required by manufacturer. Plenum rated.
16791 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16791
SECURITY CAMERA SYSTEM
g.
h.
i.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
Digital Video Recorders – Nuvico ED-P1610. (Provide number of DVR’s as required
for recording all cameras at 6 frames per second, for three weeks time. Locate in IT
room equipment rack. DVRs to utilize recording on motion detection feature.)
Power Supplies – As required by the Nuvico System.
Camera Controller – Nuvico NVCK3X – Provide 2 locations determined by Owner.
JOB CONDITIONS
Contractor will familiarize himself with the project site including architectural, structural, electrical
and mechanical field conditions. Drawings and specifications will also be used to plan installation
of work in coordination with other trades.
No additional costs will be paid by the owner for runs of conduit, equipment, materials or other
items which must be relocated due to conflicts with work of other Sections.
Coordinate equipment in area with ductwork, electrical conduit, plumbing, and HVAC piping, fire
sprinklers, etc.
Become familiar with electrical, air conditioning, heating and ventilating, architectural, structural,
plumbing, drawings and specifications to plan the installation of Security camera system work, in
coordination with other sections to provide the best assembly of combined work.
The drawings indicate approximate locations of equipment.
All fees and permits specifically required for security camera system work, not obtained by others
as specified elsewhere shall be applied for and paid for by this contractor.
Contractor may be required to provide in writing, specific information as to successfully completed
projects and references to show cause as to why they should be considered acceptable to the
Architect.
RECORD DRAWINGS
Maintain at the job site one set of up to date Record Drawings, upon which all deviations and
changes are to be noted.
At the completion of the job, transfer all notations on these Record Drawings, to a set of
transparency tracings, which will be furnished by the Owner at Contractor's expense, on request, so
as to provide an accurate record of the installation.
These transparencies shall then be turned over to Owner or their designated representative for
their records, prior to the request for final payment. Submit as-builts in accordance with Section
01 30 0.
Certification: Submit one (1) copy of each interim test or inspection certification, except submit six
(6) copies of final inspection and acceptance reports.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide six complete operation and maintenance
instruction manuals to the owner. All aspects of system operation and maintenance shall be
detailed and technical bulletins describing each piece of equipment used in the system. Check lists
and procedures, troubleshooting techniques, and maintenance operations shall be included.
Manuals shall include, as a minimum, the following:
As-Built Drawings
Catalog cut sheets of all materials installed
Equipment maintenance manuals
TRAINING
Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide operation and maintenance training for each
security camera system to using agency personnel. Each training session shall include emergency
procedures, system control operation, trouble shooting procedures, and unique maintenance and
safety requirements. Training areas shall be provided by the owner in the same building as the
covered areas. Dates and times of the training period shall be coordinated through the owner's
technical representative, not less than two weeks prior to sessions of four (4) hours duration each.
16791 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16791
SECURITY CAMERA SYSTEM
1.9
A.
B.
GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
The contractor shall furnish in writing a guarantee for one (1) year from date of final acceptance of
his complete scope of work. He shall replace promptly and without charge for any material,
service, or transportation of any item proving defective. This Contractor shall also restore any of
the existing work damaged in the course of repairing defective materials or workmanship. Warranty
shall include two (2) periodic inspections of the Systems at the six month intervals specified under
Testing.
This written guarantee along with all necessary maintenance manuals, parts list, certificates of
approval and/or acceptance of the complete installation by local, state or other authorities having
jurisdiction and any applicable warranties, shall be furnished to the owner by the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.1 Nuvico.
PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING
Deliver Materials to project site and store in one location as directed. Maintain storage area in a
clean, neat condition.
Store new materials and those removed during demolition in such manner as to protect from
damage. Immediately replace damaged materials with new undamaged materials without
additional cost.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
JK
INSTALLATION
All wire and cable shall be in wireway or conduit where non-accessible, number of wires/cable and
size of wireway or conduit as required.
Provide and install all items for a complete and working system even if they are not specifically
called out.
Testing and adjustments of the system shall be made by the qualified Installer.
Installation shall be by a qualified full time stocking video equipment dealer and contractor for
installation and service of video equipment.
Provide all cameras with tamper resistive dome cover.
Provide outdoor mounting hardware, outdoor power supplies, heaters, power connection and
weather proof enclosures for all outdoor cameras.
END OF SECTION 16791
16791 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16822
CLASSROOM AUDIO ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Provide and install a complete audio enhancement speaker system complete with amplifiers,
wireless microphones, speakers, cabling, and mounting accessories. Extend speaker cabling to
location in room indicated on drawings. Electrical Contractor is to provide all active equipment
and terminate speaker wiring included under this contract onto this equipment.
The equipment described and furnished under these specifications shall be a standard
manufactured product. Reference to model number and other pertinent information herein is
intended to establish the standards of performance, quality and appearance.
The
manufacturer’s specification sheets for each item specified shall be considered a part of these
specifications. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to meet or exceed these
specifications.
SYSTEM FUNCTION AND OPERATION
Provide adequate dynamic range at an acoustic distortion sufficiently low to ensure minimum
listening fatigue. The system should be capable of delivering 90dB, plus or minus 3dB, average
program level for the entire multi-purpose space.
Loudspeakers shall be mounted overhead in a distributed manner as shown on the plans, to
provide adequate coverage of the area.
Install mixer, amplifier, equalizer modules, AC control panel, etc., in a surface mount locking
equipment cabinet.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ACE, Inc.
JK
MANUFACTURERS
Audio Enhancement, 12613 South Redwood Road, Riverton, UT 84065.
Model Acheiver System.
Pre-bid approved equipment.
(800)-383-9362;
COMPONENTS
Provide the following components for each classroom sound enhancement system, as shown
on the drawings.
Receiver/Amplifier
1.
Phonic Ear front row pro digital.
2.
Infrared sound field system.
3.
2 microphone channels.
4.
2 Stereo aux-inputs.
5.
Integrated infrared sensor.
Pendant Microphone
1.
Lightweight and comfortable.
2.
Excellent sound quality.
3.
2 integrated directional microphones.
4.
2 channel IR transmitter.
Ceiling sensors.
Speakers: 6 inch, 4 speakers per classroom, unless more speakers are shown.
1.
Power Rating: 35 watts RMS.
2.
Frequency Range: 65-20kHz
3.
Product: Equivalent to Phonic ear model AT806.
Speaker Baffles and Enclosure: Round, panted steel, with uniform perforations.
16822 - 1/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16822
CLASSROOM AUDIO ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
G.
2.3
A.
1.
Size: 8 inch
2.
Finish: White
3.
Speaker Back box: Insulated with sound-deadening material.
Matching Transformers: Tapped form 0.5 to 4 watts in 1 watt steps, with primary/secondary
ratio to match amplifier to speaker impedances.
WIRE AND CABLE
Provide plenum rated cable for Speaker Circuits, per system manufacturer’s instructions. Coil
3’ of cable in accessible ceiling space and extend wiring to location indicated on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
ACE, Inc.
JK
INSTALLATION
Provide speaker and cabling installation in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions in
locations indicated on drawings.
SEVICE ORGANIZATION:
Equipment and material shall be supplied by a Service Organization with factory trained service
personnel to ensure proper specification adherence for system operation, final connections,
testing, owner instruction, warranty compliance, and after-market service.
The Service Organization shall have in their employ NICET Audio Certified personnel.
SUBMITTALS
Furnish shop drawings and product data of the system shall include but not be limited to the
followings:
1.
Product Data: Manufacturers descriptive literature of equipment with descriptive
specifications, engineering data sheets.
2.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system components and locations. Indicate rough-in outlet box
or back box requirements.
Upon completion of the installation, submit Letter of Certification indicating that the installation
of the system is complete and performs to specified requirements.
Submit complete Operations and Maintenance Manuals, describing the system in detail,
including part numbers, as well as the operation and maintenance of the system.
WARRANTY
Provide one (1) year warranty on all components and cabling. Warranty shall include all repair,
labor and parts.
END OF SECTION 16822
16822 - 2/2
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 321816
PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Unitary synthetic seamless surface.
C.
D.
E.
F.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1.
Installation details for curbs, ramps, and accessories.
2.
Colors and pattern of surfaces.
3.
Location of drainage accessories.
Samples: For each type of playground surface system indicated.
Product [certificates].
Maintenance data.
Warranty.
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
A.
B.
1.3
1.4
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of playground surface system that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Reduction in impact attenuation.
b.
Deterioration of surface and other materials beyond normal weathering.
c.
2.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
3.
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each product is based on the product named.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
321816 - 1/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 321816
PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
UNITARY SYNTHETIC SEAMLESS SURFACE
Seamless Surface: Dual-density, poured-in-place system with wearing course over cushion
course. Provide manufacturer's standard thickness for each layer as required for overall
thickness indicated, tested for impact attenuation according to ASTM F 1292 and for
accessibility according to ASTM F 1951.
1.
Available Products:
a.
Child Safe Products, Inc.; Safety Surface.
b.
SpectraTurf, Inc.; Spectra Pour.
c.
Surface America Incorporated; Poured-in-Place.
d.
Rainbow Turf
2.
Critical Height: 6 feet (1.8 m).
3.
Overall Thickness: Not less than as required for critical height indicated.
4.
Primer/Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard primer and weather-resistant, moisture-cured
polyurethane adhesive suitable for unit, substrate, and location indicated.
5.
Wearing Course Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
a.
Color: As indicated on Drawings.
6.
Filler/Sealant: Manufacturer's standard clear silicone or polyurethane filler/sealant
suitable for exterior use.
Leveling and Patching Material: Portland cement-based grout or epoxy- or polyurethane-based
formulation suitable for exterior use and approved by playground surface system manufacturer.
ORGANIC LOOSE-FILL SURFACE
Engineered Wood Fibers: Random-sized wood fibers, in manufacturer's standard fiber size,
approximately 10 times longer than wide; containing no bark, leaves, twigs, or foreign or toxic
materials according to ASTM F 2075; graded according to manufacturer's standard specification
for material consistency for playground surfaces and for accessibility according to
ASTM F 1951.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Fibar Group LLC (The); Fibar System 200.
b.
GameTime, a PlayCore, Inc. company; GT Impax Fiber.
c.
Sof'Solutions Inc.; Sof'Fall.
2.
Critical Height: 9 feet (2.7 m).
3.
Uncompressed Material Depth: Not less than as required for critical height indicated.
GEOSYNTHETICS
Drainage/Separation Geotextile: Nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for
subsurface drainage applications and made from polyolefins or polyesters; complying with
ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods.
Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Prefabricated, composite drainage panels made with drainage
core and filter fabric.
Weed-Control Barrier: Composite fabric geotextile consisting of woven, needle-punched
polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric, weighing not less than 4.8
oz./sq. yd. (160 g/sq. m).
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
321816 - 2/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 321816
PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
INSTALLATION
Prepare substrates to receive surfacing products according to playground surface system
manufacturer's written instructions. Verify that substrates are sound and without high spots,
ridges, holes, and depressions.
Asphalt Substrates: Provide sound surface free of laitance, efflorescence, curing compounds,
and other contaminants incompatible with playground surface system.
1.
Repair unsatisfactory surfaces and fill holes and depressions.
2.
Mechanically scarify or otherwise prepare concrete substrates to achieve recommended
degree of roughness.
3.
Saw cut asphalt for terminal edges of playground surface systems as indicated.
4.
Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent telegraphing
through playground surface system.
Install geosynthetics according to playground surface system manufacturer's and geosynthetic
manufacturer's written instructions.
Seamless Surface: Mix and apply components of playground surface system according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent traffic over system for not less than 48 hours after
installation.
1.
Edge Treatment: As indicated.
END OF SECTION 321816
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
321816 - 3/3
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 328400
PLANTING IRRIGATION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Applicable Municipal and State Codes and Regulations also apply.
SUMMARY
A.
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, supplies, and transportation, and perform all
operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of the
irrigation system, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation details,
and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.4
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed irrigation
systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project that has a
record of successful in-service performance. References of past projects may be required
prior to awarding contract.
Product Options: Irrigation system piping, specialties, and accessories are based on
specific types, manufacturers, and models indicated. Components with equal performance
characteristics produced by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in
dimensions, operation, and other characteristics do not change design concept or intended
performance as judged by the Landscape Architect. The burden of proof of product equality
is on the Contractor.
RULES AND REGULATIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Procurement of all applicable licenses, permits, and fees.
Coordination of all Utility Locations.
Coordinate construction phasing & schedule with Owner.
Coordination and installation of pipe sleeves.
Electrical required for connection to power supply.
Provide ‘As-built’ drawings and system operating instructions.
Work and materials shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical
Code, the Uniform Plumbing Code, American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM),
and applicable codes, laws, and regulations of the local governing authorities. Irrigation
system shall be installed consistent with standards developed by ‘The Irrigation Association’.
When the contract documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger
size than required by the above-mentioned rules and regulations, provide the quality and
size required by the contract documents.
If quantities are provided either in these specifications or on the drawings, these quantities
are provided for information only. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to determine the actual
quantities of all material, equipment, and supplies required by the project and to complete
an independent estimate of quantities and wastage.
TESTING
A.
Notify the Owner’s Representative three days in advance of testing.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
328400 - 1/9
02131517
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 328400
PLANTING IRRIGATION
B.
Pipelines jointed with rubber gaskets or threaded connections may be subjected to a
pressure test at any time after partial completion of backfill. Pipelines jointed with solventwelded PVC joints shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before testing.
C.
Subsections of mainline pipe may be tested independently, subject to the review of the
Owner’s Representative.
D.
Furnish clean, clear water, pumps, labor, fittings, and equipment necessary to conduct tests
or retests.
E.
Hydrostatic Pressure Test (Solvent Weld Pipe):
1.
F.
Subject solvent weld, constant pressure lateral pipe to a hydrostatic pressure equal to
the anticipated operating pressure of 100 PSI for two hours. Test with mainline
components and sprinklers installed.
2.
Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. Expose couplings and fittings.
3.
Leakage will be detected by visual inspection. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint,
valve, or appurtenance. Repeat the test until the pipe passes test.
4.
Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited.
Operational Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Activate each remote control valve in sequence from controller. The Owner’s
Representative will visually observe operation, water application patterns, and
leakage.
Replace defective remote control valves, solenoid, wiring, or appurtenance to correct
operational deficiencies.
Replace, adjust, or move water emission devices to correct operational or coverage
deficiencies.
Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, sprinkler, or appurtenance to correct
leakage problems. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited.
Repeat test(s) until each remote control valve lateral passes all tests. Repeat tests,
replace components, and correct deficiencies at no additional cost to the Owner.
CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
The purpose of on-site reviews by the Owner’s Representative is to periodically observe the work
in progress, the Contractor’s interpretation of the construction documents, and to address
questions with regard to installation.
A.
Scheduled reviews such as those for irrigation system layout (staking) or testing must be
scheduled with the Owner’s Representative as required by these specifications.
B.
1.7
Irrigation system layout (mainline, remote control valves, sprinklers, etc.) must be reviewed
and approved prior to construction. Any component installed without approval by the
Owner’s Representative is subject to removal and relocation at the Contractor’s expense.
GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT
The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to insure that the Owner receives irrigation materials of
prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner.
A.
For a period of one year from the commencement of the formal maintenance period,
guarantee/warranty irrigation materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects. Fill
and repair depressions. Restore landscape or structural features damaged by the
settlement of irrigation trenches or excavations. Repair damage to the premises caused by
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
328400 - 2/9
02131517
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 328400
PLANTING IRRIGATION
a defective item. Make repairs within seven days of notification from the Owner’s
Representative.
1.8
B.
Contract documents govern replacements identically as with new work. Make replacements
at no additional cost to the contract price.
C.
Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and
replacements made during the guarantee/warranty period.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
B.
Notice to Proceed: The Contractor shall not commence with installation of the irrigation
system until the following site improvements have been completed with the designated area
of construction:
1.
Removal of stored materials and construction equipment.
2.
Site earthwork and removal of excess soil material.
3.
Subgrade prep to within 2 inches of required elevation.
4.
Underground utility systems.
5.
Electrical equipment, light pole bases, and underground conduits.
6.
Retaining walls and other site structures.
7.
Roadway and walkway pavement systems.
8.
Review and approval from Owner’s Representative.
The Contractor shall be responsible for close correlation of the work with the various trades
and shall organize the work so that it will not cause interference or delays amongst the
trades.
PART 2: MATERIALS
2.1
QUALITY
A.
2.2
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
Deliver irrigation system components in manufacturer’s original undamaged and unopened
containers with labels intact and legible.
Deliver plastic piping in bundles, packaged to provide adequate protection of pipe ends,
both threaded or plain.
Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration.
Provide secure, locked storage for valves, sprinklers heads, and similar components that
can store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
2.4
Use materials which are new and without flaws or defects of any type, and which are the
best of their class and kind.
Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be
increased at the option of the Contractor.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Mainline Pipe and Fittings:
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
328400 - 3/9
02131517
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 328400
PLANTING IRRIGATION
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.5
MAINLINE COMPONENTS
A.
B.
2.6
1. Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation
Foundations (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements of
Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard D1784, with an integral belled
end.
2.
Use Class 200, SDR-21, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to the dimensions and
tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241.
3.
Use solvent weld pipe for mainline pipe with a nominal diameter less than 3-inches or
where a pipe connection occurs in a sleeve. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent
weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784. Use primer
approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard
D2564.
Lateral Pipe and Fittings:
1.
Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements
of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard D1784, with an integral
belled end suitable for solvent welding.
2.
Use Class 200, SDR-21, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to the dimensions and
tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241.
3.
Use solvent weld pipe for lateral pipe. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld
fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784 for PVC pipe. Use primer
approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard
D2564, of a type approved by the pipe manufacturer.
Specialized Pipe and Fittings:
1.
Assemblies calling for threaded pipe connections shall utilize PVC Schedule 40
nipples and PVC Schedule 40 threaded fittings.
2.
Joint sealant: Use only teflon-type tape or teflon based paste pipe joint sealant on
plastic threads. Use nonhardening, nontoxic pipe joint sealant formulated for use on
water-carrying pipes on metal threaded connections.
Dripline and Integral Dripline Components:
1.
Use low-density, linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating,
continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at specified spacing and flow rate per
drawings.
2.
Use 6” metal wire staples for on-surface or under-mulch installations installed 3’ to 5’
on center, and 2 staples installed at every change of direction.
3.
Use Line Flushing valves as indicated on drawings and installation details.
Thrust Blocks:
1.
Use thrust blocks for fittings on pipe greater than or equal to 3-inch diameter or any
diameter rubber gasketed pipe.
2.
Use 3,000 PSI concrete.
3.
Use 2 mil plastic.
4.
Use No. 4 Rebar wrapped or painted with asphalt tar based mastic coating.
Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: Gate valve shall conform to the requirements as presented
in the drawings and installation details.
Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: double swing joint arrangement as presented in the
installation details.
SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
328400 - 4/9
02131517
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 328400
PLANTING IRRIGATION
A.
B.
2.7
CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
B.
2.8
Remote Control Valve Assembly for Landscape Sprinkler Laterals: as presented in the
installation details. Use wire connectors and waterproofing sealant to join the control wires
to solenoid valves.
Landscape Rotary Sprinkler Assembly: as presented in the drawings and installation
details.
Controller: as presented in the drawings and installation details.
Control Wire:
1.
Use solid copper, multi-conductor, color coded, Type TC electrical cable, UL
approved for direct underground burial from the control unit to each remote control
valve. Refer to plans for number of conductors required.
2.
Color: Use white for common ground wire. Use easily distinguished colors for other
control wires. Spare control wires shall be of a color different from that of the active
control wires. Wire color shall be continuous over its entire length.
3.
Splices: Use wire connector with waterproof sealant. Wire connector to be of plastic
construction consisting of two (2) pieces, one piece which snap locks into the other.
A copper crimp sleeve to be provided with connector.
OTHER COMPONENTS
A.
B.
Tools and Spare Parts: Provide operating keys, servicing tools, test equipment, spare parts
and other items indicated in the General Notes on the drawings.
Other Materials: Provide other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation
details which are part of the irrigation system, even though such items may not have been
referenced in these specifications.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1
SITE INVESTIGATION
A.
B.
3.2
Site Investigation:
1.
Examine final grades and verify construction site conditions, and note irregularities
affecting work within the project limits. Report irregularities to the Owner’s
Representative prior to beginning work. Do not start irrigation system work until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
2.
Contractor is to verify existing static water pressure and flow characteristics prior to
construction, and to notify the Landscape Architect if the available water pressure and
flow requirements are less than required.
Utility Locations (“Call Before You Dig”):
1.
Arrange for and coordinate with local authorities the location of all underground
utilities.
2.
Repair any underground utilities damaged during construction. Make repairs at no
additional cost to the contract price.
LAYOUT OF WORK
A.
The Contractor is responsible for staking out the irrigation system. Items staked include:
sprinklers, pipe, isolation valves, quick coupling valves, remote control valves, and any
other equipment required for construction.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
328400 - 5/9
02131517
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 328400
PLANTING IRRIGATION
B.
C.
3.3
The Contractor is to review irrigation system layout with Owner’s Representative after the
staking of each area has been completed. Notify the Owner’s Representative 24 hours in
advance of review.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and arrangement
of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, and in other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except
where deviations to layout are approved by the Landscape Architect.
EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Unclassified Excavation: Excavation shall be unclassified and shall include all materials
encountered, except all materials or matter that cannot be excavated by normal excavation
means shall be brought to the attention of the Owner’s Representative and an adjustment in
price agreed upon before excavation of these areas proceeds.
Mechanical Plowing of Pipe: Mechanical plowing or pulling of mainline piping will not be
allowed.
Trench Preparation: Excavate trenches to sufficient depth and width to permit the pipes to
be laid at the intended elevations and to permit work space for installing connections and
fittings. Over-excavate trenches two inches and bring back to indicated depth by filling with
fine, rock-free soil or sand. The bottom of all trenches shall be accurately graded to provide
uniform bedding and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at every point
along its length.
Minimum Pipe Cover: Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, install irrigation piping at a
minimum depth of (from top of pipe or control wire to finish grade):
1.
18-inches over pipe & wire sleeves under pavement.
2.
18-inches over mainline pipe.
3.
18-inches over electrical & control wires not located in trench with mainline.
4.
12-inches over lateral pipe to landscape sprinklers.
Utility Conflicts: Where utilities conflict with irrigation trenching and pipework, contact the
Owner’s Representative for trench depth adjustments.
Backfill Material: Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Backfill should
be free from rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 2-inches in
maximum dimension. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Backfill placed next to
pipe shall be free of sharp objects which may damage the pipe.
Additional Backfill Material: When additional backfill material is needed to replace rock
and/or other unsuitable materials, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility and expense to
supply such material, for backfill.
Backfilling and Compaction:
1.
Backfill only after lines have been reviewed and tested.
2.
Cover pipe, both top and sides, with two inches of like material. In no case shall
there be less than two inches of rock-free soil or sand surrounding pipe.
3.
Backfill the trench by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of the pipe
in 6-inch layers and compacting to the density of surrounding soil or to a minimum of
90%.
4.
Any trenches in which settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for
compaction, then refilled and compacted.
Closing Trenches: All trenches that are opened during any particular working day shall be
closed and backfilled the same day. No open trenches or partially backfilled trenches shall
be left overnight.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
328400 - 6/9
02131517
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 328400
PLANTING IRRIGATION
J.
3.4
ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.5
Dispose of Unsuitable Material: It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to dispose of the
unsuitable materials removed from the trench that cannot be used in the backfill operations,
unless the foregoing is otherwise agreed upon by the Owner and Contractor.
General:
1.
Keep pipe free of dirt and pipe scale. Cut pipe ends square. Remove burrs at cut
ends prior to installation so unobstructed flow will result.
2.
Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to
continue assembly.
3.
Trenches may be curved to change direction or avoid obstructions within the limits of
the curvature of the pipe. Minimum radii of curvature are 25 feet for 2-inch diameter
pipe, and 100 feet for 3- and 4-inch diameter pipe. All curvature results from the
bending of the pipe lengths. No deflection will be allowed at a pipe joint.
Mainline Pipe and Fittings:
1.
Use only strap-type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe.
2.
PVC Rubber-Gasketed Pipe:
a.
Use pipe lubricant. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer
and in accordance with accepted industry practices.
3.
PVC Solvent Weld Pipe:
a.
Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in a manner recommended by the
manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices.
b.
Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in
pipe.
c.
Snake pipe from side to side within the trench.
4.
Fittings: The use of cross type fittings is not permitted.
Lateral Pipe and Fittings:
1.
Use only strap-type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe.
2.
PVC Solvent Weld Pipe:
a.
Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in the manner recommended by the
manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices.
b.
Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in the
pipe.
c.
Snake pipe from side to side within the trench.
Specialized Pipe and Fittings:
1.
PVC Threaded Connections:
a.
Use only factory-formed threads. Field-cut threads are not permitted.
b.
Use only Teflon-type tape or teflon based paste.
c.
When connection is plastic-to-metal, the plastic component shall have male
threads and the metal component shall have female threads.
2.
Make metal-to-metal, threaded connections with Teflon-type tape or pipe joint
compound applied to the male threads only.
Dripline and Accessories:
1.
Use only Teflon tape on all threaded connections.
Thrust Blocks:
1. Use cast-in-place concrete bearing against undisturbed soil.
2. Size, orientation and placement shall be as shown on the installation details.
3. Wrap fitting with plastic to protect bolts, joint, and fitting from concrete.
4. Install rebar with mastic coating as shown on the installation details.
INSTALLATION OF MAINLINE COMPONENTS
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
328400 - 7/9
02131517
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 328400
PLANTING IRRIGATION
A.
B.
C.
3.6
INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS
A.
B.
C.
3.7
Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings.
Sprinkler Lateral Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings.
Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings.
Remote Zone Control Valve Assembly:
1.
Flush mainline before installation of Zone Control Assembly.
2.
Install where indicated on the drawings. Wire connectors and waterproof sealant
shall be used to connect control wires to remote zone control valve wires. Install
connectors and sealant per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.
Install in valve control boxes, arranged for easy adjustment and removal. Valves
shall be flanged or have unions installed on downstream side to permit easy removal
and replacement.
4.
Locate valve box at least 12-inches from and align with nearby walls or edges of
paved areas. Group valve assemblies together where practical.
5.
Adjust control valves to regulate the downstream operating pressure.
Landscape Sprinkler Assembly:
1.
Flush lateral piping with a full head of water and install sprinkler assembly after
hydrostatic test is complete.
2.
Install flexible swing joint assembly as indicated on drawings.
3.
Install sprinklers perpendicular to the finish grade, and set heights as indicated on
drawings.
4.
Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from walls
and 2 inches from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Supply appropriate nozzle or adjust arc of coverage of each sprinkler for best
performance.
6.
Adjust the radius of throw of each sprinkler for best performance.
Dripline Installation:
1.
When installing dripline on surface or under mulch, install soil staples as listed below:
a.
Sandy Soil – One staple every 3’ and 2 staples on each change of direction
(tee, elbow, or cross).
b.
Cap or plug all openings as soon as lines have been installed to prevent the
entrance of materials that would obstruct the pipe. Leave in place until
removal is necessary for completion of installation.
2.
Thoroughly flush all water lines before installing valves and other hydrants.
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
B.
Controller: Install where indicated on the drawings.
Low Voltage Control Cable:
1.
All control or "hot" wires shall be color coded for each zone, and all common or
ground wires shall be of one color. Install and label spare control wires from each
controller to all end valve locations. Review with Owner’s Representative prior to
installation.
2.
Bundle control wires where two or more are in the same trench. Tape control wires or
cable to the side of mainline every 10'. Wherever the control wire or cable leaves the
main line, it shall be enclosed in a Class 200 PVC conduit. Waterproof wire
connectors shall be installed at all splices.
3.
All wire and cable shall be furnished in minimum 2,500' reels and sliced only at valve
or tee locations. All wiring shall have an extended warranty period of two (2) years
from date of final completion for short and dead wires.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
328400 - 8/9
02131517
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 328400
PLANTING IRRIGATION
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.8
PROJECT RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS
A.
B.
C.
3.9
All wire connections at control valves and heads, and splices shall be left with
sufficient slack so that in case of repair, the valve bonnet or splice may be brought to
the surface without disconnection.
Provide a 24-inch excess length of wire in an 8-inch diameter loop at each 90 degree
change of direction, at both ends of sleeves, and at 100-foot intervals along
continuous runs of wiring. Do not tie wiring loop.
Install common ground wire and one control wire for each remote control valve.
Multiple sprinklers or remote control valves on a single control wire are not permitted.
If a control wire must be spliced, make splice with wire connectors and waterproof
sealant, installed per the manufacturer’s instructions. Locate splice in a valve box
which contains an irrigation valve assembly, or in a separate 10-inch round valve
box.
The Contractor is responsible for documenting changes to the design. Maintain on-site and
separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of contract documents as
Project Documents.
Record work which is installed differently than shown on the construction drawings. Record
pipe and wiring network alterations and location changes to sprinklers, valves, and
controllers. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until as-built
information is recorded.
Turn over the “Record Drawings” to the Landscape Architect. Completion of the Record
Drawings will be a prerequisite for the Review at the completion of the irrigation system
installation.
WINTERIZATION AND SPRING START-UP
A.
Winterize the irrigation system in the fall following construction completion and start-up the
irrigation system in the following spring. Repair any damage caused in improper
winterization at no additional cost to the Owner. Coordinate the winterization and start-up
with the landscape superintendent.
3.10 MAINTENANCE
A.
B.
Upon completion of construction and Review by the Owner’s Representative, maintain
irrigation system for a duration of 30 calendar days. Make periodic examinations and
adjustments to irrigation system components so as to achieve the most desirable
application of water.
Following completion of the Contractor’s maintenance period, the Owner will be responsible
for maintaining the system in working order during the remainder of the guarantee/warranty
period, for performing necessary minor maintenance, for trimming around sprinklers, for
protecting against vandalism, and for preventing damage after the landscape maintenance
operation.
3.11 CLEANUP
A.
Upon completion of work, remove from the site all machinery, tools, excess materials, and
rubbish.
END OF SECTION 328400
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
328400 - 9/9
02131517
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 329200
TURF AND GRASS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A.
B.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Seeding & Sodding
DEFINITIONS
Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves,
twigs, and detritus.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a
pest.
This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface
soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and
perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top
surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
Surface Soil: Whatever soil is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project
site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as
urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Certification of grass seed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor
on Project site when work is in progress.
1.
Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a
qualified soil-testing laboratory.
1.
Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook
No. 60.
2.
A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each
soil to be used or amended for planting purposes.
3.
Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
329200 - 1/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 329200
TURF AND GRASS
a.
b.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
B.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil
amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy,
viable plants.
Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide
additional recommendations for corrective action.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened
containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and
indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Planting Restrictions: Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide
required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be
obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape
Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is
planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following
periods:
1.
Seeded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.
a.
When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or
if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.
2.
Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.
SEQUENCING & SCHEDULING
Notice to Proceed: The Contractor shall not commence with turf preparation until the following
site and irrigation improvements have been completed within the designated area of
construction.
• Installation and testing of irrigation system.
• Planting of shrubs and trees, and placement of mulch material.
• Subgrade prep to required elevation.
• Scarify and prep subgrade as specified.
• Review and approval from Owner’s Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
SEED
Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed
Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
Grass Seed Mix: Refer to Drawings.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
329200 - 2/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 329200
TURF AND GRASS
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
B.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
B.
2.7
A.
2.8
A.
TURFGRASS SOD
Turfgrass Sod: Number 1 Quality/Premium including limitations on thatch, weeds,
diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod
Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of
uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, grown on mineral soil, and capable of
vigorous growth and development when planted.
Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows:
1.
Kentucky bluegrass/Texas bluegrass 60% - 40% blend as follows:
a.
60% Kentucky Bluegrass consisting of a minimum of three locally-adapted
cultivars.
b.
40% Hybrid (Kentucky x Texas) Bluegrass.
ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8;
moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch sieve;
soluble salt content of <4 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and
free of substances toxic to plantings.
1.
Feedstock: Decomposed leaf and yard wastes.
FERTILIZERS
Starter fertilizer at planting.
Slow-Release, non-burning, organic nitrogen fertilizer – after initial mowing.
PLANTING SOILS
Planting Soil: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer
retained during excavation process. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil.
Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete
slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous
materials harmful to plant growth. Mix soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in
the following quantities to produce planting soil:
1.
Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4.
2.
Starter Fertilizer: Per Soil Test Recommendations.
MULCHES
Temporary or Non-Irrigated Seeded Areas: Provide Erosion Control Blankets, Type 2 – Curlex
II AEC Premier Straw 2 manufactured by American Excelsior Company (Tel: 800.777.7645 /
Web: amerexcel.com) or Type 2 – SS2 manufactured by Western Excelsior (Tel: 800.833.8573
/ Web: westernexcelsior.com).
Irrigated Seeded Areas: Biodegradable, green-dyed, whole wood fiber with 10% organic
tackifier by weight, nontoxic; free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum
moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 5.0.
EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS
Erosion-Control Blankets, Netting, and Wattles: Refer to Civil Drawings and Specifications.
PESTICIDES
General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
329200 - 3/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 329200
TURF AND GRASS
required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
TURF AREA PREPARATION
Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones
larger than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter
and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1.
Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil
amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil.
2.
Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish
grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or
subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
a.
Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating,
grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows:
1.
Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil.
2.
Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches Apply soil amendments and fertilizers
according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches of soil.
3.
Remove stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other
extraneous matter.
4.
Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's
property.
Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, friable
texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove
ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be
planted in the immediate future.
Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry
before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
Before planting, obtain Owner’s Representative acceptance of finish grading; restore planting
areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
SEEDING
Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph.
Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other.
Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.
Seeding Rate: Refer to Drawings.
Roll seedbed lightly, and water with fine spray.
Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds within 24 hours after completing
seeding operations by the following methods:
1.
Non-Irrigated Seeded Areas: Provide and install erosion control blanket over all seeded
areas.
2.
Irrigated Seeded Areas: Apply wood fiber mulch with hydraulic equipment at a rate of
2,000 lb/acre. Provide uniform 100 percent coverage of seeded areas.
SODDING
Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or
muddy.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
329200 - 4/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 329200
TURF AND GRASS
B.
C.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
3.5
A.
B.
Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch
or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to
subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade,
eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor
cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
1.
Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3.
2.
Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod
manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.
Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting,
water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2
inches below sod.
TURF MAINTENANCE
Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and
performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and
replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce uniformly smooth turf areas. Provide
materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.
Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain height
appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than
1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.
Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate
applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before
each application is performed.
SATISFACTORY TURF
Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Owner’s Representative:
1.
Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand
of turf has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage
exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.
2.
Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, evencolored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and
surface irregularities.
Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue
maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
END OF SECTION 329200
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
329200 - 5/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 329300
PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Plants.
2.
Planting soils.
3.
Mulches.
DEFINITIONS
Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves,
twigs, and detritus.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a
pest.
This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface
soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and
perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where
the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the
stem or trunk.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top
surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In
undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban
environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.
Samples of mineral and organic mulch.
Product certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor
on Project site when work is in progress.
1.
Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
329300 - 1/5
02131517.00
05/14/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 329300
PLANTS
B.
C.
D.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a
qualified soil-testing laboratory.
1.
Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook
No. 60.
2.
A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each
soil to be used or amended for planting purposes.
3.
Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.
a.
State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil
amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy,
viable plants.
b.
Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide
additional recommendations for corrective action.
Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable
requirements in ANSI Z60.1.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from
sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not
bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide
protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery
and handling.
Handle planting stock by root ball.
Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If
planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate
aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep
roots moist.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Notice to Proceed: The Contractor shall not commence with planting of trees and shrubs until
the following site and irrigation improvements have been completed within the designated area
of construction:
• Subgrade prep to required elevation.
• Placement of planting soil for shrub beds.
• Installation and testing of irrigation system.
• Review and approval from Owner’s Representative.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in
materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of
adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond
Contractor's control.
b.
Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.
2.
Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion:
a.
Trees, Shrubs, and Perennials: 12 months.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
329300 - 2/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 329300
PLANTS
1.8
A.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of Landscape Installer.
Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and
continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than
maintenance period below.
1.
Maintenance Period for Trees, Shrubs, and Perennials: 30 days from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
B.
2.6
A.
PLANT MATERIAL
General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form,
shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings
and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or
root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated
when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald,
injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which
shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.
ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8;
moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch sieve;
soluble salt content of <4 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and
free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:
1.
Feedstock: Decomposed leaf and yard wastes.
FERTILIZERS
Slow-Release Organic Fertilizer.
PLANTING SOILS
Planting Soil: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer
retained during excavation process. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil.
Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete
slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous
materials harmful to plant growth. Mix soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in
the following quantities to produce planting soil:
1.
Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4.
2.
Fertilizer: Per soil test recommendation for new shrub/perennial plantings.
MULCHES
Organic Mulch: Refer to drawings.
Mineral Mulch: Refer to drawings.
WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS
Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven
polypropylene fabric, 5.0 oz./sq. yd.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
329300 - 3/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 329300
PLANTS
2.7
A.
PESTICIDES
General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PLANTING AREA (SHRUB BED) ESTABLISHMENT
Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than
1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally
dispose of them off Owner's property.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading.
Spread planting soil to a depth of 12 inches but not less than required to meet finish
grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen,
muddy, or excessively wet.
Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
EXCAVATION FOR TREES
Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom
leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away
from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil
to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
1.
Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter.
2.
Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the
bottom of the root ball.
Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil for trees.
TREE PLANTING
Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1.
Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not
break.
Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare flush with adjacent finish
grades.
1.
Balled and Burlapped: Remove all burlap and rope. After placing some backfill around
root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove wire baskets from tops and sides of
root ball. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is
cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
2.
Balled and Potted and Container-Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container
without damaging root ball or plant.
3.
Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before
placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
4.
Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the
surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the
surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
329300 - 4/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 329300
PLANTS
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.6
A.
B.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
TREE PRUNING
Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural
and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Landscape Architect, do not cut tree
leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to
retain natural character.
SHRUB AND PERENNIAL PLANTING
Refer to Drawings for layout and spacing.
Use planting soil for backfill.
Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not
break.
Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.
Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around
plants to hold water.
Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery
from transplanting shock.
PLANTING AREA MULCHING
Install weed-control barriers before rock mulching according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 12 inches
and secure seams with galvanized pins.
Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.
1.
Trees in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-inch average thickness, with 36-inch
radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.
2.
Organic Mulch and Mineral Mulch in Planting (Shrub Bed) Areas: Apply 3-inch average
thickness of mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish approximately 1 inch
lower adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.
PLANT MAINTENANCE
Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring
planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations
as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and
shrubs free of insects and disease.
Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.
Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and
pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.
Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate
applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before
each application is performed.
Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors
and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or
replace damaged plantings.
END OF SECTION 329300
Designworks, Inc.
RJF
329300 - 5/5
02131517.00
05/19/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK